You are on page 1of 274

STM-16 ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0

Installation and Operation User Guide

253 203 019-A

3 000 328 820 R11 000-01

April 2009 - Issue 01


LIST OF CHANGES

(A new edition replaces any previous versions)

No Date Change description/ Page

288 054 178-01 June 2004 Creation of original user guide/ All pages/

288 054 178-02 January Addition of SWITCH 32 VC4 HO/LO card All pages/
2005 / DCC Transparency / GFP150 eXtra
card

288 054 178-03 June 2005 3E3DS3FA card / TCM function / All pages/
New data features on GFP /
New alarms on GIG-E and GFP

288 054 178-04 January Addition of Pause mode (flow control) All pages /
2006 New optical Booster

288 113 969-01 November New SDH alarms All pages /


2006 Addition of VCG_RDI alarm
Addition of following cards :
- STM1-SFP
- STM4-SFP
- STM16-SFP
-xGE-DM
- 2GE-DM-SFP
- 63E1FA

288 113 969-02 March 2008 Addition of GFP2500-2GE All pages


and 2GE-DM-2G cards
Addition of Front panel of cards Change
Procedure

253 203 019-A April 2009 Addition of LDR on xGE-DM cards All pages
Addition of Firefox
3 000 328 820 R11 000-01 GUI relooking

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
PORTS SECURITY LEVELS

ADR2500 eXtra shelf ports security levels


Front panel connectors Function Safety level
LTU3E3DS3 card
TR and REC G703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic access SELV
LTU21E120 card
E1 INPUT and G703 120 2 Mbit/s traffic access SELV
E1 OUTPUT
LTU21E75 card
E1 INPUT and G703 75 2 Mbit/s traffic access SELV
E1 OUTPUT
3E3DS3FA card
TR and REC G703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic access SELV
63E1FA card
E1 INPUT and G703 120 2 Mbit/s traffic access SELV
E1 OUTPUT
CCU-2G card
POWER/ALM Access to station power supply and alarms SELV
LOOPS Access to signaling and dry loops SELV
SYNC Access to G.703 2 MHz synchronization SELV
CTRL-2G card
ETH Access to remote management via Ethernet network SELV
IEEE802.3 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet / Fast
Ethernet Access
COMM Access to local management via VT100 console or a PC SELV
STM-n cards
TR and REC - G.957 STM-n Optical access (n=1, 4 or 16) Class 1 laser
- G703 STM-1 Electrical access Harmless (*)

4ERE card
TR and REC G703 STM-1 Electrical access SELV
AUX card
EOW and AUX Engineering Order Wire SELV
GIG-E card
TR and REC Optical Gigabit Ethernet Access Class 1 laser
Harmless
RS232 Maintenance Access SELV
xGE-DM card
TR and REC - Optical Gigabit Ethernet Access Class 1 laser
Harmless
- IEEE802.3 1000BaseT Electrical access SELV

GFP150 eXtra card


ETH IEEE802.3 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet / Fast SELV
Ethernet Access
GFP2500-2GE
TR and REC - Optical Gigabit Ethernet Access Class 1 laser
Harmless
- IEEE802.3 1000BaseT Electrical access SELV

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 0-3
(*)The safety level Laser class 1 (compliant to the standard EN 60 825) is reinforced by output
power shutdown when the input power is under a defined level (for example fiber breaking)

The ADR2500 eXtra shelf must only be mounted in racks with lower part
) closed or equipped with a class V1 or HF1 air filter (minimum) or resting
on a non-inflammable floor.

Safe grounding obligation


This equipment must only be installed by qualified personnel. The protective ground terminal
must be connected to a safe grounding system with resistance of Z < 5 ohms to fulfill technical
compliance.

Handling precaution
) Use of an electrostatic bracelet is mandatory for all interventions inside the
equipment.

The logo , marked on certain cards, puts in guard against burns which
can be caused by an important elevation of the temperature of the radiator.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
WARNING

SAGEM Communications carefully monitors all technical changes and strives continuously to
improve its products for the benefit of its customers.
It therefore reserves the right to change its documentation without prior notice.

ENVIRONMENT

Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential concern of


Sagem Communications.
The desire of Sagem Communications is to operate systems observing the environment and
consequently it has decided to integrate environmental performances in the life cycle of its products,
from manufacturing to commissioning, use and elimination.

PACKAGING:

The presence of the logo (green dot) means that a contribution is paid to an
approved national organisation to improve packaging recovery and recycling
infrastructures.
To facilitate recycling, please respect the sorting rules set up locally for this kind of
waste.

BATTERIES:

If your product contains batteries, they must be disposed of at appropriate collection points.

THE PRODUCT:

The crossed-out waste bin stuck on the product (or on its accessories) means that
the product belongs to the family of electrical and electronic equipment.
In this respect, the European regulations ask you to dispose of it selectively:
At sales points in the event of the purchase of similar equipment.
At the collection points made available to you locally (drop-off centre,
selective collection, etc.).

In this way you can participate in the re-use and upgrading of WEE (Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment), which can have an effect on the environment and human health.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 0-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF CHANGES............................................................................................................................. 0-2


PORTS SECURITY LEVELS ............................................................................................................... 0-3
ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................... 0-5
1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 - GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 - ADR2500 EXTRA CONSTITUTION ................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 - SHELFINSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 - CARDS ACCESS POINTS ............................................................................................................... 1-11
1.4.1 - Connection to LTU21E1 or LTU21E75 cards .................................................................... 1-12
1.4.2 - Connection to LTU3E3DS3 card........................................................................................ 1-14
1.4.3 - Connection to CCU-2G card .............................................................................................. 1-14
1.4.3.1 - "POWER/ALM" connector ...........................................................................................................1-15
1.4.3.2 - Remote signaling, remote control and station alarms access : LOOPS" ....................................1-16
1.4.3.3 - 2 MHz G.703 sync access : "SYNC" ...........................................................................................1-17
1.4.4 - Connection to CTRL-2G card ............................................................................................ 1-18
1.4.4.1 - Configuration access : "COMM" connector..................................................................................1-18
1.4.4.2 - Management access : "ETH" connector ......................................................................................1-19
1.4.5 - Connection to AUX card .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.6 - Connection to 3E3DS3FA card.......................................................................................... 1-22
1.4.7 - Connection to 63E1FA card............................................................................................... 1-23
1.4.8 - Connection to Optical STM-n cards ................................................................................... 1-23
1.4.9 - Connection to Electrical STM-1 card ................................................................................. 1-28
1.4.10 - Connection to GIG-E card................................................................................................ 1-28
1.4.10.1 - GigaEthernet interfaces .............................................................................................................1-29
1.4.10.2 - Maintenance access : "RS232" connector.................................................................................1-29
1.4.11 - Connection to xGE-DM cards .......................................................................................... 1-30
1.4.12 - Connection to GFP150 eXtra card................................................................................... 1-31
1.4.13 - Connection to GFP2500-2GE card .................................................................................. 1-32
1.5 - SHELF WITHOUT PDH PROTECTION ............................................................................................... 1-33
2 COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION ......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 - COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 - Required configuration......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 - Procedure............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.3 - Defining parameters for IP address and Ethernet port ........................................................ 2-4
2.1.4 - Using the Web browser........................................................................................................ 2-9
2.1.4.1 - PC Configuration ...........................................................................................................................2-9
2.1.4.2 - Browser IE configuration ...............................................................................................................2-9
2.1.4.3 - Browser Firefox configuration ......................................................................................................2-10
2.1.4.4 - Initial commissioning ...................................................................................................................2-10
2.1.4.5 - Menus tree...................................................................................................................................2-10
2.1.4.6 - Presentation of the Graphical User Interface...............................................................................2-12
2.2 - OPERATION ................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.2.1 - Functional description ........................................................................................................ 2-15
2.2.2 - General information ........................................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.3 - Management network ........................................................................................................ 2-16
2.2.3.1 - Description of communication function ........................................................................................2-16
2.2.3.2 - Description of DCC transparency function...................................................................................2-18

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
2.2.4 - Operation parameters ........................................................................................................ 2-18
2.2.4.1 - Network Configuration Parameters..............................................................................................2-19
2.2.4.2 - Equipment Configuration Parameters..........................................................................................2-22
2.2.4.3 - Maintenance commands and operations.....................................................................................2-43
2.2.4.4 - Alarm processing.........................................................................................................................2-44
2.2.5 - Performance processing .................................................................................................... 2-60
2.2.6 - Optical Supervision ............................................................................................................ 2-62
2.2.7 - Synchronization.................................................................................................................. 2-62
2.2.8 - Loops Management ........................................................................................................... 2-64
2.2.9 - MS-SPRing protection on LINE interfaces......................................................................... 2-66
2.2.9.1 - Introduction..................................................................................................................................2-66
2.2.9.2 - Principle.......................................................................................................................................2-66
2.2.9.3 - Configuration rules relative to 2-fibers MS-SPRing protection.....................................................2-67
2.2.10 - TCM Function................................................................................................................... 2-70
2.2.10.1 - TCM Points at Equipment Level ................................................................................................2-70
2.2.10.2 - TCM VC4 Points Management by GUI......................................................................................2-74
2.2.11 - Quality of service for VC4nv GigaEthernet of GIG-E card............................................... 2-76
2.2.11.1 - Classification criteria..................................................................................................................2-76
2.2.11.2 - Bandwidth management ............................................................................................................2-79
2.2.11.3 - Congestion management in emission on the WAN ...................................................................2-79
2.2.11.4 - Congestion management in reception WAN..............................................................................2-81
2.3 - CARDS PROTECTION .................................................................................................................... 2-82
2.3.1 - PDH cards protection......................................................................................................... 2-82
2.3.2 - SWITCH HO/LO card protection........................................................................................ 2-82
2.3.3 - PSU card protection........................................................................................................... 2-83
2.4 - SUB-ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 2-83
2.4.1 - Replacement of an Interface card...................................................................................... 2-83
2.4.2 - Replacement of a SWITCH HO/LO card ........................................................................... 2-84
2.4.3 - Replacement of a PSU module.......................................................................................... 2-84
2.4.4 - Replacement of a CTRL-2G card ...................................................................................... 2-85
2.4.5 - Replacement of a CCU-2G card ........................................................................................ 2-86
2.4.6 - Replacement of FAN-2G module....................................................................................... 2-86
2.4.7 - Preventive maintenance .................................................................................................... 2-86
2.5 - FRONT PANEL OF CARDS CHANGE PROCEDURE ............................................................................ 2-87
3 SPARE PARTS AND CABLES .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 - LIST OF NO ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS ..................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 - LIST OF ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS .......................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 - LIST OF AVAILABLE CABLES ............................................................................................................ 3-4
4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS .............................................................................................. 4-1

5 DEGRADED MODE ...................................................................................................................... 5-1


5.1 - DEFINITION ................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 - CHARACTERIZATION ...................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 - POSSIBLE CAUSES ......................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4 - OPERATOR ACTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.5 - DEGRADED MODE SWITCH WARNING ............................................................................................... 5-8
5.6 - ACTIONS TO REALIZE ACCORDING TO CASES ................................................................................... 5-9
6 GFP150 EXTRA CARD ................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 - GFP150 EXTRA CARD AND SERVICES PRESENTATION .................................................................... 6-1
6.2 - CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATIONS OF GFP150 EXTRA CARDS ..................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 - GFP150 eXtra card setup .................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 - Create a LAN interconnection.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2.1 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EPLine service ................................................................6-3
6.2.2.2 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EVPLine service (sharing) .............................................6-10
6.2.2.3 - Hub and Spoke interconnection: EPLAN service....................................................................6-12
6.2.2.4 - Bus interconnection : service EPLAN........................................................................................6-15
6.2.2.5 - Bus interconnection : service EVPLAN ....................................................................................6-17

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 0-7
6.2.3 - Implementation of the OAM-CC function (Operation Administration Maintenance -
Continuity Check) on the GFP150 eXtra card............................................................................... 6-18
6.2.4 - Implementation of Quality of Service features of GFP150 eXtra card............................... 6-19
6.2.4.1 - QoS functions of GFP150 eXtra card .........................................................................................6-19
6.2.4.2 - Configuring the QoS features ......................................................................................................6-21
6.2.5 - Implementation of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card......... 6-25
6.2.5.1 - Description of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card ..........................6-25
6.2.5.2 - MSTP Licence Activation on a GFP150 eXtra card .....................................................................6-27
6.2.5.3 - Example of MSTP configuration ..................................................................................................6-28
6.2.6 - Implementation of LCAS on the GFP150 eXtra card......................................................... 6-32
6.2.6.1 - Description of LCAS ....................................................................................................................6-32
6.2.6.2 - Example of LCAS configuration...................................................................................................6-32
6.3 - A FEW RULES FOR SET-UP............................................................................................................ 6-33
6.3.1 - Various configuration rules ................................................................................................ 6-33
6.3.2 - QoS configuration rules ..................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4 - APPLICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 6-33
6.4.1 - Meshed networks ............................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4.2 - Protection of channels ....................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4.3 - Degraded mode ................................................................................................................. 6-34
6.5 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................................... 6-34
6.5.1 - Main characteristics ........................................................................................................... 6-34
6.5.2 - Ethernet rate / VCG rate .................................................................................................... 6-35
6.5.3 - Number of VC12 in a VCG................................................................................................. 6-36
6.5.4 - Number of VC3 in a VCG................................................................................................... 6-36
7 GFP2500 CARD-2GE ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 - S-VLAN DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 - Tag of frames ....................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 - Classification ........................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.3 - CoS ...................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.4 - MAC addresses Table ......................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2 - GFP2500 CARD AND SERVICES PRESENTATION ............................................................................. 7-9
7.3 - CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATIONS OF GFP2500 CARDS ............................................................ 7-11
7.3.1 - GFP2500 card setup.......................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.2 - Create a LAN interconnection............................................................................................ 7-11
7.3.2.1 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EPLine service ..............................................................7-11
7.3.2.2 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EVPLine service (sharing) .............................................7-18
7.3.2.3 - Hub and Spoke interconnection : EPLAN service...................................................................7-21
7.3.2.4 - Bus interconnection : service EPLAN........................................................................................7-23
7.3.2.5 - Bus interconnection : service EVPLAN ...................................................................................7-25
7.3.3 - Implementation of the OAM-CC function (Operation Administration Maintenance -
Continuity Check) on the GFP2500 card ...................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.4 - Implementation of Quality of Service features of GFP2500 card ...................................... 7-27
7.3.4.1 - QoS functions of the GFP2500 card............................................................................................7-27
7.3.4.2 - Configuring the QoS features ......................................................................................................7-29
7.3.5 - Implementation of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP2500 card ................ 7-34
7.3.5.1 - Description of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP2500 card..................................7-34
7.3.5.2 - MSTP Licence Activation on a GFP2500 card ............................................................................7-36
7.3.5.3 - Example of MSTP configuration ..................................................................................................7-37
7.3.6 - Implementation of LCAS on the GFP2500 card ................................................................ 7-41
7.3.6.1 - Description of LCAS ....................................................................................................................7-41
7.3.6.2 - Example of LCAS configuration...................................................................................................7-41
7.3.7 - Implementation of the Link Aggregation Function (Trunk) on the GFP2500 card ............. 7-42
7.3.7.1 - GE Trunk function........................................................................................................................7-42
7.3.7.2 - VCG Trunk function .....................................................................................................................7-43
7.3.7.3 - Trunk function alarms ..................................................................................................................7-43
7.4 - A FEW RULES FOR SET-UP............................................................................................................ 7-44
7.4.1 - Various configuration rules ................................................................................................ 7-44
7.4.2 - QoS configuration rules ..................................................................................................... 7-44
7.5 - APPLICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 7-44
7.5.1 - Meshed networks ............................................................................................................... 7-44
7.5.2 - Protection of channels ....................................................................................................... 7-44
7.5.3 - Degraded mode ................................................................................................................. 7-45

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
7.6 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................................... 7-45
7.6.1 - Main characteristics ........................................................................................................... 7-45
7.6.2 - Ethernet rate / VCG rate .................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.3 - Number of VC4 in a VCG................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.4 - Number of VC3 in a VCG................................................................................................... 7-47
7.7 - GFP2500-2GE CARD INTER-WORKING ........................................................................................ 7-48
7.7.1 - GFP2500-2GE card inter-working with xGE-DM card or 4E/FE card of ADR155C .......... 7-48
7.7.2 - GFP2500-2GE card inter-working with GFP150 card........................................................ 7-48
A CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN................................................... A-1
A.1 - PRELIMINARY REMARKS .................................................................................................................A-1
A.2 - IP ADDRESSING.............................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 - ADDRESSING PLAN ........................................................................................................................A-3
A.4 - USE OF STATIC TABLES..................................................................................................................A-3
A.5 - USE OF RIP ROUTING DAEMON ......................................................................................................A-5
A.6 - USE OF OSPF ROUTING DAEMON ..................................................................................................A-6
B OPTICAL BOOSTER................................................................................................................... B-1
B.1 - INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................................B-1
B.1.1 - Access security level ...........................................................................................................B-1
B.1.2 - General information .............................................................................................................B-1
B.1.3 - Installation............................................................................................................................B-2
B.1.4 - Connection of access points................................................................................................B-3
B.1.4.1 - Optical ports ................................................................................................................................. B-3
B.1.4.2 - Power port.................................................................................................................................... B-3
B.1.4.3 - Alarm loops .................................................................................................................................. B-4
B.2 - OPERATION...............................................................................................................................B-5
B.2.1 - General information .............................................................................................................B-5
B.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation ................................................................................B-5
B.2.3 - Display and directions for use .............................................................................................B-5
B.2.4 - Alarm processing .................................................................................................................B-6
B.3 - SPARE PART AND CABLES......................................................................................................B-7
B.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................B-8
C MUX 10000 A/T............................................................................................................................ C-1
C.1 - INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................................C-1
C.1.1 - General information.............................................................................................................C-1
C.1.2 - Installation ...........................................................................................................................C-2
C.1.3 - Connection of access points ...............................................................................................C-3
C.2 - OPERATION ..............................................................................................................................C-3
C.2.1 - General information.............................................................................................................C-3
C.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation................................................................................C-4
C.2.3 - Multiplexing demultiplexing function specification............................................................C-4
C.2.4 - Optical power budget ..........................................................................................................C-5
C.3 - SPARE PARTS AND CABLES ...................................................................................................C-5
C.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................C-6
D CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES .................................................................................................. D-1
D.1 - CONFIGURING A PPP PORT .............................................................................................................D-1
D.2 - VIEWING THE ROUTING CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................D-2
D.3 - BUILDING A POINT-TO-POINT LINK ...................................................................................................D-3
D.4 - BUILDING A BUS LINK .....................................................................................................................D-4
D.5 - BUILDING A RING ...........................................................................................................................D-5
D.6 - MANAGING EQUIPMENT THROUGH THE NETWORK OF A DIFFERENT SUPPLIER ....................................D-6

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 0-9
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1-1 : Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in 19" rack ................................................................ 1-5
Figure 1-2 : Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in ETSI rack ............................................................. 1-6
Figure 1-3 : ADR2500 eXtra equipped shelf ........................................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-4 : Front panel of LTU21E120 card...................................................................................... 1-12
Figure 1-5 : Front panel of LTU3E3DS3 card..................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-6 : Front panel of CCU-2G card ........................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-7 : POWER/ALM power supply cable ............................................................................. 1-16
Figure 1-8 : Front panel of CTRL-2G card ......................................................................................... 1-18
Figure 1-9 : Comm connection cable ........................................................................................... 1-19
Figure 1-10 : Straight-through Ethernet cable.............................................................................. 1-20
Figure 1-11 : Cross-over Ethernet cable ..................................................................................... 1-20
Figure 1-12 : Front panel of AUX card ............................................................................................... 1-21
Figure 1-13 : AUX/EOW connection cable ................................................................................... 1-21
Figure 1-14 : Front panel of 3E3DS3FA card..................................................................................... 1-22
Figure 1-15 : Front panel of 63E1FA card.......................................................................................... 1-23
Figure 1-16 : Front panel of STM-1 interface card ............................................................................. 1-23
Figure 1-17 : Front panel of STM-4 interface card ............................................................................. 1-24
Figure 1-18 : Front panel of STM-16 interface card ........................................................................... 1-24
Figure 1-19 : Front panel of 4ERE interface card .............................................................................. 1-28
Figure 1-20 : Front panel of GIG-E interface card.............................................................................. 1-28
Figure 1-21 : Front panel of 2GE-DM interface card.......................................................................... 1-30
Figure 1-22 : Front panel of GFP150 eXtra card................................................................................ 1-31
Figure 1-23 : Front panel of GFP2500-2GE card ............................................................................... 1-32

Figure 2-1 : Commissioning process for an ADR network ................................................................... 2-3


Figure 2-2 : Menus tree ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-3 : Shelf view screen of web browser ............................................................................. 2-12
Figure 2-4 : Communication function on an ADR2500 eXtra ............................................................. 2-16
Figure 2-5 : Example of communication on an ADR and other equipment network .......................... 2-17
Figure 2-6 : Synchronization using 2 MHz external synchronization input (T3)................................. 2-63
Figure 2-7 : Synchronization using a synchronous tributary access.................................................. 2-63
Figure 2-8 : Remote loopback function (collection of alarms on a Central Site) ................................ 2-65
Figure 2-9 : Example of a protected ring ............................................................................................ 2-66
Figure 2-10 : Topological map of a ring.............................................................................................. 2-68
Figure 2-11 : Example of incoming and outgoing traffic of a ring....................................................... 2-68
Figure 2-12 : TC EndPoints X/Y ......................................................................................................... 2-71
Figure 2-13 : TC EndPoints X/Y - Source facing Sink........................................................................ 2-71
Figure 2-14 : TC EndPoints X/Y - Source not facing Sink.................................................................. 2-72
Figure 2-15 : TC EndPoints X/Y Source and Sink back to back ..................................................... 2-72
Figure 2-16 : TC Monitoring Point Z located between TC EndPoint X and TC EndPoint Y............... 2-73

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-10 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Figure 6-1: Hardware design of the card.............................................................................................. 6-2
Figure 6-2 : EPLine service .................................................................................................................. 6-3
Figure 6-3 : Configuring the Ethernet interface .................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-4 : Configuring the VCG (1) ................................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-5 : Configuring the VCG (2) ................................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-6 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1) .................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-7 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2) .................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-8 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects .............................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-9 : Connectivity check ............................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-10 : Service EVPLine ........................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-11 : EPLAN service .............................................................................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-12 : EPLAN Service - "bus" mode........................................................................................ 6-15
Figure 6-13 : EVPLAN Service - "bus" mode ..................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-14 : Example of OAM utilization........................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6-15 : QoS architecture ........................................................................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-16 : Traffic profile ................................................................................................................. 6-20
Figure 6-17 : Configuring a srTCM profile .......................................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-18 : Configuring a trTCM profile........................................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-19 : Reading Traffic Classes parameters ............................................................................ 6-23
Figure 6-20 : Regulating Traffic Classes SP parameters................................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-21 : SLA compliance counters ............................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-22 : VMAN Port counters ..................................................................................................... 6-24
Figure 6-23 : MSTP port types ........................................................................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-24 : MSTP Licence Activation .............................................................................................. 6-27
Figure 6-25 : Example of MSTP configuration ................................................................................... 6-28
Figure 6-26 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (1).................................................... 6-29
Figure 6-27 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (2).................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-28 : MSTI Checking (1) ....................................................................................................... 6-31
Figure 6-29 : MSTI Checking (2) ....................................................................................................... 6-31

Figure 7-1 : Global Settings.................................................................................................................. 7-1


Figure 7-2 : Tag of frames (1) .............................................................................................................. 7-2
Figure 7-3 : Tag of frames (2) .............................................................................................................. 7-2
Figure 7-4 : Tag of frames (3) .............................................................................................................. 7-3
Figure 7-5 : Classification based on "Port"........................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-6 : Classification based on "C-Vlan" ...................................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-7 : Classification based on " User Predefined " ..................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-8 : Classification based on " Default " .................................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-9 : Classification based on " Point to Point " .......................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-10 : Classification based on " S-Vlan "................................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-11 : Class of Priority ............................................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7-12 : Port Priority ..................................................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7-13 : MAC addresses Table .................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-14 : Forbidden MAC addresses ............................................................................................. 7-8
Figure 7-15 : Static MAC addresses .................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-16 : Hardware design of the card......................................................................................... 7-10
Figure 7-17 : EPLine service .............................................................................................................. 7-11
Figure 7-18 : Configuring the Ethernet interface ................................................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-19 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects .......................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-20 : Configuring the VCG (1) ............................................................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-21 : Configuring the VCG (2) ............................................................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-22 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1).............................................................................. 7-15
Figure 7-23 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2).............................................................................. 7-16
Figure 7-24 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (3).............................................................................. 7-16
Figure 7-25 : Connectivity check ........................................................................................................ 7-17
Figure 7-26 : Service EVPLine ........................................................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-27 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects .......................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-28 : EPLAN service .............................................................................................................. 7-21

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 0-11
Figure 7-29 : EPLAN Service - "bus" mode........................................................................................ 7-23
Figure 7-30 : EVPLAN Service - "bus" mode ..................................................................................... 7-25
Figure 7-31 : Example of OAM utilization........................................................................................... 7-26
Figure 7-32 : QoS architecture ........................................................................................................... 7-27
Figure 7-33 : Traffic profile ................................................................................................................. 7-28
Figure 7-34 : Configuring a srTCM profile .......................................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-35 : Configuring a trTCM profile........................................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-36 : Reading Traffic Classes parameters ............................................................................ 7-31
Figure 7-37 : Regulating Traffic Classes SP parameters................................................................... 7-32
Figure 7-38 : SLA compliance counters ............................................................................................. 7-33
Figure 7-39 : S-Vlan Port counters..................................................................................................... 7-33
Figure 7-40 : MSTP port types ........................................................................................................... 7-35
Figure 7-41 : MSTP Licence Activation .............................................................................................. 7-36
Figure 7-42 : Example of MSTP configuration ................................................................................... 7-37
Figure 7-43 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (1).................................................... 7-38
Figure 7-44 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (2).................................................... 7-39
Figure 7-45 : MSTI Checking (1) ....................................................................................................... 7-40
Figure 7-46 : MSTI Checking (2) ....................................................................................................... 7-40
Figure 7-47 : Example of 802.3ad use ............................................................................................... 7-42
Figure 7-48 : GE Trunk Function........................................................................................................ 7-42
Figure 7-49 : VCG Trunk Function ..................................................................................................... 7-43

Figure A-1 : IP protocol stack ...............................................................................................................A-1


Figure A-2 : Example TMN architecture ...............................................................................................A-4

Figure B-1 : Optical booster Installation in rack ................................................................................B-2


Figure B-2 : Optical booster Optical access points ...........................................................................B-3

Figure C-1 : MUX10000T Block diagram (1/2 MUX 10000A) ............................................................ C-1
Figure C-2 : MUX 10000 T Front panel ............................................................................................ C-2
Figure C-3 : MUX 10000 A Front panel............................................................................................ C-2
Figure C-4 : MUX 10000 A Installation in 19" rack........................................................................... C-2
Figure C-5 : MUX 10000 A or T Optical access points .................................................................... C-3

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-12 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
LIST OF TABLES

Table 1-1 : Designation of ADR2500 eXtra slots.................................................................................. 1-8


Table 1-2 : Characteristics of single mode interfaces ........................................................................ 1-25
Table 1-3 : Characteristics of multimode interface............................................................................. 1-27
Table 1-4 : GigaEthernet interface Characteristics of GIG-E card ..................................................... 1-29
Table 1-5 : GigaEthernet interface Characteristics of xGE-DM card ................................................. 1-30
Table 1-6 : GigaEthernet interface Characteristics of GFP2500-2GE card ....................................... 1-32

Table 2-1 : Functional blocks of ADR2500 eXtra ............................................................................... 2-15


Tables 2-2 to 2-4 : Network configuration parameters ....................................................................... 2-19
Tables 2-5 to 2-25 : Equipment configuration parameters ................................................................. 2-22
Table 2-26 : Maintenance commands and operations. ...................................................................... 2-43
Table 2-27 : Specific indicator LEDs to CTRL-2G card...................................................................... 2-44
Table 2-28 : TRAFFIC indicator LEDs.......................................................................................... 2-44
Table 2-29 : STATUS indicator LEDs........................................................................................... 2-44
Table 2-30 : STATUS indicator LEDs on PSU cards ................................................................... 2-45
Table 2-31 : Specific indicator LEDs to GFP150 eXtra card .............................................................. 2-45
Table 2-32 : Pushbuttons ................................................................................................................... 2-45
Table 2-33 : Alarms and severity levels - xSTM-n cards.................................................................... 2-46
Table 2-34 : Alarms and severity levels - xSTM-n cards.................................................................... 2-47
Table 2-35 : Alarms and severity levels - xSTM-n cards.................................................................... 2-48
Table 2-36 : Alarms and severity levels - LTU21E1 and 63E1FA cards............................................ 2-48
Table 2-37 : Alarms and severity levels - LTU3E3DS3 and 3E3DS3FA cards.................................. 2-48
Table 2-38 : Alarms and severity levels - PDH cards......................................................................... 2-49
Table 2-39 : Alarms and severity levels - GIG-E card........................................................................ 2-49
Table 2-40 : Alarms and severity levels - xGE-DM card .................................................................... 2-50
Table 2-41 : Alarms and severity levels - GFP150 eXtra card ........................................................... 2-51
Table 2-42 : Alarms and severity levels - GFP2500-2GE card .......................................................... 2-52
Table 2-43 : Alarms and severity levels - CCU-2G card .................................................................... 2-53
Table 2-44 : Alarms and severity levels - CTRL-2G card................................................................... 2-53
Table 2-45 : Alarms and severity levels - SWITCH HO/LO card........................................................ 2-54
Table 2-46 : Alarms and severity levels - FAN-2G card..................................................................... 2-54
Table 2-47 : Alarms and severity levels - Cards ................................................................................ 2-54
Table 2-48 : Associated informations to card defective alarm ........................................................... 2-55
Table 2-49 : Correlation of STM-n faults ............................................................................................ 2-56
Table 2-50 : Correlation of MSP faults ............................................................................................... 2-56
Table 2-51 : Correlation of MS-SPRing faults .................................................................................... 2-56
Table 2-52 : Correlation of HPOM/HPT faults from SDH, xGE-DM and GFP2500-2GE cards ........ 2-57
Table 2-53 : Correlation of HPT faults from GIG-E cards .................................................................. 2-57
Table 2-54 : Correlation of HPA/LPOM/LPT faults............................................................................. 2-58
Table 2-55 : Correlation of 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s ports faults ..................................................................... 2-58
Table 2-56 : Correlation of Ethernet ports faults from Data cards...................................................... 2-58
Table 2-57 : Correlation of VCG faults from Data cards .................................................................... 2-59
Table 2-58 : Correlation of OAMCC faults from GFP150 eXtra and GFP2500-2G cardsE ............. 2-60
Table 2-59 : Correlation of aggregation faults from GFP2500-2GE cards....................................... 2-60

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 0-13
Tables 3-1 to 3-2 : List of no rohs ADR2500 eXtra items..................................................................... 3-1
Table 3-3 : List of rohs ADR2500 eXtra items...................................................................................... 3-3
Table 3-4 : List of rohs optical modules of ADR2500 eXtra ................................................................. 3-4
Tables 3-5 to 3-7: List of available cables ............................................................................................ 3-4

Tables 4-1 to 4-3 : Technical characteristics of ADR2500 eXtra ......................................................... 4-1

Tables 5-1 to 5-5 : Actions to realize according to cases..................................................................... 5-9

Table B-1 : Access security level .........................................................................................................B-1


Table B-2 : Failure indication definition ................................................................................................B-6
Table B-3 : List of items........................................................................................................................B-7
Table B-4 : List of available cables.......................................................................................................B-7
Table B-5 : Technical characteristics ...................................................................................................B-8

Table C-1 : MUX/DEMUX Specification .............................................................................................. C-4


Table C-2 : Optical power budget........................................................................................................ C-5
Table C-3 : List of items....................................................................................................................... C-5
Table C-4 : List of available cables ..................................................................................................... C-6
Table C-5 : Technical Characteristics ................................................................................................. C-6

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide 253 203 019-A
Page 0-14 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

1 INSTALLATION

1.1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

The ADR2500 eXtra (Add-Drop multiplexer 2500 Mbit/s) is a STM-16 optical add-drop multiplexer
used to build STM-16 point-to-point links, STM-16 rings or meshed networks with SNC path
protection or MSP protection or MS-SPRing protection (line).
It allows to transport 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, 155 Mbit/s, 622 Mbit/s, Ethernet, Fast
Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet and Fibre Channel over STM-4 or STM-16.

The ADR2500 eXtra offers a cross-connection with VC4-16c, VC4-4c, VC4, VC3, VC12
granularity, called "SWITCH HO/LO" with 64x64 VC4 (or 32x32 VC4), 192x192 VC3 (or 96x96
VC3) and/or 4032x4032 VC12 (or 2016x2016 VC12) capacity, unidirectional or bi-directional.
This matrix is completely not blocking.

The STM-n and xGE-DM cards (from P2.4 release) and the GFP2500-2GE cards offer
extractable interfaces SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) ; the optical SFP modules also
integrate DDM (DIGITAL Diagnostic Monitoring) function.

On STM-16 side, the ADR2500 eXtra allows regeneration sections of up to 60 km at 1310 nm


and 100 km at 1550 nm ; if it is associated to an optical booster, via an U16.2 card, the section
can reach 150 km.

The association with a MUX 10000 Unit allows an optical multiplexing - demultiplexing function of
four STM-16 signals from four L16.2+ cards with wavelength in the 200 GHz grid (1,6 nm).

The ADR2500 eXtra can optionally include the protection of power supply, of switching matrix
function and of PDH cards.

The ADR2500 eXtra can be used as :


Terminal Multiplexer with maximum capacity of 1 STM-16 or 4 STM-4 or 16 STM-1 or 378
E1 tributaries (with 63E1FA card) or 18 E3/DS3 tributaries (with E3DS3FA card) and with
tributary and line protection MSP 1+1,
Pseudo-repeater, with capacity to regenerate 1 or 2 STM-16 lines,
STM-16 add/drop Multiplexer with maximum capacity of 2 STM-16 line and of 378 E1
tributaries (with 63E1FA card) or 18 E3/DS3 tributaries (with E3DS3FA card) or 32 STM-1
or 8 STM-4 or 2 STM-16 tributaries,
STM-4 add/drop Multiplexer with maximum capacity of 2 STM-4 line and of 378 E1
tributaries (with 63E1FA card) or 18 E3/DS3 tributaries (with E3DS3FA card) or 8 STM-1 or
2 STM-4 tributaries.
Ethernet transport over SDH : over VC12 or VC3 via the GFP150 eXtra card, over VC3 or
VC4 via the GFP2500-2GE card.
The GFP cards are compatible with other DATA cards from SAGEM ADR range.
Gigabit Ethernet over SDH transport through the GIG-E, xGE-DM or GFP2500-2GE cards.

The ADR2500 eXtra interworks with equipment of the synchronous digital hierarchy complying
with recommendations G.707, G.783 and G.7041 of the ITU-T.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-1
INSTALLATION

The ADR2500 eXtra can be managed :

by a local terminal with VT100 emulation required on commissioning for communication


parameter configuration ("COMM" access),
by a GUI server for local or remote interactive operation using a Web Browser,
remotely, by means of an SNMP protocol via an IONOS NMS network manager ; using
SNMP protocol also allows the supervision of the whole network
The connection of this manager to the management network is performed via the Ethernet
access ("ETH") of the CTRL-2G management card.
The management network is made of the Ethernet access ("ETH"), of the DCC (D1-D3 and
D4-D6), of the STM-16 line and STM-n tributaries, of the 2 VC12 that can be used for
management.
The VC12 used for management of the ADR2500 eXtra are compatible with those of ADR
155C and ADR622.

1.2 - ADR2500 EXTRA CONSTITUTION

The ADR2500 eXtra is mounted in a 19" or ETSI rack. It is made of :


one 14U shelf equipped with a backplane,
one to twelve LTU interface cards :

one to twelve LTU21E120 or LTU21E75 cards dedicated by group of 3 to the


tributary PDH 63E1 cards. Each LTU includes the connectors for 21x2 Mbit/s ports.
one to four LTU3E3DS3 cards dedicated to the tributary PDH 3E3DS3 cards. Each
LTU includes the connectors for 3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s ports.
One or two 48 VDC Power Supply Unit cards (PSU-160 or PSU-2G).
Only one PSU card is required if the equipment receives a SW 32 HO/LO card, two PSU
cards are mandatory if the equipment receives a SWITCH HO/LO card
A second or third card can be inserted in the shelf as automatic 1:1 or 1:2 protection
The utilization of the PSU-2G card is possible in order to arrange an unique maintenance
share between ADR 2500c and ADR2500 eXtra.
one Common Connecting Unit card (CCU-2G) for the power supply, the remote signaling,
the station remote controls and alarms and the synchronization signals,
one Control Unit card (CTRL-2G),
two Auxiliary Channels cards (AUX),
one SWITCH HO/LO card enabling VC4-16c, VC4-4c, VC4, VC3, VC12 granularity,
- either one SWITCH HO/LO card with 64 VC4 max switching
- either one SW 32 HO/LO card with 32 VC4 max switching
A second card, inevitably of the same type that the first, can be inserted in the shelf as
automatic or manual 1:1 protection.
one to ten interface cards as required :

one to four tributary PDH 63E1 cards allowing 63 VC12 connections.


Each card is associated to a LTU21E1 group from 1 to 3.
A fifth card can be inserted in the shelf as automatic or manual 1:4 max protection

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

one to six tributary PDH 63E1FA cards allowing 63 VC12 connections


This card regroups the functions of LTU interface and tributary ; it includes the
connectors for 63x2 Mbit/s ports ; it allows to increase the add/drop capacity of PDH
access points.
This card cannot be protected nor to be used in protection
one to four tributary PDH 3E3DS3 cards allowing 3 VC3 connections.
Each card is associated to a LTU3E3DS3.
A fifth card can be inserted in the shelf as automatic or manual 1:4 max protection
one to six tributary PDH 3E3DS3FA cards allowing 3 VC3 connections
This card regroups the functions of LTU interface and tributary ; it includes the
connectors for 3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s ports ; it allows to increase the add/drop capacity of
PDH access points
This card cannot be protected nor to be used in protection
one to eight STM-1 cards with 1 to 4 optical access points enabling on each access
one VC4 connection or 3 VC3 connections or 63 VC12 connections ; the SFP release
of this card can also receive electrical SFP modules for a mixed use
one to eight 4ERE cards with 4 electrical STM-1 access points enabling on each
access one VC4 connection or 3 VC3 connections or 63 VC12 connections.
one to ten STM-4 cards with one optical access enabling one VC4-4c connection or 4
VC4 connections or 12 VC3 connections or 252 VC12 connections.
one to four STM-16 cards with 1 optical access enabling one VC4-16c connection or
4 VC4-4c connections or 16 VC4 connections or 48 VC3 connections or 1008 VC12
connections.
one to four GigaEthernet GIG-E cards enabling a Gigabit Ethernet over SDH
transport service on a VCG composed of n VC4 (n = 1 to 7)
one to N GigaEthernet xGE-DM (x=1 or 2 ports, optical or also electrical for the SFP
release), exploitable in STM4 mode (N=10) or in STM16 mode(N=4) ; this card allows
a Gigabit Ethernet over SDH transport service on one or two VCG (1 per port)
composed of n VC4 (n = 1 to 4 in STM4 mode and n = 1 to 7 in STM16 mode) or of
n VC3 (n=1 to 12 in STM4 mode and n=1 to 21 in STM16 mode, only on 2GE-DM-2G
card).
The 2GE-DM-2G and 2GE-DM-SFP cards in STM16 mode also allow a Fibre
Channel over SDH transport service.
one to six GFP150 eXtra card with 8 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet/Fast Ethernet
ports, allowing up to 3 VC3 or 63 VC12 connections in 8 Virtually Concatenated
Groups, with a max of 46 VC12 or 2 VC3 per port
one to four GFP2500-2GE cards with 2 optical or electrical GigaEthernet SFP access
points, exploitable in STM4 mode or in STM16 mode ; this card allows :
- up to 4 VC4 or 12 VC3 connections in STM4 mode, up to 16 VC4 or 48 VC3
connections in STM16 mode, in 22 Virtually Concatenated Groups
- a Gigabit Ethernet over SDH transport service on one or two VCG (1 per port)
composed of n VC4 (n = 1 to 4 in STM4 mode and n = 1 to 7 in STM16 mode) or
of n VC3 (n=1 to 12 in STM4 mode and n=1 to 21 in STM16 mode).
one extractable FAN-2G unit in bottom of the shelf.
FAN-2G is a fan module in charge of pushing external ambiant temperature air into the shelf
for power dissipation purposes.
It is composed of three separately monitored and controlled FANs, all powered by the
output of the embedded 48V // 12V DC converter.
Note that the 48V // 12 V DC converter can optionally be redunded for best possible
availability.

The minimum configuration in Terminal application - comprises a shelf equipped with one or
two PSU cards (according to the type of inserted SWITCH HO/LO card), one CCU-2G card, one
CTRL-2G card, one SWITCH HO/LO card, one FAN-2G unit, one line card and one SDH or
PDH tributary card (with corresponding LTU card if necessary) to which the necessary
transmission and redundancy cards are added.
ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-3
INSTALLATION

For the connection of the different access points of cards, see 1.4.

1.3 - SHELF INSTALLATION

The ADR2500 eXtra shelf, equipped with a back panel, can be installed in a 19" or ETSI rack.
(see Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2).

The ADR2500 eXtra shelf is delivered with an adequate adaptation kit (in its own packing) :
either a 19" kit constituted of 2 19" brackets (1 right + 1 left) + 12 screws M3x6 + 12 flat
washers M3,
either an ETSI kit constituted of 2 ETSI brackets (1 right + 1 left) + 12 screws M3x6 + 12 flat
washers M3,

The mounting kit for installation of the shelf on the uprights of the 19" or ETSI rack, formed by 6
cage nuts and 6 screws, is not supplied with the shelf

Installation in 19" rack

The ADR2500 eXtra has ventilation-type heat regulation system. When installing, provide for
two appropriate spaces : one below the shelf for the hold of air (minimum 75 mm), the other in
top of the shelf for the evacuation of air and the passage of cables (minimum 75 mm).

Proceed as following :
Insert the FAN-2G module in the shelf before integrating this one in the rack.
provide a 14U position in the rack for each equipment, 2U space under the shelf and 2U
space above the shelf, placing either a passive equipment (coiling assembly for example)
either a deflector of air between 2 shelves.
secure the mounting brackets for installation in a 19" rack to either side of the empty shelf,
placing a washer behind the screw head.
clip the 3 cage nuts M6 in their housings on the left upright of the rack (see distance
between 2 cage nuts on figure),
clip the 3 cage nuts M6 in their housings on the right upright of the rack (see distance
between 2 cage nuts on figure),
offer the rear of the shelf facing the rack,
slide the shelf equipped with the FAN-2G module until the mounting brackets come into
contact with the uprights, in line with the 6 cage nuts, then secure using the 6 screws
M 6 x 12.

Installation in ETSI rack

The installation of the shelf in the ETSI rack is the same than the procedure used for the 19"
rack.

In this case, use the set of mounting brackets specific to installation in ETSI rack

Provide a 25 SU position in the rack for each equipment, 3 SU space under the shelf and 4 SU
space above the shelf, placing either a passive equipment (coiling assembly for example) either
a deflector of air between 2 shelves.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

177,8 mm

177,8 mm

3 screws
M6x12
3 cage
nuts M6

Figure 1-1 : Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in 19" rack

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-5
INSTALLATION

175 mm

175 mm

3 screws
M6x12
3 cage
nuts M6

Figure 1-2 : Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in ETSI rack

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

Figure 1-3 : ADR2500 eXtra equipped shelf

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-7
INSTALLATION

LTU 5-1 LTU 5-2 LTU 5-3 LTU 6-1 LTU 6-2 LTU 6-3 LTU 7-1 LTU 7-2 LTU 7-3 LTU 8-1 LTU 8-2 LTU 8-3
2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits
34/45 PDH PDH 34/45 PDH PDH 34/45 PDH PDH 34/45 PDH PDH
Mbits Ports Ports Mbits Ports Ports Mbits Ports Ports Mbits Ports Ports
PDH PDH Ports PDH Ports PDH Ports
Ports

PSU 1 PSU 2 PSU 3 TRIB 2 TRIB 4 TRIB 6 TRIB 8 LINE 2 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
PSU-160 PSU-160 PSU-160 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-16 SWITCH HO/LO SWITCH HO/LO
PSU-2G PSU-2G PSU-2G STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 SW32HOLO SW32HOLO
E1 Prot or STM-16 63E1 63E1 GIG-E
working GIG-E 63E1FA 63E1FA xGE-DM
GFP150 xGE-DM 3E3DS3 3E3DS3 GFP2500-
eXtra GFP2500- 3E3DS3FA 3E3DS3FA 2GE
3E3DS3FA 2GE GFP150 GFP150
63E1FA GFP2500- eXtra eXtra
xGE-DM 2GE xGE-DM xGE-DM
GFP2500- GFP2500- GFP2500-
2GE (*) 2GE 2GE
CCU EXT 1 EXT 2 CTRL TRIB 1 TRIB 3 TRIB 5 TRIB 7 LINE 1
CCU- AUX AUX CTRL- STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-16
2G 2G STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4
E3 Prot or STM16 63E1 63E1 GIG-E
working GIG-E 63E1FA 63E1FA xGE-DM
GFP150 xGE-DM 3E3DS3 3E3DS3 GFP2500-
eXtra GFP2500- 3E3DS3FA 3E3DS3FA 2GE
3E3DS3FA 2GE GFP150 GFP150
63E1FA eXtra eXtra
xGE-DM xGE-DM xGE-DM
GFP2500- GFP2500- GFP2500-
2GE 2GE 2GE

FAN (FAN-2G)

Table 1-1 : Designation of ADR2500 eXtra slots

(*) Four GFP2500-2GE cards max per shelf in the presence of one SWITCH HO/LO card
Two GFP2500-2GE cards max per shelf in the presence of one SW32HOLO card (power
conception limitation).

The fully equipped ADR2500 eXtra contains (See Chapter 3 - Tables 3-1 to 3-4 : List of
ADR2500 eXtra items) :
one to twelve LTU interface cards :

one to twelve LTU21E120 or LTU21E75 cards (LTU 5-x to LTU 8-x)


one to four LTU3E3DS3 cards (LTU 5-1, LTU 6-1, LTU 7-1, LTU 8-1)
If a LTU3E3DS3 card is inserted in LTU x-1 slot, the LTU x-2 and LTU x-3
cannot be used.
one to three power supply unit cards PSU (PSU 1, PSU 2 and PSU 3 slots),
one common connecting unit card CCU-2G (CCU slot)
one control unit card CTRL-2G (CTRL slot),
two auxiliary channels cards AUX (EXT 1 and EXT 2 slots),

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

one to ten interface cards as required :

one to five PDH 63E1 cards (TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 and TRIB 2 slots)
In TRIB 5 to TRIB 8, this card is mandatory associated to a corresponding LTU21E1
group from 1 to 3.
In TRIB 2, this card is used either in protection mode or in working mode ; in this last
case, it will be associated to a LTU21E1 group from 1 to 3
one to six PDH 63E1FA cards (TRIB 1, TRIB 2, TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots)
one to five PDH 3E3DS3 cards (TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 and TRIB 1 slots)
In TRIB 5 to TRIB 8, this card is mandatory associated to the corresponding
LTU3E3DS3.
In TRIB 1, this card is used either in protection mode or in working mode ; in this last
case, it will be associated to one LTU3E3DS3.
one to six PDH 3E3DS3FA cards (TRIB 1, TRIB 2, TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots)
one to eight STM-1 cards (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8 slots)
one to ten STM-4 cards (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)
one to four STM-16 cards (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots),
The STM-16 cards which take place in TRIB 3 or TRIB 4 are exploited without
MS-SPRing Protection.
one to four GIG-E cards (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)
one to N xGE-DM cards according to the chosen configuration :
- in STM4 mode, N=10 (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)
- in STM16 mode, N=4 (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)
one to six GFP150 eXtra cards (TRIB 1, TRIB 2 or TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots)
one to four GFP2500-2GE cards :
- in STM4 mode (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)
- in STM16 mode (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)
one or two SWITCH HO/LO cards (SWITCH 1 and SWITCH 2 slots),
If the equipement receives a SW32 HO/LO card, the LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots cannot be
used.
one FAN-2G unit located at the bottom of the shelf (FAN slot).

No adjustment or configuration is required on the equipment to be installed. All parameter


values are defined during the commissioning procedure and using the on-board operating
software.
The STM4, STM16, GIG-E, xGE-DM and GFP2500-2GE cards can take place in LINE 1 or
LINE 2 only in the presence of one SWITCH HO/LO card ; a SW32HOLO card make not
exploitable the LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots.
The STM16 and GIG-E cards, the xGE-DM and GFP2500-2GE cards configured in STM16
mode, which take place in TRIB 3 or TRIB 4 slots make not exploitable the TRIB 1, TRIB 5 and
TRIB 7 or TRIB 2, TRIB 6 and TRIB 8 slots, because the card uses an internal bandwidth
equivalent to a STM-16
The "TRIB" and "LINE" slots have a double width.
The single width STM-n cards will be positioned in the right part of the slot, the left part
receiving an appropriated cover.
The single width GFP150 eXtra cards will take place in the left part of the slot, with cover in the
right part.
Covers are also provided for the empty slots
All connections are performed on the front panel of the cards.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-9
INSTALLATION

Layout of cards

REMINDER : Before all intervention on the cards, be sure to put on an antistatic bracelet.

Refer to Table 1-1 : Designation of ADR2500 eXtra slots

TRIB and LINE slots are unmarked slots with the following constraints :

- the STM-16 and GIG-E cards take only place in the TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 and LINE 2
slots.
- the xGE-DM and GFP2500-2GE cards can be configured in STM16 mode only in the TRIB
3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots
- the LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots can only receive STM-4, STM-16, GIG-E, xGE-DM and
GFP2500-2GE cards ; they cannot be exploited if a SW32 card is used.

To make wiring more easy and fulfil the same configuration in all the sites, it is recommended
to proceed as following :
place the LTU cards from left to right by using of preference LTU 6-x and LTU 8-x blocks for
the 2 Mbit/s connectings (E1) and the LTU 5-x and LTU 7-x blocks for the 34/45 Mbit/s
connectings (E3/DS3).
place the first PSU card in the PSU 1 slot,
place the first AUX card in the EXT 1 slot,
place the first SWITCH HO/LO card in the SWITCH 1 slot,
In the absence of 2 Mbit/s connectings (E1), in order to allow STM-16 tributaries and a
protection of 34/45 Mbit/s accesses :
place the tributary PDH, STM-1, STM-4, GFP150 eXtra, GFP2500-2GE (STM4
mode), xGE-DM (STM4 mode) card(s) by starting with TRIB 1, TRIB 3, TRIB 5 and
TRIB 7 slots and by continuing with TRIB 2, TRIB 4, TRIB 6 and TRIB 8 slots
place the first tributary STM-16 card in the TRIB 4 slot,
place the first line STM-16 card in the LINE 2 slot,
place the first GIG-E or xGE-DM (STM16 mode) or GFP2500-2GE (STM16 mode)
card in the TRIB 4 slot,
In the absence of 34/45 Mbit/s connectings (E3/DS3), in order to allow STM-16 tributaries
and a protection of 2 Mbit/s accesses :
place the tributary PDH, STM-1, STM-4, GFP150 eXtra, GFP2500-2GE (STM4
mode), xGE-DM (STM4 mode) card(s) by starting with TRIB 2, TRIB 4, TRIB 6 and
TRIB 8 slots and by continuing with TRIB 1, TRIB 3, TRIB 5 and TRIB 7 slots
place the first tributary STM-16 card in the TRIB 3 slot,
place the first line STM-16 card in the LINE 2 slot,
place the first GIG-E or xGE-DM (STM16 mode) or GFP2500-2GE (STM16 mode)
card in the TRIB 3 slot,
secure the cards, the covers and the ventilation unit by screwing.

The ADR2500 eXtra shelf is delivered with a tool of which the use is absolutely mandatory
for the insertion or the extraction of the cards, located at the left of the higher shelf.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-10 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

1.4 - CARDS ACCESS POINTS

All the access points are performed directly on the front panel of the cards. The PSU, 63E1,
3E3DS3 and SWITCH HO/LO cards do not have connectors ; the power supply cord is
connected to the CCU-2G card.

The cards can be removed without intervening on the other cards or on their connections.

On the LTU21E120 and LTU21E75 cards :


21x2Mbit/s traffic ports "E1 OUTPUT" and "E1 INPUT"

On the LTU3EDS3 card :


3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports "TR" and "REC"

On the CCU-2G card :


station power supply and alarms access "POWER/ALM 48V 13A maxi"
remote signaling and remote control access "LOOPS"
2MHz synchronization access " SYNC"

On the CTRL-2G card :


Ethernet management access "ETH"
IP address configuration access "COMM" : allows the connection to a VT 100 terminal or
emulation

On the AUX card :


3 Engineering Order Wire access points

On the 63E1FA card :


3x 21x2Mbit/s traffic ports "E1 OUTPUT" and "E1 INPUT"

On the 3EDS3FA card :


3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports "TR" and "REC"

On the STM-n cards, according to the kind of card :


1 to 4 optical STM-1 access points "TR" and "REC"
1 to 4 electrical STM-1 access points "TR" and "REC"
1 optical STM-4 access "TR" and "REC"
1 optical STM-16 access "TR" and "REC"

On the GIG-E card :


optical GigaEthernet access "TR" and "REC"
maintenance access "RS232" : allows the connection to a VT 100 terminal or emulation

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-11
INSTALLATION

On the xGE-DM card :


1 or 2 optical or 1000BaseT electrical (SFP release) GigaEthernet access points
"TR" and "REC"

On the GFP150 eXtra card :


8 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet/Fast Ethernet access points "ETH"

On the GFP2500-2GE card :


2 optical or 1000BaseT electrical GigaEthernet SFP access points "TR" and "REC"

Refer to the list of available cables in Chapter 3 - Spare parts and Cables.

Connection rules

All the access points are provided directly on the front panel of the cards.
All the cables are directed upwards through the intermediary of fibers-guide, except the
cable of power supply that is oriented downwards.
The cable paths should not interfere with extraction of a module; therefore, the connecting
of the shelf should have sufficient slack.

1.4.1 - Connection to LTU21E1 or LTU21E75 cards

Figure 1-4 : Front panel of LTU21E120 card

"E1 INPUT" and "E1 OUTPUT" G.703 21x2 Mbit/s traffic ports :

ports 21 x 2 Mbit/s traffic ports compliant with the ITU-T G.703


Recommendation ( 9.3 for input port, tab.7 for output port) and
ETS 300 166
Bit rate 2,048 Mbit/s 50 ppm,
Code HDB3,
Impedance 75 or 120 balanced,
Connector SUB D HD female 44 pins supporting L907 cable (21 ports).

15 1
30 16
44 31

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-12 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

This interface uses two connectors : E1 INPUT connector for inputs (named RX) and
E1 OUTPUT connector for outputs (named TX).

Pin N Ports Signal name Comments


16 GND ground
31 1 TX(RX) 1B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
1 TX(RX) 1A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
17 2 TX(RX) 2B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
32 TX(RX) 2A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
2 3 TX(RX) 3B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
18 TX(RX) 3A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
33 4 TX(RX) 4B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
3 TX(RX) 4A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
19 5 TX(RX) 5B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
34 TX(RX) 5A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
4 6 TX(RX) 6B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
20 TX(RX) 6A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
35 7 TX(RX) 7B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
5 TX(RX) 7A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
21 8 TX(RX) 8B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
36 TX(RX) 8A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
6 9 TX(RX) 9B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
22 TX(RX) 9A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
37 10 TX(RX) 10B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
7 TX(RX) 10A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
23 11 TX(RX) 11B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
38 TX(RX) 11A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
8 12 TX(RX) 12B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
24 TX(RX) 12A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
39 13 TX(RX) 13B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
9 TX(RX) 13A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
25 14 TX(RX) 14B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
40 TX(RX) 14A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
10 15 TX(RX) 15B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
26 TX(RX) 15A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
41 16 TX(RX) 16B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
11 TX(RX) 16A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
27 17 TX(RX) 17B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
42 TX(RX) 17A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
12 18 TX(RX) 18B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
28 TX(RX) 18A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
43 19 TX(RX) 19B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
13 TX(RX) 19A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
29 20 TX(RX) 20B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
44 TX(RX) 20A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
14 21 TX(RX) 21B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point)
30 TX(RX) 21A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)
15 GND Ground

Note : the shielding of the connector case is connected to the subrack front panel ground
Note : on each LTU, the Retiming function is supported by the #1 and #2 ports

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-13
INSTALLATION

1.4.2 - Connection to LTU3E3DS3 card

Figure 1-5 : Front panel of LTU3E3DS3 card

"TR" and "REC" G.703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports :

Ports 75 ohms 34/45 Mbit/s Interface compliant to ITU-T G.703


( 11) Recommendation and ETS 300 166 allowing 34 Mbit/s or
45Mbit/s plesiochronous stream exclusive connection
Connector 1.0/2.3 75

1.4.3 - Connection to CCU-2G card

Power supply and Remote signaling, 2MHz G.703


station alarm access Remote control access Synchronization access

Figure 1-6 : Front panel of CCU-2G card

The ADR2500 eXtra has three PSU cards.


It operates with one or two PSU cards if a backup power supply card is not present or when
replacing a faulty PSU card.
The ADR2500 eXtra can be supplied by a PAPA : power supply input is located on the CCU-2G
card.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-14 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

1.4.3.1 - "POWER/ALM" connector

male connector HE5 - 25 pins

Pin N Signal name


1 -48V2
14 -48V2
2 -48V2
15 -48V2 (not used)
3 -48V1
16 -48V1
4 -48V1
17 -48V1 (not used)
5 Audible minor alarm
18 0BS
6 0BS (not used)
19 Visual minor alarm
7 Audible major alarm
20 -48VS
8 -48VS (not used)
21 Visual major alarm
9 OB1
22 OB2
10 OB1
23 OB2
11 Shelf ground
24 Shelf ground
12 Shelf ground
25 Shelf ground
13 Shelf ground

NOTE : The connector shielding is connected to the equipment ground.


: OB is the logical "OR" of signals OB1 and OB2 of the power supply access.

Power supply interface :

Input voltage : One or two - 48 V power supply sources, SELV type (Safety Extra
Low Voltage)
Operating voltage range : - 36 V to - 60 V
Maximum voltage range : - 36 V to - 72 V
Power : 260 W max. (see Chapter 4).
The audible and visual minor alarm outputs are interconnected just
like the audible and visual major alarm outputs.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-15
INSTALLATION

PAPA connection cable (see diagram below) :

PAPA equipment side


male connector HE5 25 pins

ADR2500 eXtra side


Power/ALM 48V 13A max.
"Female" connector HE5 25 pins

Figure 1-7 : POWER/ALM power supply cable

Warning : As the shelf power supply connector is located on the CCU card, it is mandatory to
disconnect the powering cable from the POWER/ALM connector before CCU card extraction, to
prevent any risk of contact with hazardous voltages while manipulating the card.

1.4.3.2 - Remote signaling, remote control and station alarms access


: LOOPS"

Access 4 remote signaling inputs (Local user inputs) for floating contacts,
biased to - 48 VS internally, active in the closed state, with
galvanic insulation (loop current between 1 and 10 mA),

T C R 2 dry loop outputs (common "C", break "R" and make "T") (Local
user outputs) used as station alarm or remote control
(maximum current = 100mA on resistive load).
The common point of each loop is internally connected to OBs ; by
default, the two outgoing dry loops N1 and N2 are "break".
(Schematic diagram of a dry loop)

8 1
15 9
female connector HE5 - 15 pins

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-16 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

Pin N Quad Pair Color Signal name In/Out Remarks


1 2 1 Yellow ALA2R Out
9 1 2 Blue ALA2C Out Outgoing dry loop No. 2
2 1 2 Purple ALA2T Out
10 2 1 Gray ALA1R Out
3 1 1 White ALA1C Out Outgoing dry loop No. 1
11 1 1 Gray ALA1T Out
4 GND Signal Ground
12 4 1 Green TELE4B (OBs) Out Remote signaling loop No. 4
5 4 1 Gray TELE4A In
13 3 2 Red TELE3B (OBs) Out Remote signaling loop No. 3
6 3 2 Purple TELE3A In
14 3 1 Black TELE2B (OBs) Out Remote signaling loop No. 2
7 3 1 Gray TELE2A In
15 2 2 Brown TELE1B (OBs) Out Remote signaling loop No. 1
8 2 2 Purple TELE1A In

NOTE : The Quad, Pair and Color indications concern the 4-Quad cable L907 of the SAGEM
cable.

1.4.3.3 - 2 MHz G.703 sync access : "SYNC"

Access 2 external sync input interfaces operating at 2 MHz G.703 (T3_1


and T3_2) and 2 identical sync output interfaces operating at
2 MHz G.703 (T4), comply with recommendation G.703 of ITU-T
( 13.3 and 13.4 for input interface, tab.10 13.2 tab.11
and 13.4 for output table)
Impedance 120 balanced,
5 1
female connector 9 6 HE5 9 pins (120 ).

Pin N Quad Pair Color Signal name Remarks

1 GND Signal Ground


6 1 1 Gray TX1 RING (T4-) Output T4-1 (cold point)
2 1 1 White TX1 TIP (T4+) Output T4-1 (hot point)
7 1 2 Purple RX2 TIP (T3+) Input T3-2 (hot point)
3 2 1 Yellow RX1 TIP (T3+) Input T3-1 (hot point)
8 2 1 Gray RX1 RING (T3-) Input T3-1 (cold point)
4 1 2 Blue RX2 RING (T3-) Input T3-2 (cold point)
9 2 2 Purple TX2 RING (T4-) Output T4-2 (cold point)
5 2 2 Brown TX2 IP (T4+) Output T4-2 (hot point)

NOTE : The connector shielding is connected to the electrical ground on the front panel.
The Quad, Pair and Color indications concern the two-Quad cable L907 of the cable supplied
by SAGEM.
The 75 ohm unbalanced interfaces are obtained by adding a cable which also provides BNC
connectors.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-17
INSTALLATION

1.4.4 - Connection to CTRL-2G card

Major/critical and minor Alarm acknowledge button


alarm indicator LEDs for
the whole equipment

Card alarm indicator LEDs SmartCard access Management COMM access


(status, in service) Ethernet access

Figure 1-8 : Front panel of CTRL-2G card

1.4.4.1 - Configuration access : "COMM" connector

Access RS232, interconnection of a console or VT100 emulation


Rate 19200 bauds (8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit),

5 1
female connector HE5 9 pins
9 6

Pin N Signal name Remarks


1 DCD Data Carrier Detect (Connected to DSR)
6 DSR Data Set Ready (to DCE)*
2 RX Data reception (to DCE)*
7 RTS Request To Send (from DCE)*
3 TX Data send (from DCE)*
8 CTS Clear To Send (to DCE)*
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready (from DCE)*
9 RI Ring Indicator (not connected)
5 GND Signal Ground

* The ADR2500 eXtra is seen as a DCE.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-18 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

COMM equipment side


male connector HE5 9 pins

VT100 or PC side
Female connector HE5 9 pins

Figure 1-9 : Comm connection cable

WARNING : Only use a straight cord, such as the one provided by SAGEM.

1.4.4.2 - Management access : "ETH" connector

Access Ethernet management interface operating at 10 or 100 Mbit/s in


half-duplex or full-duplex mode in accordance with mode used by
party (Ethernet port is dynamically adapted to each new
connection of the party),
If the Ethernet interface doesn't work, force the configuration
of the network card of the PC in duplex half mode.

Contact 1 Contact 8

Connector RJ45 (10BaseT/100BaseTX) : front view

Pin N. Signal name Remarks


1 TX_ETH_TIP Ethernet output (HI)
2 TX_ETH_RING Ethernet output (LO)
3 RX_ETH_TIP Ethernet input (HI)
4 and 5 NC BSTERM1
6 RX_ETH_RING Ethernet input (LO)
7 and 8 NC BSTERM1

NOTE : Two indicator LEDs are associated to the "ETH" connector :


green indicator LED : traffic status indicator,
yellow indicator LED : link status indicator.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-19
INSTALLATION

Cable for connection to an HUB (see diagram below).

ADR2500 eXtra ETH side


male shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

HUB side
male shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

Figure 1-10 : Straight-through Ethernet cable

Cable for direct connection to a PC (see diagram below).

ADR2500 eXtra ETH side


male shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

PC side
male shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

Figure 1-11 : Cross-over Ethernet cable

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-20 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

1.4.5 - Connection to AUX card

Figure 1-12 : Front panel of AUX card

Each AUX card has three ports (6 ports in total with identical pin assignments)
E1 or F1 overhead bytes of STM-n tributaries or aggregates can be rerouted to these ports, for
order wire purposes for instance.
In addition, four internal connections can be created between E1 or between F1 bytes.

Connection of service channels :

Access V.11 synchronous (differential)


Rate 64 kbit/s

8 1

female connector 15 9
HE5 - 15 pins

Pin N Signal name Polarity Remarks


1 - Not connected
9 TB (+) Input, data to send on STM-n frame and sampled on rising edge
2 TA (-) of clockT64 (B-A)
10 TOFPB (+) Output, transmit Octet Frame Pulse indicating position of bit 1
3 TOFPA (-) and transmitted on rising edge of clock T64 (B-A)

11 RB (+) Output, data extracted from STM-n frame and transmitted on


4 RA (-) falling edge of clock R64 (B-A)

12 ROFPB (+) Output, Receive Octet Frame Pulse indicating position of bit 1
5 ROFPA (-) and transmitted on falling edge of clock R64 (B-A)

13 R64B (+) Output, 64 kHz reception clock


6 R64A (-)
14 T64B (+) Output, 64 kHz transmit clock
7 T64A (-)
15 - Not connected
8 Signal Ground

Cable for connection of V11 access to an ARDAX equipment or a VDS EOW300 equipment
(see diagram below).

Figure 1-13 : AUX/EOW connection cable

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-21
INSTALLATION

Timing diagram of "EOW/AUX" interface in counter-directional mode (64 kbit/s


synchronous operation) :

T64 (B-A)
(Output, transmit clock)

T (B-A) B8 B1 B2
(Input, data to send)

TOFP (B-A)
(Output, transmit
byte sync)

R64 (B-A)
(Output, reception clock)

R (B-A)
(Output, received data) B8 B1 B2

ROFP (B-A)
(Output, reception frame
pulse)

1.4.6 - Connection to 3E3DS3FA card

Figure 1-14 : Front panel of 3E3DS3FA card

"TR" and "REC" G.703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports :

Ports 75 ohms 34/45 Mbit/s Interface compliant to ITU-T G.703


( 11) Recommendation and ETS 300 166 allowing 34 Mbit/s or
45Mbit/s plesiochronous stream exclusive connection
Connector 1.0/2.3 75

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-22 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

1.4.7 - Connection to 63E1FA card

Figure 1-15 : Front panel of 63E1FA card

"E1 INPUT" and "E1 OUTPUT" G.703 21x2 Mbit/s traffic ports :

ports 21 x 2 Mbit/s traffic ports compliant with the ITU-T G.703


Recommendation ( 9.3 for input port, tab.7 for output port) and
ETS 300 166
Bit rate 2,048 Mbit/s 50 ppm,
Code HDB3,
Impedance 120 balanced,
Connector SUB D HD female 44 pins supporting L907 cable (21 ports).

15 1
30 16
44 31

The E1 INPUT and E1 OUTPUT connectors and their connections are identical to those of the
LTU21E1 card. ( 1.4.1)

Note : on the 63E1FA card the retiming function is supported by the ports #1 to #6

1.4.8 - Connection to Optical STM-n cards

Figure 1-16 : Front panel of STM-1 interface card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-23
INSTALLATION

Figure 1-17 : Front panel of STM-4 interface card

Figure 1-18 : Front panel of STM-16 interface card

All the access points are located on the front panel of the cards :
the STM-1 cards offer 1 to 4 optical STM-1 interfaces
the STM-4 cards offer 1 optical STM-4 interface
the STM-16 cards offer 1 optical STM-16 interface

Each interface has a transmission access "TR" (Equipment output) and a reception access
"REC" (Input).

Remove the contact protection connector.

Connect the STM access points to the connectors on the front panel :
Transmission TR connector
Reception REC connector

"TR" and "REC" access points:

Single mode interfaces

Common characteristics

Standards ITU-T G.957 and SFF-8472-Rev 9.5


Code Uncoded (NRZ)
Optical fiber single mode (1310 nm or 1550 nm, ITU-T G.652)
Connector SC / PC (STM-n cards) or LC / PC (STM-n SFP cards)
SFP optical modules : Small Form Factor Pluggable Transceiver MultiSource
Agreement 14 Sept 2000

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-24 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

Interfaces S1.1 L1.1 L1.2


Wave length 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
155,52 Mbit/s 155,52 Mbit/s 155,52 Mbit/s
Rate
20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm
Guaranteed
0-12 dB 10-28 dB 10-28 dB
attenuation
Transmit power -15 to -8 dBm -5 to 0 dBm -5 to 0 dBm
-10
Sensitivity at 10 -28 dBm -34 dBm -34 dBm
Max. acceptable
-8 dBm -10 dBm -10 dBm
power
Typical range (*) 0 - 28 km 22 - 68 km 40 - 100 km
Optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB
Interfaces S1.1-Bidi S1.2-Bidi L1.1-Bidi L1.2-Bidi
(**) (**) (**) (**)
Wave length 1310/1550 m 1550/1310 m 1310/1550 m 1550/1310 nm
155,52 Mbit/s 155,52 Mbit/s 155,52 Mbit/s 155,52 Mbit/s
Rate
20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm
Guaranteed
0-12 dB 0-12 dB 10-26 dB 10-26 dB
attenuation
Transmit power -15 to -8 dBm -15 to -8 dBm -6 to 0 dBm -6 to 0 dBm
-10
Sensitivity at 10 -28 dBm -28 dBm -33 dBm -33 dBm
Max. acceptable
-8 dBm -8 dBm -5 dBm -5 dBm
power
Typical range (*) 0 - 15 km 0 - 15 km 12 - 40 km 12 - 40 km
Optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB
Interfaces S4.1 L4.1 L4.2 S16.1
Wave length 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1310 nm
622,08 Mbit/s 622,08 Mbit/s 622,08 Mbit/s 2488,32 Mbit/s
Rate
20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm
Guaranteed
0-12 dB 10-24 dB 10-24 dB 0-12 dB
attenuation
Transmit power -15 to -8dBm -3 to + 2dBm -3 to + 2dBm -5 to 0dBm
-10
Sensitivity at 10 -28 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm -18 dBm
Max. acceptable
-8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm 0 dBm
power
Typical range (*) 0 - 28 km 22 - 58 km 35 - 92 km 0 - 15 km
Optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-25
INSTALLATION

Interfaces L16.1 L16.2 L16.2+ (1) (2) L1/4/16.2++ U16.2 (3)


Wave length 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550,92 nm
155,52 Mbit/s
2488,32 Mbit/s 2488,32 Mbit/s 2488,32 Mbit/s 622,08 Mbit/s 2488,32 Mbit/s
Rate 2488,32 Mbit/s
20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm 20 ppm
20 ppm
Guaranteed 14 28 dB
10-24 dB 10-24 dB 13-27 dB 25-39 dB
attenuation (at 10-12)
Transmit power -2 to +2 dBm -2 to 2 dBm +1 to +5 dBm +3 to +6 dBm +14 to +17 dBm
-27 dBm
Sensitivity at 10-10 -27 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm
(at 10-12)
Max. acceptable
-8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm
power
Typical range (*) 0*** - 58 km 0*** - 85 km 50 - 100 km 50120**** km 80 - 150 km
Optical path penalty 1 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 3 dB

Table 1-2 : Characteristics of single mode interfaces

For the STM-16 cards, the optical fibers attached to the transmission laser and to the reception
photodiode are single mode devices with 10 micron core.

(*) The typical ranges suppose the use of normalized fibers adapted to the emission wavelength
and for the mentioned optic penalty. A previous measure of the optic balance is recommended

(**) The ADR2500 eXtra proposes single fibre STM1 interfaces which allow to use only one
single-mode fibre between two STM1 access points.
Contrary to other STM1 interfaces, the optical modules at the two ends of fibre are different : one
(S1.1-Bidi or L1.1-Bidi) emits at 1310 nm and receives at 1550 nm, conversely the other (S1.2-
Bidi or L1.2-Bidi) emits at 1550 nm and receives at 1310 nm.
For the installation, it is advisable to take care well of this concept of couple of SFP modules in
order to prevent that two modules of comparable nature are in opposite. Nevertheless, if that
intervenes, that does not damage SFP modules and a signal missing is detected at the two ends
of fibre. A remote checking of the inventories of modules allows to detect the problem.

(***) 0 Km with optical attenuators if necessary

(****) Chromatic dispersion limit

Note (1) : No wavelength multiplexing : use lasers with wavelength of 1550,92 nm 0,1 nm

With wavelength multiplexing : use lasers with following wavelengths :


1550,92 nm 0,1 nm, 1547,72 nm 0,1 nm, 1549,32 nm 0,1 nm,
1552,52 nm 0,1.nm

These interfaces must be used in association with MUX 10000 Unit (see Annex C).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-26 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

Note (2) : If wavelength multiplexing is implemented, a 6dB attenuation for the optical
multiplexer/demultiplexer pair inserted on the line should be taken into account.

Note (3) : The U16.2 characteristics are given for a U16.2 card associated to the
OPTICAL BOOSTER + 14 DBM unit (see Annex B).

WARNING (1) : In case of higher ambient temperature, the radiator equipping the L16.2+ and
U16.2 interface cards can reach a temperature superior to 50C. This heat risk at the extraction
of the card is indicated by a sticker in front panel.
(2) : Input optical power > -8dBm may cause irreversible damage
For 0 km, use an appropriate attenuation patch cord or add-on attenuator
Warranty void if not properly used

Multimode interface

Interfaces MM1
Standard ANSI T1.646
Wavelength 1310 nm
155,52 Mbit/s
Rate
20 ppm
Code Uncoded (NRZ),
Guaranteed attenuation 0 to 4 dB
Transmit power -20 to -14dBm
Sensitivity at 10-10 - 31 dBm
Max. acceptable power -14 dBm
Typical range 0 2 km
Passband 500 MHz per km
Connector SC/PC

Table 1-3 : Characteristics of multimode interface

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-27
INSTALLATION

1.4.9 - Connection to Electrical STM-1 card

Figure 1-19 : Front panel of 4ERE interface card

The 4ERE card offers 4 electrical STM-1 interfaces : each interface has a transmission access
"TR" (equipment output) and a reception access "REC" (input).

Note : these characteristics are also those of an electrical SFP module which can take place on
a 4xSTM1-SFP card.

"TR" and "REC" access points :

Rate 155,520 Mbit/s 20 ppm,


Standard ITU-T G.703 15,
Code CMI
Electrical level 1V 0.1V peak-to-peak
Cable max attenuation 12.7 dB in f at 78MHz
Adaptation attenuation at input 15 dB between 8MHz and 240MHz
Connector 1.0/2.3 75 ohms

WARNING : Prior to any connection on the ERE card, be sure that the "male"
contact of the jumper is properly centered.

1.4.10 - Connection to GIG-E card

Figure 1-20 : Front panel of GIG-E interface card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-28 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

1.4.10.1 - GigaEthernet interfaces

The GIG-E card offers one or two optical GigaEthernet interface on their front panel : each
interface has a transmission access "TR" (Equipment output) and a reception access "REC"
(Input).

Remove the contact protection connector.

Connect the Ethernet access points to the SC connectors on the front panel :
Transmission TR connector
Reception REC connector

"TR" and "REC" access points:

Interfaces SX LX ZX
Interface Multimode Single mode Single mode
Standard IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z No standard
Wavelength 770 - 860 nm 1270 1355 nm 1500 1580 nm
1250 Mbit/s 1250 Mbit/s 1250 Mbit/s
Rate
100 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
Transmit power
Fiber 10 m - -11 dBm min 0 to 5 dBm
Fiber 50 m -9,5 dBm min -11,5 dBm min -
Fiber 62,5 m -9,5 dBm min -11,5 dBm min -
Sensitivity at 10-10 -17 dBm -19 dBm -21 dBm
Max. acceptable
0 dBm -3 dBm -3 dBm
power
Typical range
Fiber 10 m - 5000 m min 40 km min
Fiber 50 m 500 m min 550 m min -
Fiber 62,5 m 220 m min 550 m min -
Connector SC/PC SC/PC SC/PC

Table 1-4 : GigaEthernet interface Characteristics of GIG-E card

1.4.10.2 - Maintenance access : "RS232" connector

This is a private access for Sagem staff ; it is not usefull to users.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-29
INSTALLATION

1.4.11 - Connection to xGE-DM cards

Figure 1-21 : Front panel of 2GE-DM interface card

Giga Ethernet interfaces

The xGE-DM cards offer one or two optical or electrical (SFP release) GigaEthernet / Fibre
Channel (2GE-DM-2G) interface on their front panel : each interface has a transmission access
"TR" (Equipment output) and a reception access "REC" (Input).
The 2GE-DM-2G and 2GE-DM-SFP cards receive SFP modules (Small Form Factor Pluggable
Transceiver MultiSource Agreement 14 Sept 2000).

Remove the contact protection connector.

Connect the Ethernet access points to the connectors on the front panel :
Transmission TR connector
Reception REC connector

Optical SX LX ZX
Interfaces
Interface Multimode Single mode Single mode
Standard IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z No standard
Wavelength 770 - 860 nm 1270 1355 nm 1500 1580 nm
1250 Mbit/s 1250 Mbit/s 1250 Mbit/s
Rate
100 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
Transmit power
Fiber 10 m - -11 dBm min -5 to 0 dBm
Fiber 50 m -9,5 dBm min -11,5 dBm min -
Fiber 62,5 m -9,5 dBm min -11,5 dBm min -
Sensitivity at 10-10 -17 dBm -19 dBm -21 dBm
Max. acceptable
0 dBm -3 dBm -3 dBm
power
Typical range
Fiber 10 m - 5000 m min 40 km min
Fiber 50 m 500 m min 550 m min -
Fiber 62,5 m 220 m min 550 m min -
LC/PC
Connector LC/PC LC/PC
SC/PC (xGE-DM-ZX)

Table 1-5 : GigaEthernet interface Characteristics of xGE-DM card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-30 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

Electrical Interface
The 2GE-DM-2G and 2GE-DM-SFP cards can also receive a SFP electrical module with
following characteristics :

Rate 1000 Mbit/s


Standard IEEE 802.3
Cable max attenuation 100 m UTP or STP Category 5e Gigabit Ethernet
compatible
Connector RJ45

1.4.12 - Connection to GFP150 eXtra card

Figure 1-22 : Front panel of GFP150 eXtra card

"ETH" Interface :
Port Traffic Ethernet interface operating at 10 or 100 Mbit/s in half-
duplex or full- duplex mode according to the mode used by the
interlocutor (validated or not autonegotiation),
The ADRGFP150 have a direct or a cross Ethernet interface depending on the configuration.
Every access supports the automatic inversion of pairs (MDIX auto) in order to avoid the
recourse to cross-over cables. However it is possible to force the type of cable by configuration.

Connector Ethernet/Fast Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX


Shielded RJ45 type.
Contact 1 Contact 8

Front view

Pin N Signal name Function Function


(direct interface) (cross interface)
1 TX_ETH_TIP Ethernet output (hot point) Ethernet input (hot point)
2 TX_ETH_RING Ethernet output (cold point) Ethernet input (cold point)
3 RX_ETH_TIP Ethernet input (hot point) Ethernet output (hot point)
4 NC Reserved Reserved
5 NC Reserved Reserved
6 RX_ETH_RING Ethernet input (cold point) Ethernet output (cold point)
7 and 8 NC Reserved Reserved

NOTE: Two LEDs are linked to the "ETH" interface:


Green LED : Link status indicator,
Yellow LED : Traffic status indicator.

The connection cables are identical those of the "ETH" management access of the CTRL-2G
card (see 1.4.4.2 Figure 1-10 and Figure 1-11)

Using and operation of GFP150 extra card are described in the chapter 6.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-31
INSTALLATION

1.4.13 - Connection to GFP2500-2GE card

Figure 1-23 : Front panel of GFP2500-2GE card

GigaEthernet interfaces

The GFP2500-2GE card offers one or two optical or electrical GigaEthernet interface on their
front panel : each interface has a transmission access "TR" (Equipment output) and a reception
access "REC"( Input).
It receives SFP modules (Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver MultiSource Agreement 14
Sept 2000).

Remove the contact protection connector.

Connect the Ethernet access points to the connectors on the front panel :
Transmission TR connector
Reception REC connector

Optical SX LX ZX
Interfaces
Interface Multimode Single mode Single mode
Standard IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z No standard
Wavelength 770 - 860 nm 1270 1355 nm 1500 1580 nm
1250 Mbit/s 1250 Mbit/s 1250 Mbit/s
Rate
100 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
Transmit power
Fiber 10 m - -11 dBm min -5 to 0 dBm
Fiber 50 m -9,5 dBm min -11,5 dBm min -
Fiber 62,5 m -9,5 dBm min -11,5 dBm min -
Sensitivity at 10-10 -17 dBm -19 dBm -21 dBm
Max. acceptable
0 dBm -3 dBm -3 dBm
power
Typical range
Fiber 10 m - 5000 m min 40 km min
Fiber 50 m 500 m min 550 m min -
Fiber 62,5 m 220 m min 550 m min -
Connector LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Table 1-6 : GigaEthernet interface Characteristics of GFP2500-2GE card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-32 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
INSTALLATION

Electrical Interface

It also can receive a SFP electrical module (see 1.4.11).

Using and operation of GFP2500-2GE card are described in the chapter 7.

1.5 - SHELF WITHOUT PDH PROTECTION

A new type of shelf, without PDH protection, is available from P2.4 release.

The difference with the other shelf is this one does not offer LTU connectors.

This shelf extends connectivity in a number of PDH access points with the 63E1FA and
3E3DS3FA cards and does not manage the 63E1, 3E3DS3, LTU21E120, LTU21E75 and
LTU3E3DS3 cards.

PSU-160 PSU-160 PSU-160 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-16 SWITCH HO/LO SWITCH HO/LO
PSU-2G PSU-2G PSU-2G STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 SW32HOLO SW32HOLO
GFP150 STM-16 63E1FA 63E1FA GIG-E
eXtra GIG-E 3E3DS3FA 3E3DS3FA xGE-DM
3E3DS3FA xGE-DM GFP150 GFP150 GFP2500
63E1FA GFP2500 eXtra eXtra -2GE
xGE-DM -2GE xGE-DM xGE-DM
GFP2500- GFP2500- GFP2500-
2GE 2GE 2GE
CCU EXT 1 EXT 2 CTRL TRIB 1 TRIB 3 TRIB 5 TRIB 7 LINE 1
CCU- AUX AUX CTRL- STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-16
2G 2G STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4 STM-4
GFP150 STM16 63E1FA 63E1FA GIG-E
eXtra GIG-E 3E3DS3FA 3E3DS3FA xGE-DM
3E3DS3FA xGE-DM GFP150 GFP150 GFP2500
63E1FA GFP2500 eXtra eXtra -2GE
xGE-DM -2GE xGE-DM xGE-DM
GFP2500- GFP2500- GFP2500-
2GE 2GE 2GE

FAN (FAN-2G)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-33
INSTALLATION

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 1-34 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2 COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.1 - COMMISSIONING

The equipment can be commissioned and operated from a PC equipped with a VT100
emulation system and a Web Browser.
To access the equipment via the management function, a local terminal with VT100 emulation
is necessary the first time the equipment is commissioned : however, this will only enable the
parameter configurations required for the communication function (definition of equipment IP
and Ethernet addresses).

2.1.1 - Required configuration

The minimum configuration proposed for the operation PC is given below :

Pentium 4 or equivalent
OS: Windows XP or Windows Vista
RAM: 512 Mbytes (2 Gbytes for Vista)
RS232 serial interface or USB interface with USB/RS232 converter cable (straight
cable SUB-D9pts Male / Female)
Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX network card (RJ45 crossed Ethernet cable)
SVGA screen, minimum resolution 1024x768
Windows hyperterminal
Web Browser : Internet Explorer 6.0 or 7.0 or Mozilla Firefox 2.0.x / 3.x.
Use of other browsers or older versions of Internet Explorer is forbidden.

Use of other browsers or older versions of Internet Explorer is forbidden.

2.1.2 - Procedure

) On initial start-up, the equipment analyzes its constitution and takes this as the expected
configuration, under controlled service. It is therefore recommend to insert all the interface
cards before switching on the equipment in order to accelerate the commissioning
procedure.
NOTES :
- The initial commissioning procedure is normally carried out in factory.
- If the four LEDs of the CTRL-2G card permanently flash, this means the card is passed
in degraded mode To go out of this degraded mode, see the chapter 5 "DEGRADED
MODE"
) Start up the power supply connected to the equipment on the CCU-2G card.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-1
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

) The equipment runs its selftests :


when the selftests are successful, the green indicator LED " Status " of the CTRL-2G card
lights permanent
if not successful, a flashing code defines the faulty selftest (contact the Hotline)
) Configure the IP address for the equipment using the VT100 (see 2.1.3)
) Using the web browser (see 2.1.4) :
Up to date the time and date of the equipment (Equipment > Date and time menu) if this
one is not managed by a NMS network manager. In presence of a NMS manager, the
updating is automatic
Configure the remote management ports using the web browser
) Connect the PDH (2, 34, 45 Mbit/s), STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, Ethernet, Fast Ethernet,
GigaEthernet and SYNC access points required in accordance with the equipment
composition
) Connect the necessary AUX access points
) Download a predefined configuration or generate the required configuration using the web
browser :
Create the connections on the PDH , STM-n and Data cards
Setup the required protection features (MSP, MS-SPRing, SNC, Cards protections, etc.)
Select the synchronization source and modify its parameters if necessary
Create the overhead byte traffic connections (if AUX card)
If necessary, modify the monitoring parameters and the alarms configuration
The default configuration for the various parameters is given in 2.2.4
) Perform the STM-16 link tests observing the described process in procedure Figure 2-1 :
Commissioning process for an ADR network
) The equipment is now operational.
) The operation alarms may indicate an incorrect access points connection.
) Check the access points connection and the alarms corresponding to the connected access
points and correct any problems you may have detected.
) Back up the configuration.

NOTE : Once the commissioning procedure has been performed, connecting additional
access points (PDH, SDH, Ethernet) and inserting or removing cards which are powered up
is possible (with restriction for the PSU card : see 2.4.3.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

LOCAL TEST

Equipment inventory

Check of - 48 V power supplies

Aggregate optical loopback

Insertion of communication parameters (VT100)

Time set and insertion of tributary accesses test configuration


(web browser)

Continuity check of tributary accesses

Redundancy check of - 48 V

Check of alarms and A / B loops


* case of an
under-equipped
unit equipment Local transmission test (30 min.) *

Optical connection

Connection of external synchronization input of


a "master" equipment (optional)

Preparation of configuration

no Local test of last


equipment on network ?

yes

Link connection

Optical measurements

Reset of performance counters

24 H performance test on link

Operational equipment
(preparation of installation data package)

Backup of configuration

Figure 2-1 : Commissioning process for an ADR network

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-3
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.1.3 - Defining parameters for IP address and Ethernet port

) Connect the "COMM" access to a free "COM" port on the PC with VT100 emulation.
) Switch on the PC.
) If it is the first time you have run the HyperTerminal application on this PC, process as
following :
successively select, in the Windows desktop, the Start, Programs, Accessories and
Hyperterminal buttons
select the icon representing the Hyperterminal application : a description window for the
application is displayed
enter a name and choose an icon for the connection, then validate your choices : a new
window is displayed
select the "COM" port on the PC which is connected to the equipment then validate your
choice. A new window is displayed
configure the port parameters as indicated below :
Bits per second : 19200
Data bits :8
Parity : none
Stop bits :1
Flow control : none
validate the programming.
save the connection ("Save" command in application File menu).
NOTE : The next time you want to open the "Hyperterminal" application, you will simply
need to choose the connection icon to connect to the equipment. Once the equipment is
powered up, the operation menu is displayed.
to exit the "Hyperterminal" application, select Exit in the File menu.
) Open a session and enter your password (to configure the communication function, it is
necessary to have "supervisor" rights)
NOTE : by default, for the initial commissioning procedure, the password is empty.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

The following screen is displayed :

To select a command, type the command number in the "Choice ?" text area and press the
"ENTER" key to validate your choice.
In each screen answer the questions and validate with the "ENTER" key.

Choice "1" : Configuration of equipment IP address.


The equipment address will be used to notify alarms and events to the Manager. This
address is mandatory ( In the example below, the Equipment address is 192.168.114.8 )

The default value 000.000.000.000 corresponds to no configuration of the IP address.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-5
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Enter the required IP address, keeping in mind that it must be different from that of the other
equipment and must be defined in a different subnetwork of the one of the Ethernet. The IP
address of the remote equipment will belong to the same network.
Example: if the IP address of the local equipment is 192.168.114.8, that of the remote
equipment will be 192.168.114.xxx with xxx not equal to 008
When the IP address exists and is modified, equipment REBOOT is proposed. This
REBOOT operates itself without affecting the traffic.
Error message "Equipment address is mandatory" : the equipment address is mandatory
when at least one PPP link is not numbered.

> Choice "2" : Configuration of Ethernet interface.

The above screen presents an Ethernet communication interface with its characteristics :
"Interface State" : choice of interface state : 0 (Interface off) or 1 (Interface on).
"IP Address" : IP address (default adress : 135.10.114.11)
"Subnet mask" : sub-network mask.
"Route Protocol" : protocol : 0 (None), 1 (RIP) or 2 (OSPF)

The IP address of the Ethernet interface for the equipment connected to the management
PC must belong to the same network and have the same subnet mask as the PC IP
address.
Example: management equipment address: 135.10.114.8 with a subnet mask of
255.255.255.000
The PC address must be 135.10.114.xxx with xxx not equal to 0, 255 or
008.
The addresses of the gateway and no gateway equipment must be defined in different
subnetworks.
This management Ethernet interface is available on the access "ETH" of CTRL-2G.
When the IP address exists and is modified, equipment REBOOT is proposed. This
REBOOT operates itself without affecting the trafic.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Choice "3" : choice of equipment REBOOT.


This command is used to immediately reboot the application and restart with the parameters
already stored in the equipment.
This REBOOT is performed with no impact on the traffic.

Choice "4" : Logout / Disconnection


Once the parameter definition process is completed, this command closes the current
session.
An automatic session exit is performed after a few minutes if no activity is detected (this time
period can be configured using the manager).

Choice "5" : Ping.

"IP Address" : Choice of IP address of equipment to be contacted.


Round trip time in ms

NOTE : The Ping command is used to check the accessibility and the return path from the
remote equipment by testing both the address of the interface and the address of this
equipment. If the address of the port by which the Ping command is generated is different
from the address of the equipment, two commands are generated.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-7
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Choice "6" : Trace route.

"IP Address" : choice of IP address of equipment to be contacted.

The screen displays the management routes already defined with their characteristics :

Hops : hop 1, 2, 3Path to go from one machine to another.

1 2 3

IP address : IP address of recipient (equipment or sub-network).


Delay (ms) : round trip time.
Unit. size : Maximum size of IP packet which can reach to the remote equipment.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.1.4 - Using the Web browser


2.1.4.1 - PC Configuration

Connect the CTRL-2G card's "ETH" port to the PC's Ethernet card using the RJ45 crossed
Ethernet cable ; the yellow LED "ETH" of the CTRL-2G card must go on.
To get a correct date for the equipment GUI, the environment variable "TZ" must not be defined.
To list all environment variables, type "Set" in the MS DOS console.
Otherwise, to get a correct display of HTML pages, fonts must not be defined as "large" in
display properties of the configuration panel and the Webdings police must be installed.

2.1.4.2 - Browser IE configuration

IE 6.0 and IE 7.0 configuration


In the Internet Explorer Tools menu, click Internet options.
In the General tab, click Parameters ; tick the radio button On each page visit, then
define the disk space to be used for 1 Mbyte. Click [OK].
Click Delete Files ; tick Delete all offline content, then click [OK].
Validate by clicking [OK], then close the IE browser to allow the options to be
acknowledged.

The Automatic cache option with a disk space of 30 Mbytes provides for much faster operation
to display the pages.
With IE 6. 0 or IE 7.0, it is possible to configure the level of confidentiality, that is to say the
choice of the cookies type that is allowed to copy on the target PC. To open the ADRs, it is
necessary to let the parameter of confidentiality of Internet to the default value "Medium" for the
access to the Web sites.
With IE 6. 0 or IE 7.0 and a PC equipped of Windows XP SP2 or with IE 7.0 on a PC equipped
with Windows Vista, the installed Center of Security modifies the manner of which IE displays
the GUI windows. In order to correctly open an ADR, it is necessary to untick the parameter
"Block pop-ups" of the tab " Privacy" of IE properties .
In the same way, the installed Center of Security blocks the program Tftpd32 used by the ADRs
for the Upload and the Download. On the warning window , to click on the button "Unblock" :
this action adds the program tftpd32 in the list of exceptions.

Remark
After an upgrade (application code + GUI custom), the cache must be cleared as following :
In the Internet Explorer "Tools" menu click "Internet Options / General tab / Temporary Internet
files part / Delete Files"
Tick "Delete all offline content", then click "OK".
Then close and start again the Browser.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-9
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.1.4.3 - Browser Firefox configuration

Firefox configuration
In the Firefox Tools menu, click Options.
Click Content. Tick Load images automatically and Enable JavaScript options.
If Block pop-up window is ticked, you need to add equipments IP address you want to
login into the Exceptions list, or you have add these address when you login the
equipments.
Click Privacy. Tick Accept cookies from sites and, this is important, untick Always clear
my private data when I close Firefox.
Validate by clicking [OK], then close the Firefox browser to allow the options to be
acknowledged

Remark
After an upgrade of the application code, the cache must be cleared as following :
In the Tools menu, click on Clear Private Data, check Cache and Cookies then click on Clear
Private Data now.
Then press F5 to refresh the page and make sure you are browsing the latest page from ADR.
Or you can restart Firefox to view the latest page.

2.1.4.4 - Initial commissioning

The PC is connected via the Ethernet (the PC's gateway must be in the same subnetwork as
the Ethernet interface of the ADR).
Run the Web Browser.
In the Address field of the home screen, enter the IP address for the ADR2500 eXtra
equipment, the browser home screen is displayed : Welcome on the ADR2500 eXtra's
site.
On initial commissioning, the password is empty. Click on Apply to access the screen :
ADR2500 eXtra shelf view.
The web browser is now operational.

2.1.4.5 - Menus tree

See following Figure 2-2 : Menus tree

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-10 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Main Menu

Session Synchronization Connection Aux Current Alarms Polling Shelf view / Equipment

Information T0 Configuration Configuration New Window Name


Login T4 Delete Delete
Date and Time
Logout Multiple connections
Inventories
HO Level
Security
LO Level
LPOM List Management
Upload Download
"EMPTY" Menu "FAN-2G" Menu "PSU" Menu "EXT AUX" Menu Failure hold off/on time
WTR
Board Alarms Board Alarms Maintenance Board Alarms Event Logs
Service Alarms Board Alarms Service Performance
Expected Card Board status Expected Card Expected card Capabilities
Board status Board status Board status
AUX

"LTU21E1" Menu "LTU3E3DS3" Menu


"SWITCH HO/LO" Menu
"CCU-2G" Menu "CTRL-2G" Menu
Maintenance Maintenance
Maintenance
Board Alarms Board Alarms Board status Board Alarms
Board Alarms
Service Service Alarms Board status
Service
Expected Card Expected Card Loops IP Parameters
Expected Card
Board status Board status Synchronization DCC Connection
Board Status
E1 ports 1/2/3 TR REC
TC List
E3/DS3
TC Performance

"TRIB 63E1" Menu "TRIB 3E3DS3" Menu "TRIB STM1" Menu "TRIB or Line STM4" Menu "TRIB or LINE STM16" Menu

Board Alarms Board Alarms Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance


Service Service Board Alarms Board Alarms Board Alarms
Expected Card Expected Card Service Service Service
Performance Performance Expected Card Expected Card Expected Card
Board status Board status Performance Performance Performance
PDH Board Protection (*) PDH Board Protection (*) Board status Board status Board status
LPT (**) LPT (**) 1 TR REC TR REC TR REC
2 TR REC
E1 Retiming (**)
3 TR REC
4 TR REC

"TRIB or LINE GIG-E" Menu "TRIB 63E1FA" Menu "TR REC" Menu

"TRIB or LINE
SFP SFP block for STMn-SFP cards
Board Alarms Maintenance GFP2500-2GE" Menu
"MS-SPRing" block accessible if
Board Alarms SPI / RST / MST
Service selected and for STM16 card in
MSP / MS-SPRing " Line" slot
Expected Card Service Maintenance
Expected Card Board Alarms MSA / HPT /HPOM
Performance
Service HPA / LPOM "TRIB GFP150 eXtra"
Board status Performance
Menu
TR REC Board status Expected Card
Settings E1 Ports Performance "TRIB or LINE
E1 Retiming Board status xGE-DM" Menu Board Alarms
Global Params Service
"TR REC" Menu SFP Board Alarms Expected Card
"TRIB 3E3DS3FA" Menu
GE ports Service Performance
Trunk Expected Card Board status
WAN
Maintenance Performance
HPT ETH Global Params
Board Alarms Board status
VCG Switch ETH
Service SFP
GFP VCG Switch
Expected Card (on SFP card)
Access HPT VCG
Performance ETH
LPT LPT
(*) If the card is inserted in TRIB 1 Board status VCG
(3E3DS3) or TRB 2 (63E1) OAM CC OAM CC
1/2/3 TR REC HPT
(**) If the card is configured in working MSTP MSTP
mode E3/DS3 LPT (2GE-DM-2G)

Figure 2-2 : Menus tree

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-11
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.1.4.6 - Presentation of the Graphical User Interface


When a session is opened on the web browser, the "Shelf view" screen(
Figure 2-3) is displayed with a general view of the equipment, in which each slot is marked with
its name in bottom (left for FAN-2G ) : LTU x-y, PSU 1-2-3, CCU, CTRL, EXT 1-2, TRIB 1-8,
LINE 1-2, SWITCH 1-2, FAN.
Click on "LTU" to visualize the LTU strip, click on "Shelf" to visualize the cards of the shelf.

Figure 2-3 : Shelf view screen of web browser

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-12 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

This screen is used to display the status of the equipment, in particular :


the inconsistencies between configuration and composition, the card status ; each slot
displays an info bubble including
- the name of the expected card : always present information
- the card status : present information if default card (board missing, board mismatch,
defective board)
- the name of the inserted card : present information if the inserted card in the shelf is
different of the one programmed on the GUI
each card presents on bottom an horizontal border (vertical border on left for FAN-2G)
which is colored grey if the card is not monitored, red in case of insertion alarm (Missing,
Mismatch, Defective). For FAN-2G, the coloration can also reflects the state of the alarms
card.
the connectors in the modules with a critical alarm condition are colored according to the
severity of the most serious alarm.
the present and configured out of service modules include an icon representing a red X to
indicate this administrative status
the present and configured on maintenance modules include an icon representing a
caution to indicate this administrative status
the "Status" and "Traffic" LEDs of the cards, and the "ALM" LEDs of the CTRL-2G card
are dynamic devices.
Their meaning is specified to 2.2.4.4 :
The MSP, MS-SPRing and PDH Cards protections, the TC connections are indicated on
labels of information that appear then on the concerned cards.

This screen is also used to :


have informations on the session :

- red information of "No Session" and "Login" link


- : opened grey padlock if the writing session is not locked, closed red if the writing
session is locked by another user, closed green if the writing session is locked the user.

navigate using the info bubble buttons :

"Refresh"

"Stop"

"Previous"

"Next"

reach help using the info bubble button"Help"

visualize the release and the current packs using the info bubble button"About"
at any moment return on the equipment view using the info bubble icons

"Shelf view" or "LTU view"

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-13
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

display the "Equipment" menu and its items on the left of the screen, at the same time that
the visualization of the shelf
activate the common functions of the equipment (such as synchronization, security, traffic
information, etc.) by clicking on a function on the main menu bar located above the
equipment view. This opens a sub-menu on the left of the screen :
see Figure 2-2 : Menus Tree
access the functions related to a specific module (for example, MS-SPRing protection
function in the case of a line STM-16 module) : by clicking on the module to be selected,
its specific menu appears on the left of the screen according to the type of card :
see Figure 2-2 : Menus Tree
display the characteristics specific to an access (connections made, connection
configuration, status of alarms, etc.) by selecting the corresponding connector.

For each displayed function, the configuration parameters, operating controls, active parameters
and status of the alarms are grouped on the same screen ; the various possible actions are
accessible (or not) to the operator depending on the operator's authorization level.
The browser window heading indicates the equipment name, its IP address and the granted
authorization level.
A mini view, located on the right top of the screen, indicates the cards which present alarms :
- colored grey slot : no monitored
- colored light yellow slot : warning alarm
- colored yellow slot : minor alarm
- colored red slot : major alarm
- colored magenta slot : critical alarm
- colored white slot : monitored slot and no alarm

When a slot is colored on this mini view, click on the info bubble button "Refresh" to make
appear the alarm's indications on the Equipment shelf view
This mini view is automatically refreshed according to a defined frequency in the "Polling" menu.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-14 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2 - OPERATION

2.2.1 - Functional description


The ADR2500 eXtra is an STM-16 optical add-drop multiplexer used to build STM-16 point-to-
point links, STM-16 rings or meshed networks.
The ADR2500 eXtra can also be connected to an equipment of the synchronous digital
hierarchy complying with G.707 and G.783 recommendations of ITU-T standard.
The ADR2500 eXtra modelling into functional blocks according to G.783 standard is as following :

SFP : Small Form Factor Pluggable

SPI : Synchronous Physical Interface


RST : Regenerator Section Termination OHA : OverHead Access
MST : Multiplex Section Termination

MSP : Multiplex Section Protection SETS : Synchronous Equipment


Timing Source
MS-SPRing on two fibers SETPI : Synchronous Equipment
synchronization Physical Interface
MSA : Multiplex Section Adaptation SEMF : Synchronous Equipment
Management Function
HPOM : High order Path Overhead Monitoring MCF : Message Communication
Function
HPC : High order Path Connection

HPT : High order Path Ternination


HPA : High order Path Adaptation
LUG : Lower order path Unequipped Generator GFP - Frame
LPOM : Lower order Path Overhead Monitor VCAT
LPC Lower order Path Connection LCAS
LPT : Lower order Path Ternination
LPA : Lower order Path Adaptation Lower order Path Adaptation
(VC12) (VC3)
PPI : Plesiochronous Physical Plesiochronous Physical Interface
Interface (VC12) (VC3)

Table 2-1 : Functional blocks of ADR2500 eXtra

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-15
NMS

COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.2 - General information


Operation and maintenance of the ADR2500 eXtra is performed :
either directly on the equipment, by means of the front panel indicator LEDs and of the
two technical management outgoing loops (A and B loops),
or, using a PC equipped with a web browser,
or, from a network manager using the SNMP protocol for the network and supervision
aspects, and the included web browser.
The IONOS-NMS management software provides an efficient and comprehensive network
administration solution for SAGEM systems of the ADR range (refer to IONOS-NMS P5
EMS/NMS Management Installation and User Guide Ref. 253 153 959).
The equipment management functions (EMS) are developed at network administration level
(NML) in accordance with the telecommunications network architecture (TMN) :
point-to-point trail configuration,
management of alarms appearing on links,
management of protection systems : MSP, MS-SPRing (only for ADR2500 eXtra), SNC-P.

2.2.3 - Management network


2.2.3.1 - Description of communication function

With maximal configuration (if all tributaries are STM-1), the routing function enables
implementing 34 PPP interfaces.

Application
Management access

GUI / SNMP Operation protocols

34 1
PPP R ETH R Routing functions

Figure 2-4 : Communication function on an ADR2500 eXtra

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-16 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

IONOS NMS
The operating PC can be connected
to any Ethernet interface when the
parameter definitions enable reaching ETH
an equipment to be operated ADR2500 eXtra
ADR155C
D1 D3 GUI
D4 D6 / SNMP R
on STM16 West
GUI / SNMP PPP D1 D3
on STM16 East
ETH
R
PPP
D1 - D3 on STM1 D1 D3
D4 D6
on STM16 East

ADR2500 eXtra
ETH
PPP
GUI / SNMP D1 D3
on STM16 West
R D1 D3
Management on STM16 West
VC12 P1/P2 Management
VC12 P1/P2 PPP
D1 D3
Other on STM16 East ETH
PPP
equipment R
R
GUI / SNMP
GUI / SNMP

ETH ADR2500 eXtra


ADR2500 eXtra

Figure 2-5 : Example of communication on an ADR and other equipment network

To correctly operate, the application needs a unique address in the network (the addressing
rules are reviewed in Annex A and apply to the numbered interfaces).

The Ethernet port also needs an explicit address if operating. On the other hand, the PPI ports,
carried by the DCCs of the SDH links or by the management VC12, do not need to have an
explicit address, thus facilitating implementation of these and limiting the number of required
addresses.
Unnumbered type is thus selected in the screen : IP Parameters Interfaces
Configuration .

However explicit addressing of the PPP ports is required if two equipment are connected by
more than one PPP link. In this case, for proper operation, OSPF routing daemon should be
used on these interfaces, not RIP.

NOTE : The utilization of a management port of P type (P1 or P2) requires the utilization of two
resources VC12 at the level of the switching matrix, but one alone VC12 on the STM-n link.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-17
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.3.2 - Description of DCC transparency function


The transparency functionality of the DCC flows (D1-D3, D4-D6) allows to transport, in an ADR
network, the management flows in transparency of another operator by using the DCCr (D1-D3). The
management flows must be to the HDLC format.

In an heterogeneous network of ADR equipment and no-ADR equipment :


the ADR equipment management is transported through the DCCm of the ADR and of the
management VC12 when they must cross a network of no-ADR.
the no-ADR management is transported through the DCCr of the ADR when they must cross a
network of ADR.

The DCCm of ADR155C and ADR622 are not compatible with those of ADR2500 eXtra ; their rates
are different.

The transparency of the DCC is independent of the protection mechanisms. The operator must use a
mechanism of routage to protect its path of DCC.

The transparency of the DCCr and DCCr is only configurable by GUI and is always bi-directional.

The system of transparency does not go up alarm or information on the state of the transported flow.

2.2.4 - Operation parameters


The operation parameters comprise :
the configuration parameters,
the maintenance commands or operations (these actions are cleared in case of
power supply loss)
the alarms and their severity level.

Configuration parameters
The enclosed tables (Tables 2-2 to 2-4 : Network configuration parameters and Tables 2-5 to
2-25 : Equipment configuration parameters show the configuration functions.
The "Access and Parameter Path" column indicates :
the access paths (in bold italic) from the main menu functions (Figure 2-2 : Menus tree) or
from the selected card in the equipment view (
Figure 2-3 : Shelf view screen of web browser)
Ex : Connection menu > Output port > Configuration or Multiple Connections
The parameters to be defined, (bold between quotes) :
Ex : "Login" in Session menu

Configuration constraints
When configuring the name (Equipment > Name menu), you are limited to using upper and
lower case characters, numbers, the space and the and _ characters.
Accented characters and certain special characters will not be displayed on the VT100 interface.
The configuration downloads on the equipment (download all database) must be realized only
with absence of default on the equipment, without switched protection. If the MS-SPRing
protection is set on the equipment, this restraint is expanded to the absence of default or forced
operation on the STM-16 ring.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-18 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.4.1 - Network Configuration Parameters

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Connection Connection matrix
Menu : Connection > Output port > Configuration or Multiple
(SWITCH HO/LO card, No connection
Connections
HPC, LPC)
"VC Type" or "VC-n type" type, unidirectional or bi-directional
Connections of VC12, VC3 LO, VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-16c HO
"Input Port" or "First Input Port"
The dropdown list depends on the declared cards in the shelf.
"Name"
Identifications of the connection None
"Activate TC" and "TC Configuration" link No ticked
to set connections and parameters associated to TCM function
Protection Ring protection Menu : Connection > Output port > Configuration Usable on a remote
mechanisms connection
SNC protection Protection of VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-16c paths Non in service
"Status" : traffic status.
Protection status reading (channel used, cause of switchover)
"Revertive"
Reversibility authorization for each path : return, after a WTR period, to No
normal link when fault (SF or SD) has disappeared
"WTR"
WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revertive" mode, waiting time for 60 s
return to normal link.
WTR programmable value for each path from 30 to 900 s in 1s steps
Hold Off Time
Persistence value programmable for each path from 0 to 10 s in 1/10 s 0 ms
steps.
For SNC/N, take account of the SD created by the end of the SF.
Table 2-2 : Network configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-19
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


"SNC Type" :
* SNC/I : the protection criteria are tu-lop and tu-ais for VC12/VC3, SNC/I
au-lop and au-ais for VC4)
* SNC/N : SNC/I + SD criteria only :
HO SD (VC4 B3) for VC4,
LO SD (VC3 B3) for VC3,
LO SD (V5) for VC12,
Other criteria are not supplied).
"Protection Input Port"
Definition of the assistance port No protection
The dropdown list depends on the declared cards in the shelf
"Operation"
Operator action by path and by order of priority : Clear
Clear (Forced operation cancel),
Lockout of protection,
Forced Switch to Working,
Forced Switch to Protection,
Manual Switch to Working,
Manual Switch to Protection
Swap SNC : swap the working and protection input ports
MS-SPRing protection Card menu : LINE 1 and 2 > TR REC > MSP/MS-SPRing > MS-SPRing
on optical STM-16 line
MS-SPRing
Activation or not Off
"NE ID"
Identification number ; values : none, 0 to 15 None
"WTR"
WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revertive" mode, waiting time for 300 s
return to normal link
Configurable value from 30 to 900s in 1s steps
Table 2-3 : Network configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-20 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Multiple Ring Switch Handling
Type of operation. No selected
Not selected : single fault ; Selected : double fault
"Operation" West and East
Operator command by order of priority :
Clear (Forced operation cancel), Clear
Forced Switch,
Manual Switch
"Fault"
Alarms related to MS-SPRing
"Status"
Status of traffic on ring (normal/protection)
"Node Configuration"
Configuration of the identification N ; values : none, 0 to 15. None
"Topology map"
16 elements topology map with values : none, 0 to 15 None
"Misconnection map"
Signal cancellation map with (topological) addresses of nodes in which None
AU4 traffic (passing through a time interval) enters and exits the ring.
Values : none, 0 to 15
"Nut map"
8 elements map that identifies the configured AUs as Non-preemptible Disable
Unprotected traffic.
Table 2-4 : Network configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-21
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.4.2 - Equipment Configuration Parameters

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Shelf Equipment choice Menu : Equipment > Name None
configuration Configuration of
equipment name

Configuration of Menu : Equipment > Date and time


equipment date and
time Equipment Date and Time by applying PC Date and Time DD/MM/YYYY hh:mn:ss

Reading hardware Menu Equipment > Inventories > Hardware


inventories of inserted
sub-assemblies
Reading software Menu: Equipment > Inventories > Software
inventories of inserted Current application codes and FPGA
sub-assemblies
Backup and Menu : Equipment > Upload/Download
downloading
Backup all configuration Upload > All Database (type of uploaded information)
Backup of all equipment configuration (Shelf + Network + Management)
Backup "Shelf" Upload > Shelf database (type of uploaded informations
configuration Backup of shelf configuration (cards, alarms, performances, connections,
protection, synchronization)
Backup "Network" Upload > Network Database (type of uploaded informations)
configuration Backup of management network parameters (PPP, IP address, routing
Protocols)
Backup "Management" Upload > Management Database (type of uploaded informations)
configuration Backup of parameters required by management
(list of managers, trap recipients, etc.)
Table 2-5 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-22 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Download all Download > All Database (type of downloaded informations)
configuration Restoration of all equipment configuration (Shelf + Network +
Management).
Download "Shelf" Download > Shelf database (type of downloaded informations)
configuration Restoration of shelf configuration (cards, alarms, performances,
connections, protection, synchronization)
Download "Network" Download > Network database (type of downloaded informations)
configuration Restoration of management network parameters (PPP, IP address,
routing protocols)
Download Download > Management database (type of downloaded informations)
"Management" Restoration of parameters required by management (list of Managers,
configuration trap recipients)
Download codes and Download > Shelf Pack (type of downloaded informations)
customization of Download of whole codes in reserve bank in flash (Software, FPGA,
equipment except those customization) forf all the cards which can be found in the equipment
of GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra except GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra and GFP2500.
and GFP2500 cards The current codes are saved in current banque in flash. Switchover to
downloaded new codes takes place following a manual command by
operator.
Download codes of Download > GIG-E Pack (type of downloaded informations)
GIG-E cards Download of whole codes (Software, FPGA) of GIG-E card in reserve
bank in flash.
The current codes are saved in current banque in flash. Switchover to
downloaded new code takes place following a manual command by
operator.
Download codes of Download > GFP150-eXtra Pack (type of downloaded informations)
GFP150 eXtra cards Download of whole codes (Software, FPGA) of GFP150 eXtra card in
reserve bank in flash.
The current codes are saved in current banque in flash. Switchover to
downloaded new code takes place following a manual command by
operator.
Table 2-6 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-23
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Download codes of Download > GFP2500 Pack (type of downloaded informations)
GFP2500 cards Download of whole codes (Software, FPGA) of GFP2500 card in reserve
bank in flash. The current codes are saved in current banque in flash.
Switchover to downloaded new code takes place following a manual
command by operator.
Apply default Switching > Take effect
configuration Default Configuration : application of default configurations (severities
and monitoring alarms, quality thresholds) on all equipment
Switchover on reserve Switching > Switch (Next card reset will apply selected version)
codes GIG-E Pack : Switchover to GIG-E reserve code
GFP150-eXtra Pack : Switchover to GFP150 eXtra reserve code
GFP2500 Pack : Switchover to GFP2500 reserve code
Switchover on reserve Switching > Switch and reset
codes and application Shelf Pack : Switchover to equipment reserve codes then application by
reset
GIG-E Pack_ : Switchover to GIG-E reserve codes then application by
reset
GFP150-eXtra Pack_ : Switchover to GFP150 eXtra reserve codes then
application by reset
GFP2500 Pack_ : Switchover to GFP2500 reserve codes then
application by reset
IP addressing Menu : CTRL-2G card > IP Parameters
Alarms Used to configure monitoring and severity of management interface Eth : minor
alarms. PPP : minor
Interfaces Summary of management interface configurations (Eth and PPP) @ ETH : 135.10.114.11
Reading of Ethernet port information
Reading of STM-n / DCCr / DCCm / VC12 port information
Routing table Summary of routing tables
Global Parameters Equipment management IP address 0.0.0.0
RIP routing 0
OSPF 1
Interfaces Configuration PPP interfaces configuration. See examples in Appendix D
Static Routes Equipment static routes configuration
Configuration
Table 2-7 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-24 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Synchronization Synchronization sources Menu : Synchronization
and propagation
configuration
T0 Synchronization
"Name"
T3_1
T3_2
T2_LTU x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1 card)
T2_LTU x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1 card)
T2_TRIB x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1FA card)
T2_TRIB x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1FA card)
T1_TRIB x:y
T1_TRIB x:y
T1_LINE 1
T1_LINE 2
"SSm" (Synchronization Status Message) True
Use of synchronization status messages
"Quality provided" (when "SSM" is "false") T3_1 = PRC
Quality level of potential sources : T3_2 = PRC
PRC (Primary Reference Clock), T2_LTU x:y = SEC
SSUT (Synchronization Supply Unit Transit), T2_LTU x:y = SEC
SSUL (Synchronization Supply Unit Local), T1_LINE 1:1 =SEC
SEC (Synchronization Equipment Clock), T1_LINE 2:1 = SEC
DNU (Do Not Use) T1_TRIB x:y = SEC
T1_TRIB x:y = SEC
"T0 priority"
Priority table of T0 according to sources declared. T3_1 = p1
Possible values from P1 to P8 and disable (dis). T3_2 = dis
Possible sources : T2_LTU x:y = dis
2 sources T1 extracted from incoming tributary access points STM-1, T2_LTU x:y = dis
STM-4, STM-16 T1_LINE 1:1 = p2
2 sources T1 extracted from incoming line access points STM-16 T1_LINE 2:1 = p3
2 sources T2 extracted from 2 Mbit/s incoming access points T1_TRIB x:y = dis
2 sources T3, external, 2MHz G.703 T1_TRIB x:y = dis
Table 2-8 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-25
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


"LOS Severity" Warning for T1_Line,
Alarm severity associated to the source status . T1_Trib and T2
Minor for T3
T0 Synchronization
Holdover in case of automatic mode and no valid source
"Mode"
Synchronization operating mode. Automatic
Choice between "Automatic" and "Free-run"
"Command"
Operator action : manual switchover, forced operation or clear to be Clear
configured
"Revert"
Reversibility authorization common to all sources : return, after a WTR, to True
normal link when default (SF or SD) causing switchover has disappeared.
"WTR"
WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revert" mode, waiting time for 60 sec
return to normal link. Common value to all programmable sources from
30 to 900 s in 1s steps
"Sync Freq Out of Range Severity
Alarm severity associated to the T0 output frequency Minor
T4 Synchronization
"Active source"
Selected source : None, T0 and each T1 source None
"Minimum Quality"
Quality threshold for T4. Choice between : PRC
PRC (Primary Reference Clock),
SSUT (Synchronization Supply Unit Transit),
SSUL (Synchronization Supply Unit Local),
SEC (Synchronization Equipment Clock)
Table 2-9 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-26 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


"Sase"
Mode control : activation / deactivation ; False
If activation : choice of T3 source between T3_1 and T3_2 T3_1
"LOS T4 Severity"
Alarm severity associated to the T4 output status. Minor
Cards Declaration of cards Card menu > Expected card : declaration of status of LTU, SWITCH,
configuration presence and card type LINE, TRIB, AUX, PSU slots. A slot can be configured empty or with an EMPTY
by slot expected card
Card monitoring Card menu > Board Alarms
A non-monitored card is made grey in the equipment view. When a card Monitoring
is not monitored, all relative events to the alarms on the card (card and
access points) are inhibited. The performance data is logged whatever
the configured monitoring mode.
Disconnection of a card Card menu > Service
The disconnected module is ignored by the management function. The In service
configuration modifications requested are stored but are not
implemented.
SFP modules Card menu : STM-n SFP > TR REC > SFP >"Expected SFP"
Card menu : 2GE-DM SFP > SFP >"Expected SFP" EMPTY
Card menu : GFP2500-2GE > SFP >"Expected SFP"
Choice of the expected SFP module
34 or 45 Mbit/s Port Card menu LTUE3DS3 or 3E3DS3FA > E3/DS3
"E3 (34M)" or "DS3 (45M)" "E3 (34M)"
34 or 45 Mbit/s physical interface selection
"Type of cable" (DS3/45Mbit/s mode only
"long" or "short" (length < 225 ft or 70m) "short"
Connecting cable length selection so that transmitted pulse complies to
template defined in Bellcore GR-489-CORE standard
Table 2-10 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-27
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


E1 Retiming Card menu : 63E1 or 63E1FA > E1 Retiming
Selection of the retiming function : Disable
- on the first and the second ports of each LTU associated with a 63E1
card
- on the #1 to # 6 ports of each 63E1FA card
(maximum 6 E1 retiming functions by 63E1 or 63E1FA card)

Protection MSP(*) Card menu : LINE or TRIB > TR REC > MSP/MS-SPRing > MSP
optical or electrical
STM-n access points
Type "1+0" or "1+1" 1+0 : non activated
"Ports MSP type"
Choice between Working (normal) and Protection (backup) for the
selected port
"Ports MSP Complement"
Definition of the complementary port of the MSP couple
"Revertive"
Reversibility authorization : return, after a WTR, to the normal link when Yes
the fault (SF or SD) which caused the switchover has disappeared.
Choice between Yes and No
"Mode"
Protection mode. Choice between unidirectional or bi-directional Bidir.
"WTR"
WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revert" mode, waiting time for 900 sec
return to normal link. Common value to all programmable sources from
30 to 900 s in 1s steps
"Hold off time"
Persistence value, configurable from 0 to 10 s in 1/10s steps 0s
Table 2-11 : Equipment configuration parameters

(*) In case of a MSP protection created on STM-16 LINE interfaces, two PPP links (one per port) need to be created.
In case of a MSP protection created on STM-n TRIB interfaces, one PPP link is needed, created on the Working port.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-28 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


"Sf / Sd priority"
Value "High-G783" or "Low" Low
"Operation"
Operator command by order of priority : Clear
Clear (Cancel forced operation),
Lockout of protection,
Forced switch to Working,
Forced switch to Protection,
Manual switch to Working,
Manual switch to Protection
"Fault"
Alarms related to MSP
"Status"
Traffic status
WTR Configuration Menu Equipment > WTR
WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revert" mode, waiting time for
return to normal link. Programmable value from 30 to 900 s in 1s steps
Global MSP WTR : Default configuration of the WTR for all the MSP 900s
protections
Global SNC WTR : Default configuration of the WTR for all the SNC 60s
protections
PDH cards Card menu : TRIB 1-2 > PDH Board Protection
Protection configuration
"No Protection" : the PDH card is used in working mode and the LTU
window allows to associate it at a free LTU card "No Protection"
"1:n" : the PDH card is used in protection mode and the "Board to
Protect" windows allow to configure the cards to be protected (maximun
4 cards in TRIB 5 to TRIB 8)
Table 2-12 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-29
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


"Operation"
Operator commands :
Clear (Cancel forced operation),
Lockout of protection (protection is forbidden), Clear
Forced Switch TRIB x to Protection (Traffic is routed on Protection card),
Manual Switch to Working (Manual switching of traffic on working card).
Service channel Order Wire E1 Card menu : EXT > AUX > Output port > Configuration No connection
Auxiliary channel F1
"Type" : Choice between "E1" and "F1"
4 terminations max. and 6 outputs (E1 or F1), contra-directional master
"Input Port"
The dropdown list depends on the declared cards in the shelf.
"Name"
Identification of the order wire
DCC Card menu CTRL-2G > DCC Connection
Transparency "DCC Type" : Choice between "D1-D3" and "D4-D6" No connection
Max 16 transparencies on a SWITCH HO/LO card and max 5
transparencies on a SW32 HOLO card
Loops Card menu : CCU-2G > Loops
Used to configure severity and name of 4 incoming loops and 2 outgoing User Input x (x = 1 to 4)
loops, closure criteria for these 2 last, the "Central Site" option and the User Output x (x = 1 to 2)
parameters of the loops deport function
Power supply Card menu : CCU-2G > Alarms
Used to configure monitoring and severity of 48V#1, 48V#2 and 48VS
alarms.
Table 2-13 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-30 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Alarms Severity Card menu : LTU, TRIB 1-8 and LINE 1-2 > TR REC or E1 ports or LPT
or HPT or VCG
Card menu : FAN-2G > Alarms
Card menu : CCU-2G > Alarms or Loops or Synchronization
Card menu : CTRL-2G > IP Parameters > Alarms
Card menu : SWITCH > TC List > TC Configuration
Severity configuration. The severity level of each alarm can be configured
separately with the following attributes :
"Critical"
"Major"
"Minor"
"Warning"
"Critical-inv"
"Major-inv"
"Minor-inv"
"Warning-inv"

Card menu : FAN-2G, LTU, PSU, CTRL-2G, AUX, TRIB 1-8, LINE 1-2,
SWITCH > Board Alarms
Severity configuration of cards alarms, separately and with the following
attributes :
"Critical"
"Major"
"Minor"
"Warning"
The chosen severity will be applied to all equipment cards.
Monitor Card menu : LTU, TRIB 1-8 and LINE 1-2 > TR REC or E1 ports or LPT
or HPT or VCG
The alarms can be monitored by block :
- SFP, SPI, RST, MST, MSP, MS-SPRing, MSA, HPT, HPOM, HPA, Monitoring
LPOM. for the optical or electrical STM-n access points
- LPT, PPI for the 2/34/45 Mbit/s access points
- HPT, LPT, VCG, ETH, GFP, Access, OAMCC, 802.3ad for the DATA
cards
Table 2-14 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-31
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Thresholds > SPI / RST / MST > RST :
Path Traces - management of EBER B1 (10-5 ) alarm Disable
- "TIMdis" (Trace Identifier Mismatch) : enable or disable Clicked (no TIM)
- configuration of J0 PathTrace UNNAMED RS
- "Autodiscovery" (*) enable or disable
Enable : allows to generate automatically the Trace Sent in order to Auto
enable an autodiscovery of equipment and networking by a network
management (**)
> SPI / RST / MST > MST
- management of EBER B2 (10-3 ) alarm Enable
- configuration of SD B2 threshold (10-5 to 10-9) 10-6
- management of REI alarm and configuration of threshold (10-4 to 10-9) Disable / 10-6
> HPT/HPOM or HPT
- management of EBER B3 (10-5) alarm for VC4 Enable
- configuration of SD B3 threshold (10-5 to 10-9) for VC4 10-6
- management of REI alarm for VC4 and configuration of threshold Disable
(10-4 to 10-9) 10-6
- "TIMdis" (Trace Identifier Mismatch) : enable or disable Clicked (no TIM)
- configuration of J1 PathTrace for VC4 UNNAMED VC
> HPA/LPOM or LPT
- management of EBER B3 (10-3) alarm for VC3 or EBER V5 (10-3) Enable
alarm for VC12
- configuration of SD B3 threshold for VC3 or SD V5 threshold for VC12 10-6
(10-5 to 10-9)
- management of REI G1 alarm for VC3 or REI V5 alarm for VC12 Disable
and configuration of threshold (10-4 to 10-9) 10-6
- "TIMdis" (Trace Identifier Mismatch : enable or disable Clicked (no TIM)
- configuration of PathTraces: J1 for VC3 or J2 for VC12 UNNAMED VC
GFP FRAMED VC3 or
VC12
Table 2-15 : Equipment configuration parameters

(*) AUTO = XXXXXXXX_**Y:01 (XXXXXXXX corresponds to the IP management address converted in hexadecimal, Y corresponds to the slot in which the
card is inserted
(**) In case of interconnection between an ADR2500 eXtra and an ADR10000, Autodiscovery must be unclicked and J0 programmed at " UNNAMED RS"

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-32 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Path Trace Card menu : SWITCH > TC List > TC Configuration for VC4 TC
TCM Connections connections
- configuration of N1 PathTraces TC TRACE
- management of APIM alarm Disable
Labels > HPT/HPOM or HPT or LPT or LPOM
Configuration of C2 label for VC4 and VC3 or V5 label for VC12 (the sent
or expected value "Unspecified" should be used only in case of
interworking problem)
Persistence Menu : Equipment > Failure Hold off/on time
Persistence Configuration .
Persistence for the appearance : X = 0, 1, 3, 10 or 30s X=3s
Persistence for the disappearance : Y = 0, 1, 3, 10 or 30s Y=3s
Acknowledgement Acknowledgement of major and minor alarms output loops by pushbutton
on front panel of CTRL-2G card.
Visualisation of alarms
Menu : Equipment > Event Logs
and events log
Visualisation of
Menu : Current Alarms
current alarms
RESET alarms and
Menu : Equipment > Event Logs > Clear All
events log
Performance Logs
optical or electrical
Card menu : TRIB 1-8 and LINE 1-2 > Performance > VC12 Near or
STM-n, 2/34/45 Mbit/s,
VC12 Far or VC3 Near or VC3 Far or VC4 Near or VC4 Far or MST
Fast Ethernet,
NEAR or MST FAR or RST NEAR
GigaEthernet (except
Card menu : SWITCH HO/LO >TC Performance > IEC Near
GIG-E card) access
points, TC Connections
Displays performance log for the selected monitoring point as following :
- the 15 mn different from 0 counters (1 current and 16 saved)
- the 24 H different from 0 counters (1 current and 1 saved)
- the different from 0 unavailability periods ( until 6 max)
Gives access to Reset and threshold configuration sub-menus.

Table 2-16 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-33
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Option Clear current counters for this point
Clears current 15 mn and 24 H counters of selected point
Option Clear all counters for this point
Clears all counters for selected point
Option Counters configuration VC12
Configures the 15 mn and 24 H thresholds for the selected point. BBE : 9 000 , 12 000
ES : 120 , 350
SES : 15 , 20
UAS : 10 , 10
VC3
BBE : 36 000 , 48 000
ES : 150 , 600
SES : 15 , 20
UAS : 10 , 10
VC4 / IEC
BBE : 36 000 , 48 000
ES : 180 , 1500
SES : 15 , 20
UAS : 10 , 10
MST
BBE : 288 000 , 432 000
ES : 50 , 150
SES : 10 , 15
UAS : 10 , 10
RST
BBE : 9 000, 48 000
ES : 180, 1500
SES : 15 , 20
UAS : 10,10

Table 2-17 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-34 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Logs GigaEthernet
Card menu : TRIB 3-4 and LINE 1-2 > Performance > LAN, QoS or
access points (GIG-E
GFP
card)
Displays GigaEthernet access (LAN), GFP layer and quality of service
treatment (QoS) performance log.
Gives access to Reset sub-menus
Option Clear statistics counters for this layer
Clears specific counters to the selected entity (LAN, QoS or GFP)
Option Clear all statistics counters
Clears all counters LAN, QoS and GFP
Card menu : TRIB 3-4 and LINE 1-2 > Performance > VC4 Near , VC4
Far
Displays performance log for the selected monitoring point as following :
- the 15 mn different from 0 counters (1 current and 16 saved)
- the 24 H different from 0 counters (1 current and 1 saved)
- the different from 0 unavailability periods ( until 6 max)
Gives access to Reset and threshold configuration sub-menus.
Option Clear current counters for this point
Clears current 15 mn and 24 H counters of selected point
Option Clear all counters for this point
Clears all counters of selected point

Option Counters configuration VC4


Configures the 15 mn and 24 H thresholds for the selected point. BBE : 36 000 , 48 000
ES : 180 , 1500
SES : 15 , 20
UAS : 10 , 10

Table 2-18 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-35
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Logs Menu : Equipment > Performance
Equipment
> 15 Minutes Counters
Displays all the 15 mn different from 0 counters for all the monitoring
points of the equipment
> 24 Hours Counters
Displays all the 24 H no different from 0 counters for all the monitoring
points of the equipment
> Unavailable Periods
Displays all the different from 0 unavailability periods of the equipment
Option Clear all current counters
Clears current counter for all monitoring points.
Option Clear all counters & restart 15 mn
Clears all current counters for all monitoring points and restarts the 15Min
period.
Security Session Menu : Session
"Session Information"
Informations on current session
" Session-Login"
Enters session. Requests for qualification.
Restriction : only one authorized login for writing at a time
" Session-Logout"
Exits session subsequent to operator command or time-out
Authorized Managers Menu : Equipment > Management
Managers List
"N IP"
IP addresses entry for the authorized stations to reach the equipment (10
possible addresses) according to qualification.
Table 2-19 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-36 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


Choice of a qualification class by increasing order of rights :
- "Observer" Supervisor
- "Operator"
- "Supervisor"
The class is granted according to the password. It is displayed.
Address of managers and levels authorized.
Each manager is associated to a maximum qualification level.
Ex. : Even with the Supervisors password, if the max level associated to
this IP address is "Operator", the granted level will be Operator.
Traps Managers Dest
"Dest IP"
Gives the list of recipient stations of the SNMP traps
"Community"
Authorization for transmission of traps to management : managers list.
Passwords Menu : Equipment > Security > Supervisor or Operator or Observer
"New password" and "Confirm new password"
One password per qualification class. Only Supervisor level is allowed to
modify password.
GIG-E card
Set-up
AdminStatus up Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > LAN
Traffic authorization on the LAN GigaEthernet interface Activated
Auto Negotiation Enable Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > LAN
Self negotiation Mechanism Authorization for Pause mode Activated
Pause Capability Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > LAN
Operation Configuration for Pause mode if the self negotiation Non activated
mechanism is not validated.
Table 2-20 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-37
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


QoS parameters Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > Pause Mode
Credit High Threshold : Over this threshold pause frames will be sent ; 60 %
receiving a pause frame, the link partner will stop sending frames
Credit Low Threshold : Under this threshold pause frames will no more 10 %
be sent ; the link partner will restart sending frames
Monitor : allows or not Pause Mode Rejected alarm monitoring Activated
See paragraph 2.2.11.3
Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > 802.1d Priority
Class : associated class to the field Priority of the 802.1q frame
See paragraph 2.2.11.1
Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > IP V4 TOS
Class : associated class to the field TOS of the IP V4 header
See paragraph 2.2.11.1
Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > IP V6 TClass
Class : associated class to the field TClass of the IP V6 header
See paragraph 2.2.11.1
Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > VLAN ID
Class 0 to Class 3 : allows the addition or deletion of one
correspondance between a VLAN Id and a class
- Item : identification number of the configuration
- Range Size : number of configurated VLAN Id at which the class must
be associated
- First VLAN Id : first VLAN Id at which the class is associated
- Last VLAN Id : last VLAN Id at which the class is associated
All Classes : displays whole configuration data
See paragraph 2.2.11.1
Table 2-21 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-38 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


RED Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > None
First Point Cross X : Over this threshold received frames dropping rate is 20 %
proportional to buffer use rate
Second Point Cross X : Over this threshold all received frames are 90 %
dropped
See paragraph 2.2.11.3
WRED Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > IP V4 TOS
Profile Configuration First profile
First profile or second profile see paragraph 2.2.11.3
Bandwidth Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > Balanced
Min : defines the minimum guaranteed percentage of the bandwidth by
class
Max : defines the maximum authorized percentage of the bandwidth by
class
See paragraph 2.2.11.2
WAN Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > TR REC > WAN
Enabled VCs number : configuration of the number of VCs constituting
the GigaEthernet channel
GFP150 eXtra For configuration of this card, refer to the chapter 6 of the present
Set-up user guide
10/100 Mbps Access Card menu : GFP150 eXtra > ETH > Interface Settings
points "100 Mbps Full"
"ifAdminStatus"
Traffic authorization on the Ethernet interface Activated
"Logical Interface"
- UNI : client side interface UNI
- NNI untagged : non tagged network side interface
- NNI tagged : tagged network side interface
Table 2-22 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-39
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


"Physical Interface"
Choice of the "Automatic" (with autonegotiation) or "Manual" physical 100 Mbps Full
interface : 10/100 Mbps, Half/Full Duplex, Pause/No Pause No pause
In "Automatic" the capabilities represent the local capacities of the
equipement that are negotiated with the remote equipment. The result of
this autonegotiation is visualisable in the Status " field ".
In "Manual" no autonegotiation, the "Status" field reflects the operator
configuration.
In order to have a correct link, it is recommended to configure both local
and remote equipment Ethernet interfaces with the same configuration :
- "Automatic" on both side or
- "Manual" and same duplex/speed configuration on both side
Note : in "Automatic" mode, if the remote equipment is set to "Manual",
local interface automatically switches to half duplex.
"Connecting Interface"
Adaptation according to the used cable : "Crossed", "Direct" or Automatic
"Automatic"
"Link Down Retransmit"
In point to point mode (one VMAN constituted of one ETH + one VCG in Disable
each equipment), "Enable" allows to report one ETH Down (or one VCG
Down) on the remote ETH link.
MSTP Card menu : GFP150 eXtra > MSTP >Bridge Settings
By default, the MSTP protocol is activated, under condition of activation MSTP
of the licence
See 6.2.5 - Implementation of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on
the GFP150 eXtra card
Table 2-23 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-40 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


xGE-DM GigaEthernet Access Card menu : xGE-DM > ETH > Interface Settings
Set-up Points
"ifAdminStatus"
Traffic authorization on the Ethernet interface Activated

"Logical Interface"
- UNI : client side interface

1G Fibre Channel (only for 2GE-DM-2G and 2GE-DM-SFP cards, in Disable


STM16 mode)
The Fibre Channel mode selection is total for the two ports of the card ;
this mode allows the transmission of Fibre Channel frames according to
the T11 Technical committee standard of INCITS (ANSI) ; it used the
GFP-T protocol.
When this mode is enabled "ifAdminstatus" is always up, Auto-
negotiation, Pause mode and Ethernet MIB2 Counters are not
available.
In this mode, at least 6 VC4 or 19 VC3 (2GE-DM-2G) must be added in a
VCG; in the contrary case an alarm LOSYNC will go up.

"Physical Interface"
Choice of the "Automatic" (with autonegotiation of the Pause mode) or No pause
"Manual" physical interface : Pause/No Pause

"Link Down Retransmit"


In point to point mode, "Enable" allows to report one ETH Down (or one Disable
VCG Down) on the remote ETH link.
VCG Configuration of VCG(s)
The principle is identical to that of the GFP150 eXtra card ( 6.2.2.1)
without SWITCH function (Each "ETH #n" port is necessarily associated
to the "VCG #n" port).

Table 2-24 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-41
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value


GFP2500-2GE For configuration of this card, refer to the chapter 7 of the present
Set-up user guide
GigaEthernet Access Card menu : GFP2500-2GE > GE Ports > Interface Settings
Points
"ifAdminStatus"
Traffic authorization on the Ethernet interface Activated
"Network Interface"
- UNI-N : client side interface UNI-N
- I-NNI : network side interface
- E-NNI : network side interface
"Flow control"
Choice of the Pause mode : "Enable"/"Disable" Disable
This function is the capability to process received pause frames and
capability to send pause frames in case of congestion ; the pause mode
of each GE port can be changed independently and is optional.
"Link Down Retransmit"
In point to point mode (one S-Vlan constituted of one GE + one VCG in Disable
each equipment), "Enable" allows to report one ETH Down (or one VCG
Down) on the remote ETH link.
MSTP Card menu : GFP2500-2GE > MSTP >Bridge Settings
By default, the MSTP protocol is activated, under condition of activation MSTP
of the licence
See 7.3.5 - Implementation of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on
the GFP2500-2GE card

Table 2-25 : Equipment configuration parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-42 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.4.3 - Maintenance commands and operations

Wording Parameters Default value


Optical interface card STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 in Maintenance menu
Loop-back "No loop-back" : Activated
"Line" : transparent line loop-back, No activated
activated/not activated
"Equipment" : transparent equipment No activated
loop-back, activated/not activated
Laser (Automatic Laser Shutdown) "ALS Enable" Activated
The automatic shutdown function for
the laser can be not activated (global
function to equipment)
Restart "2 sec" on operator action No activated
"90 sec" on operator action No activated
LTU, 3E3DS3FA, 63E1FA, electrical interface STM-1 cards in Maintenance menu
Loop-back "No loop-back" : Activated
"Line" : Transparent line loop-back, No activated
activated/not activated
"Equipment" : Transparent equipment No activated
loop-back, activated/not activated
SWITCH HO/LO card in Maintenance menu
Traffic on SWITCH HO/LO 1 (or 2) "Manual Switch to SWITCH 2 (or 1)"
activated
Switchover of traffic on the other
SWITCH HO/LO card
PSU card in Maintenance menu
Power On/Off "On" Activated
"Off" No activated

GFP2500-2GE card in Maintenance menu


Loopback over a GE or VCG port "None" No activated
" Selected " Activated
Table 2-26 : Maintenance commands and operations.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-43
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.4.4 - Alarm processing

Indicator LEDs and pushbuttons

The tables below give the meanings for the various indicator LEDs when activated and the
purpose of the pushbuttons.

Specific indicator LEDs to CTRL-2G card

Component Name Remark State Meaning


monitored
Equipment "ALA M" Red On Major or critical alarm
"ALA m" Yellow On Minor alarm
Ethernet Without Green On Transmission in progress
(management Off No traffic
access)
Without Yellow On Link correct
Off No link

Table 2-27 : Specific indicator LEDs to CTRL-2G card

"TRAFFIC" indicator LEDs on PDH, STM-n, DATA and SWITCH HO/LO cards

Yellow indicator Meaning


LED
On Card carrying useful traffic : removal will result in traffic disturbance

Off Card not carrying traffic

Table 2-28 : TRAFFIC indicator LEDs

"STATUS" indicator LEDs on all cards except PSU and FAN-2G

Green indicator Red indicator Meaning


LED LED
On Off Card in service
On On Card in service and with alarm condition
Off Off Card hardware fault (fuse)
Off On Card out of service or Selftest fault

Table 2-29 : STATUS indicator LEDs

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-44 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

"STATUS" indicator LEDs on PSU card

Green indicator Red indicator Meaning


LED LED
On Off The card supplies the subrack (forbidden
extraction without maintenance operation)
On On Card in service and with alarm condition
Off Off Card hardware fault
The card does not produce current
Off On Out of service or failure card
The card does not produce current

Table 2-30 : STATUS indicator LEDs on PSU cards

Specific indicator LEDs to GFP150 eXtra

Component Name Remark State Meaning


monitored
Ethernet Without Yellow On Transmission in progress
(traffic access) Off No traffic
Without Green On Link correct
Off No link

Table 2-31 : Specific indicator LEDs to GFP150 eXtra card

Pushbuttons

Name Location Purpose Result when pressed


"ACK" CTRL-2G Alarm When pressed, disables outgoing alarm
front panel acknowledge. loops A, B. Visual alarm is maintained.
"INIT CTRL-2G Configuration "Manufacturer" configuration is reloaded
CONFIG"* reload

Table 2-32 : Pushbuttons

* To use the "INIT" pushbutton, press the pushbutton for at least 5 seconds. This
pushbutton is inaccessible (and not used) in normal operation.
The card located in EXT 2 slot must be extracted for access.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-45
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Faults and alarms

The tables below give the severity level default values associated to the failures.

An alarm of gravity "major" or "critical" activates the major outgoing loops of the "POWER/ALM"
connector of the CCU-2G card
An alarm of gravity "minor" activates the minor outgoing loops of the "POWER/ALM" connector
of the CCU-2G card
An alarm of gravity "warning" does not activate any outgoing loop (available on GUI).

xSTM-n cards Name Severity level


Alarms
Optical SPI : SDH Physical Interface
SPI-LOS Loss Of Signal major
SPI-TF Transmit Fail major
SPI-LASER TEMP (Temperature out of range (only for L16.2+ and major
OUT OF RANGE U16.2 cards)
RST : Regenerator Section Termination
RST-LOF Loss of frame for more than 1 to 3 ms major
-5
RST-EBER-B1 Bit Error Rate > 10 on B1 Byte major
RST-TIM Regenerator Section Trace Identifier Mismatch minor
MST : Multiplex Section Termination
MST-AIS Alarm Indication Signal warning
-3
MST-EBER-B2 Bit Error Rate > 10 on B2 Byte major
MST-SD-B2 Degraded signal computed using bytes B2 minor
MST-REI Remote Error Indication warning
MST-RDI Remote Defect Indication warning
MSP : Multiplex Section Protection
PAM Protection Architecture Mismatch minor (1)
(mismatch bit 5 in received K2 byte)
SCM Selector Control Mismatch minor (1)
(protocol mismatch)
OTM Operation Type Mismatch minor (1)
[DNR (Do Not Reverse) request is received in K1
and protection is revertive or SF/SD request is
received in K1 with incorrect Sf/Sd Priority
MS-SPRing : Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
ARV APS protocol Rules Violation failure major
ATO APS protocol Time Out failure major
AUN APS protocol Unknown Node failure major
PTM Potential Traffic Misconnection failure minor
MMS Multiple Multiplex Section failure minor

Table 2-33 : Alarms and severity levels - xSTM-n cards

(1) When the MSP is configured in 1+1

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-46 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

xSTM-n cards Name Severity level


Alarms
MSA : Multiplex Section Adaptation
AU-AIS Administrative Unit - Alarm Indication Signal warning
AU-LOP Administrative Unit - Loss Of Pointer major
HPOM : High order Path Overhead Monitoring
HO-EBER-B3 Bit Error Rate > 10-5 on B3 Byte major
HO-SD-B3 High Order Path - Signal Degrade minor
HO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 byte) warning
HO-RDI High Order Path - Remote Defect Indication warning
(G1 byte)
HO-UNEQ Remote Error Indication (G1 byte) warning
HO-TIM HO-RDI minor
HPT : High order Path Termination
HO-SD-B3 High Order Path - Signal Degrade minor
-5
HO-EBER-B3 Bit Error Rate > 10 on B3 Byte major
HO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 byte) warning
HO-RDI High Order Path - Remote Defect Indication warning
(G1 byte)
HO-UNEQ High Order Path - UNEQuipped payload) warning
HO-TIM High Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minor
HO-PLM Payload Label Mismatch warning
HO-LOM High Order Path - Loss Of Multitrame minor
HPA : Higher order Path Adaptation
TU-AIS Tributary Unit - Alarm Indication Signal warning
TU-LOP Tributary Unit - Loss Of Pointer minor
LPOM : Lower order Path Overhead Monitor
LO-EBER-B3 (VC3) Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on B3 Byte major
-3
LO-EBER-V5 (VC12) Bit Error Rate > 10 on V5 Byte major
LO-SD-B3 (VC3) Signal Degrade - B3 minor
LO-SD-V5 (VC12) Signal Degrade - V5 minor
LO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 or V5 byte) warning
LO-RDI Low order Path - Remote Defect Indication warning
(G1 or V5 byte)
LO-UNEQ Low order Path - UNEQuipped payload warning
LO-TIM Low Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minor

Table 2-34 : Alarms and severity levels - xSTM-n cards

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-47
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

xSTM-n cards Name Severity level


Alarms
Board alarm
SFP alarms SFP missing major
No configurable SFP mismatch major
(for STMn-SFP cards) SFP defective major
major
SFP not approved
Table 2-35 : Alarms and severity levels - xSTM-n cards

LTU21E1 and Name Severity level


63E1FA cards
Alarms
PPI : PDH Physical Interface
PPI-LOS (21 x 2M) Loss Of Signal minor-Inv.
PPI-AIS Alarm Indication Signal warning
Table 2-36 : Alarms and severity levels - LTU21E1 and 63E1FA cards

LTU3E3DS3 and Name Severity level


3E3DS3FA cards
Alarms
PPI : PDH Physical Interface
PPI-LOS (34 / 45M) Loss Of Signal minor-Inv.
PPI-AIS Alarm Indication Signal warning
PPI-RLOL (34 / 45 M) Receive Loss Of Lock warning

Table 2-37 : Alarms and severity levels - LTU3E3DS3 and 3E3DS3FA cards

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-48 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

PDH cards Name Severity level


Alarms
LPT : Lower order Path Termination
LO-EBER-B3 (VC3) Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on B3 Byte major
-3
LO-EBER-V5 (VC12) Bit Error Rate > 10 on V5 Byte major
LO-SD-B3 (VC3) Signal Degrade - B3 minor
LO-SD-V5 (VC12) Signal Degrade - V5 minor
LO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 or V5 byte) warning
LO-RDI Low order Path - Remote Defect Indication warning
(G1 or V5 byte)
LO-UNEQ Low order Path UNEQuipped warning
LO-TIM Low Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minor
LO-PLM Low order Path Payload Label Mismatch warning
Board alarm
Card alarm Traffic not provided major
Table 2-38 : Alarms and severity levels - PDH cards

GIG-E card Name Severity level


Alarms
Data Physical Interface
LOS Loss of Optical Signal major
LINK DOWN Loss of Data major
Pause Mode Rejected major
(2) Pause Mode Rejected
HPT : High order Path Termination
HO-SD-B3 High Order Path - Signal Degrade minor
HO-RDI High Order Path - Remote Defect Indication warning
(G1 byte)
HO-UNEQ High Order Path - UNEQuipped payload) warning
HO-TIM High Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minor
HO-PLM Payload Label Mismatch warning
VCG : Virtual Container
See Table 2-41 except VCG rdi
GFP : General Framing Procedure
See Table 2-41

Table 2-39 : Alarms and severity levels - GIG-E card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-49
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

xGE-DM card Name Severity level


Alarms
Data Physical Interface
LOS Loss of Optical Signal major
ETH Interface Defect Loss of Ethernet link major
Pause Mode Rejected major
(2) Pause Mode Rejected
LOSYNC Loss Of 10 bit code word Synchronization major
(Fibre Channel)
VCG : Virtual Container
See Table 2-41
HPT : High order Path Termination
See Table 2-34 except HO-LOM
LPT : Lower order Path Termination
Only 2GE-DM-2G
See Table 2-38
Board alarm
SFP alarms SFP missing major
No configurable SFP mismatch major
(for xGE-DM-SFP SFP defective major
cards) major
SFP not approved
Table 2-40 : Alarms and severity levels - xGE-DM card

(2) This alarm is raised :


- for GIG-E card when QoS Mode Pause is selected and if the card cannot send pause
frame
- for GFP150 and xGE-DM cards when the "Automatic" mode and the "Pause" capability
are selected and the Pause status = No Pause (the remote equipment has refused the
negotiation of Pause).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-50 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

GFP150 eXtra card Name Severity level


Alarms
Data Physical Interface
ETH Interface Defect Loss of Ethernet link major
Pause Mode Rejected major
(2) Pause Mode Rejected
VCG : Virtual Container
VCAT lom Loss of Multiframe warning
VCAT sqm SeQuence Mismatch warning
VCAT loa Loss of Aligment major
VCG rdi (3) VCG - Remote Defect Indication warning
VCG defect (4) All VCG is failed, interrupted traffic major
VCG degraded (4) (5) Some VCG are failed, degraded traffic minor
LCAS : Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCAS member fail (5) A member of VCG is failed warning
LPT : Lower order Path Termination
See Table 2-38
GFP : General Framing Procedure
GFP lfd Loss of GFP Frame Delineation major
GFP locs Loss Of Client Signal minor
GFP loccs Loss Of Client Character Synchronisation minor
GFP upm User Payload Mismatch minor
GFP exm EXtension header Mismatch minor
OAM-CC : Operation Administration Maintenance Continuity Check
OAM Defect Loss of at least four consecutive frames major
OAM Degraded Loss of one up to three consecutive frame) minor
Board alarm
Licence alarm No MSTP Licence major

Table 2-41 : Alarms and severity levels - GFP150 eXtra card

(3) This alarm raises only in LCAS mode when SF (TU-AIS, TU-LOP, SD) is detected on all
the VCG members of the remote equipment.
(4) These alarms are indications of state of the path elaborated for the network manager in
addition of faults indications ; of this fact 2 indications can be transmitted in logs for only
one default.
(5) This alarm raises only if LCAS mode is active.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-51
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

GFP2500-2GE card Name Severity level


Alarms
Data Physical Interface
LOS Loss of Optical Signal major
ETH Interface Defect Loss of Ethernet link major
Link Aggregation 802.3ad (Trunk)
Defect The two physical Gigabit Ethernet ports have an major
"Operstatus" at down
Degraded One of the two physical Gigabit Ethernet ports minor
has an "Operstatus" at down
VCG : Virtual Container
See Table 2-41
LCAS : Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
See Table 2-41
HPT : High order Path Termination
See Table 2-34 except HO-LOM
LPT : Lower order Path Termination
See Table 2-38
GFP : General Framing Procedure
See Table 2-41
OAM-CC : Operation Administration Maintenance Continuity Check
See Table 2-41
Board alarms
SFP alarms SFP missing major
No configurable SFP mismatch major
SFP defective major
major
SFP not approved
Licence alarm No MSTP Licence major

Table 2-42 : Alarms and severity levels - GFP2500-2GE card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-52 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

CCU-2G card Name Severity level


Alarms
SETS : Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
LOS T3 Loss of signal on synchronization input T3 minor
LOS T2 Loss of signal on synchronization input T2 warning
LOS T1 Loss of signal on synchronization input T1 warning
LOS T4 Fault on synchronization output T4 minor
SYNC FREQ OUT OF Synchronization rhythm frequency out of phase minor
RANGE locked loop range (6)
Local equipment
Local user inputs # 1 Local input loop 1 warning
Local user inputs # 2 Local input loop 2 warning
Local user inputs # 3 Local input loop 3 major
Local user inputs # 4 Local input loop 4 minor
Local user output # 1 Local output loop 1 warning (7)
Local user output # 2 Local output loop 2 warning (8)
Remote equipment
Remote Mngt major Remote major alarm major (9)
Remote Mngt minor Remote minor alarm minor (9)
Power supply
48V#1 Missing of 48V#1 input major
48V#2 Missing of 48V#2 input major
48VS Missing of 48V signaling input minor

Table 2-43 : Alarms and severity levels - CCU-2G card

(6) Internal equipment rhythm is then kept in a 9.2 ppm range

(7) By default, the Local user output #1 loop is activated when a major alarm is present

(8) By default, the Local user output #2 loop is activated when a minor alarm is present

(9) If the configured equipment is declared central office

CTRL-2G card Name Severity level


Alarms
Equipment management
PPP#1 to 34 DOWN Loss of management link PPP#i minor

Ethernet DOWN Loss of Ethernet link minor

Table 2-44 : Alarms and severity levels - CTRL-2G card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-53
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

SWITCH HO/LO card Name Severity level


Alarms
TCM : Tandem Connection Monitoring
LTC Loss of Tandem Connection major
TC-INCAIS TC - INComing AIS minor
TC-APIM TC - Access Point Identifier Mismatch major
TC-RDI TC - Remote Defect Indication minor
TC-ODI TC - Outgoing Defect Indication minor
TC-REI TC - Remote Error Indication minor
TC-OEI TC - Outgoing Error Indication minor
TC-UNEQ TC UNEQuipped payload major

Table 2-45 : Alarms and severity levels - SWITCH HO/LO card

FAN-2G card Name Severity level


Alarms
FAN-2G module
One Fan Failed One Fan Failed major
Fans Failed At least two Fans Failed major
Power Supply Fail 1 Defective Power supply block 1 major
(10)
Power Supply Fail 2 Defective Power supply block 2 major
(10)

Table 2-46 : Alarms and severity levels - FAN-2G card

(10)The two alarm indications are operational only if the module FAN-2G arranges the option
of redundant converter.

Cards Name Severity level


Alarms
Board Alarms Missing Card major
Mismatch Card major
Defective Card major
(see Table 2-48)

Table 2-47 : Alarms and severity levels - Cards

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-54 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Information Localization Description


"FPGA Codes Missing or CTRL-2G Card At least one flash FPGA code is absent or is
Not Compatible" incompatible
"Soft. Codes Missing or CTRL-2G Card At least one flash soft code is absent or is
Not Compatible" incompatible
"RAM Test Failed" CCU-2G Card RAM self test has failed
"RAM Too Small" CCU-2G Card The RAM size is too small
"Hardware Incompatible" All Cards The hardware release of the card is
incompatible with the CTRL soft
"Unknown Family in All Cards The card family is not managed by the
Inventory" CTRL soft
"Inventory Not Readable" All Cards The card inventory is not readable
"Incorrect Inventory" All Cards The card inventory is incorrect
"FPGA Code All Cards A FPGA code is incompatible with the CTRL
Incompatible" soft
"FPGA Code Missing" All Cards A FPGA code is missing in flash memory
"Cannot Load FPGA" All Cards A FPGA code cannot be loaded
"FPGA Test Failed" All Cards The FPGA self test has failed
"MICRO FPGA Test SWITCH HO/LO Cards The MICRO FPGA self test has failed
Failed"
"BDT FPGA Test Failed" SWITCH HO/LO Cards The BDT FPGA self test has failed
"WEST FPP ASIC" Test SWITCH HO/LO Cards The "WEST FPP ASIC(s)" self test has
Failed" failed
"EAST FPP ASIC" Test SWITCH HO/LO Cards The "EAST FPP ASIC(s)" self test has failed
Failed"
"Soft. Code Incompatible" GIG-E Card The software code revision is incompatible
with the CTRL software
"Soft. Code Missing" GIG-E Card The software code is missing in flash
memory
"Cannot Load Software" GIG-E Card The software code cannot be loaded
"Software Not GIG-E Card The software card does not respond
Responding"
"Supply Failure" All Cards Power supply failure
"PSU Family Mismatch" PSU cards The PSU card is incompatible with the other
PSU cards of the shelf
"Incorrect Inventory or LTU21E1 or Power supply failure or incorrect inventory
Power Supply Failed" LTU3E3DS3 Cards
"PDH ASIC 1 Test Failed" 63E1 or 3E3DS3 Cards The ASIC 1 self test has failed
"PDH ASIC 2 Test Failed" 63E1 or 3E3DS3 Cards The ASIC 2 self test has failed
"PDH ASIC 3 Test Failed" 63E1 or 3E3DS3 Cards The ASIC 3 self test has failed
"LTU CPLD Test Failed" LTU21E1 or The CPLD self test has failed
LTU3E3DS3 Cards
"LTU LIU Test Failed" LTU3E3DS3 Cards The LIU self test has failed

Table 2-48 : Associated informations to card defective alarm

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-55
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Fault correlation

A correlation processing is performed on all the detected faults.


This correlation mechanism, implemented on each change of information collected, is used to
remove faults induced by other faults to facilitate fault isolation.
The tables below define the faults which are masked by each fault detected in the system.

Key :
X : The fault considered on the current line is masked by the faults of the current
column.
ex : Fault 3 (LOF) is masked by fault 2 (LOS).

Correlation of STM-n faults


FAULTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FAULTS TF LOS LOF TIM EBER AIS EBER- SD-B2 RDI REI
-B1 B2
1 SPI-TF
2 SPI-LOS
3 RST-LOF X
4 RST-TIM X X
5 RST-EBER-B1 X X X
6 MST-AIS X X X X
7 MST-EBER-B2 X X X X X
8 MST-SD-B2 X X X X X X
9 MST-RDI X X X
10 MST-REI X X X X

Table 2-49 : Correlation of STM-n faults

Correlation of MSP faults


FAULTS 1 2 3
FAULTS PAM SCM OTM
1 PAM
2 SCM X
3 OTM X

Table 2-50 : Correlation of MSP faults

Correlation of MS-SPRing faults


FAULTS 1 2 3 4 5
FAULTS AUN ARV ATO PTM MMS
1 AUN
2 ARV X
3 ATO X X
4 PTM X X X
5 MMS X X X X

Table 2-51 : Correlation of MS-SPRing faults

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-56 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Correlation of HPOM/HPT faults from SDH, xGE-DM and GFP2500-2GE cards

The HO faults are masked by the STM-n faults : LOS, LOF and MST-AIS..
The HO-LOM fault is filtered if there is no configured VC12 connection on this STM-n

FAULTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FAULTS AU-AIS AU-LOP UNEQ TIM RDI REI PLM TU-LOM EBER SD-
-B3 B3
1 AU-AIS
2 AU-LOP
3 HO-UNEQ X X
4 HO-TIM X X X
5 HO-RDI X X X X
6 HO-REI X X X X X
7 HO-PLM (HPT) X X X X
8 HO-LOM (HPT) X X X X X
9 HO-EBER-B3 X X X
10 HO-SD-B3 X X X X

Table 2-52 : Correlation of HPOM/HPT faults from SDH, xGE-DM


and GFP2500-2GE cards

Correlation of HPT faults from GIG-E cards

The HPT faults are masked by the STM faults : LOS, LOF and MST-AIS.
The only alarm associated to the SDH channel is LOA and is correlative by the LOM, SQM,
PLM, UNEQ, TIM and VC-AIS of all VC4 that compose the channel.

FAULTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AU-AIS = AU-LOP = SD-B3 UNEQ TIM PLM RDI Concat_ Concat_
FAULTS VC4-AIS VC4-AIS LOM SQM
1 AU-AIS = VC4-AIS
2 AU-LOP = VC4-AIS
3 HO-SD-B3 X X X
4 HO-UNEQ X X
5 HO-TIM X X X
6 HO-PLM X X X X
7 HO-RDI X X X X
8 Concat_LOM X X X X X
9 Concat_SQM X X X X X X

Table 2-53 : Correlation of HPT faults from GIG-E cards

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-57
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Correlation of HPA/LPOM/LPT faults


The HPA/LPOM/LPT faults are masked by the STM faults (LOS, LOF and MST-AIS), the
MSA faults (AU-AIS and AU-LOP) and the HPT faults (UNEQ, TIM, PLM and LOM)
The HPA faults (TU-AIS and TU-LOP) are correlative by the HO-LOM fault only for the
connections of VC12 type.

FAULTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAULTS TU-AIS TU-LOP UNEQ TIM RDI REI PLM EBER SD
1 TU-AIS
2 TU-LOP
3 LO-UNEQ X X
4 LO-TIM X X X
5 LO-RDI X X X X
6 LO-REI X X X X X
7 LO-PLM (LPT) X X X X
8 LO-EBER X X X
9 LO-SD X X X X

Table 2-54 : Correlation of HPA/LPOM/LPT faults

Correlation of 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s ports faults

FAULTS 1 3 2
FAULTS LOS RLOL AIS
1 PPI-LOS
2 PPI-RLOL (*) X
3 PPI-AIS X X

Table 2-55 : Correlation of 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s ports faults

(*) only for 34/45 Mbits ports

Correlation of remote faults


LO-REI, LO-RDI, HO-REI and HO-RDI faults of unidirectional connection input are filtered.

Correlation of Ethernet ports faults from Data cards


FAULTS Interface LOS LOSYNC Pause LINK
FAULTS Defect (Fibre Mode DOWN
channel) Rejected

1 Interface Defect
2 LOS
3 LOSYNC (Fibre X
channel)
4 Pause Mode X X
Rejected
5 LINK DOWN

Table 2-56 : Correlation of Ethernet ports faults from Data cards

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-58 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Correlation of VCG faults from Data cards

The LOA, LFD, LOCS, LOCCS, UPM, EXM, RDI, DEFECT and DEGRADED alarms are VCG
alarms.
The LOM, SQM, LCAS_MemberFail alarms are alarms of member constituting a VCG.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FAULTS LOA LFD LOCS LOCCS EXM UPM LOM#i SQM#i LCAS_ RDI DEF DEGR
Member ECT ADED
FAULTS Fail#i
1 LOA
2 LFD X
3 LOCS X X
4 LOCCS X X
5 EXM X X
6 UPM X X X
7 LOM#i
8 SQM#i X
9 LCAS_
Member
Fail#i
10 RDI
11 DEFECT X
12 DEGRADED X

Table 2-57 : Correlation of VCG faults from Data cards

Definitions of VCG_DEFECT and VCG DEGRADED synthesized failure indications


Notations used in the following paragraphes :
SF Member#i corresponds to at least one of among failures LOM#i, SQM#i, SF_LPT#i or LCAS
Member Fail#i of VC member #i of a VCG.
SF_LPT#i corresponds to at least one of among failures TU-LOM (for VC-12 only), TU-AIS, TU-
LOP, LO-SD (if LCAS activated), LO-PLM, LO-UNEQ, LO-TIM of the LPT functional block of VC
#i.
Please note that LCAS Member Fail#i is computed only if LCAS is active.
Definitions:
When LCAS mode is not active,
- VCG_DEFECT is set whenever one of the LOCS, LOCCS, UPM, EXM, LFD, LOA failure
indications is raised or at least one of the SF Member#i is raised.
- VCG_DEGRADED is never set
When LCAS mode is active,
- VCG_DEFECT is set if one of the LOCS, LOCCS, UPM, EXM, LFD, LOA, RDI failure
indications is raised or all SF Member#1 to SF Member#X are simultaneously raised.
- VCG_DEGRADED is set if VCG_DEFECT is not set and at least one of the SF Member#i is
raised.
VCG_DEGRADED alerts the operator that, although Ethernet over SDH traffic is still going on, -
thanks to LCAS scheme the requested SLA may not be achieved due to lack of SDH
bandwidth.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-59
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Correlation of OAMCC faults from GFP150 eXtra and GFP2500-2GE cards

1 2
FAULTS DEFECT DEGRADED
FAULTS
1 DEFECT

2 DEGRADED X

Table 2-58 : Correlation of OAMCC faults from GFP150 eXtra


and GFP2500-2G cardsE

Correlation of aggregation faults from GFP2500-2GE cards

1 2
FAULTS DEFECT DEGRADED
FAULTS
1 DEFECT

2 DEGRADED X

Table 2-59 : Correlation of aggregation faults


from GFP2500-2GE cards

2.2.5 - Performance processing


Performance processing consists of supervising the following monitoring points :

For the local equipment :


the regeneration section (byte B1) ("near end working (protection) RS"),
the multiplexing section (byte B2) ("near end working (protection) MS"),
the VC4 tributary paths ("near end High Path Virtual Container"),
VC3 tributary paths ("near end Low Path Virtual Container"),
VC12 tributary paths (byte V5) ("near end Low Path Virtual Container"),
TCM tributary paths (N1 byte) (IEC : incoming error counter)

For the remote equipment :


the multiplexing section (byte M1) ("far end working (protection) MS"),
the VC4 tributary paths ("far end High Path Virtual Container").
VC3 tributary paths ("far end Low Path Virtual Container")
VC12 tributary paths (byte V5) ("far end Low Path Virtual Container").

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-60 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Performance processing involves the following functions :


computation of number of erroneous blocks on the local and remote malfunctions and
monitoring for appearance of faults over a period of one second,
computation and determination of states : ES (Errored Second), SES (Severely Errored
Second ), BBE (Background Block Error) and UAS (UnAvailable Second) for each
monitoring point,
preparation, for each monitoring point, of 15 minute and 24 hour counters (BBE, ES, SES
and UAS).

Determination of performance states : ES, SES and UAS :

For each monitoring point, the performance states are as following :


ES (Errored Seconds) : number of seconds with at least one error detected over a
period of 1 s or a fault,
SES (Severely Errored Seconds) : number of severely errored seconds,

Monitoring point SES declaration threshold


RS (byte B1) (for local) 2400 (1 block by frame)
MS (byte B2) (for local) and MS (byte M1) (for remote) 28 800 (24 blocss by frame)
HP VC4 / IEC 2400 (1 block by frame)
LP - VC3 2400 (1 block by frame)
LP - VC12 (byte V5) 600 (1 block by 4 frames)

UAS (UnAvailable Second) : number of unavailable seconds,


BBE (Background Block Error) : number of erroneous blocks not including SES.

REMINDER : An SES is a second for which the number of errors exceed the defined
threshold or during which at least one fault is detected.

Generation of 15 minute and 24 hour counters :

The result of the computations is then combined for each monitoring point in :
24 hour counters (BBE, ES, SES and UAS),
15 minute counters (BBE, ES, SES and UAS).
The last six "unavailable periods" are preserved and displayed on the web browser.
Performance processing is initialized on creation of the connection.
The following information can be displayed on the web browser : the last 16 non-null 15 minute
counters, the current 15 minute counter, the last non-null 24 hour counter, the current 24 hour
counter and the last 6 unavailable periods.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-61
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.6 - Optical Supervision


Optical modules SFP DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring) allow the supervision of the parameters
below (Menu : STM-n > TR REC > SFP, 2GE-DM > SFP or GFP2500-2GE > SFP) :

OOP : Optical Output Power (dBm)


OIP : Optical input Power (dBm)
LBC : Laser Bias Current (mA)
Temp : SFP module Temperature (C)
Voltage : SFP module supply Voltage (V)

2.2.7 - Synchronization
Synchronization of the local and remote equipment is managed in accordance with the available
synchronization sources, their quality and the priority assigned to each.
The possible synchronization sources include :
standalone operation (holdover* or local oscillator mode),
2 sources T1 extracted from incoming tributary STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16 trains (1 to 32
possibilities depending on number and type of cards present in equipment),
2 sources T1 extracted from incoming line STM-4 or STM-16 trains (1 to 2 possibilities
depending on number of "LINE" cards in equipment),
2 sources T2 extracted from incoming tributary 2 Mbit/s trains (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1 or
63E1FA card).
The 63E1FA card does not propose T2 synchronization when it is located in "TRIB 1" slot.
The TRIB 8 and LTU 8-x slots are only proposed in T2_1.
T3_1 and T3_2 : two external sources, 2 MHz G.703

* The Holdover mode is a memorization of a last valid synchronization timing.


Until 60s can be necessary after a source selection to validate the holdover mode.

NOTE : On creation of an MSP protection, the Protection link inherits the configurations of
the Working link and therefore, in particular,those of synchronization.
The Synchronization screen summarizes the status of the timing obtained from the
traffic link under the Working interface reference.

The equipment also offers two identical outputs 2 MHz G.703 T4 allowing to synchronize other
equipment ; these exits can be :
non activated
forced on T0 synchronization of the equipment
synchronized on one of sources T1 extracted from incoming tributary STM-1, STM-4 or
STM-16 trains or from incoming line STM-4 or STM-16 trains.

The figures below give examples of synchronization in accordance with the equipment
connections.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-62 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

External synchronization
input at 2 MHz (T3) :
- Quality = PRC, STM16 access(T1-c) =:
- Priority = 1. STM16 access (T1-c) =: - Quality = DNU
- Quality = DNU - Priority = 2.
- Priority = 2.
) ADR2500 eXtra 1 ( ) ADR2500 eXtra 2 (
1) (2 SSM = PRC
1) (2
) Internal ( ) T0 = T1 Line 1 (
synchronization T1 Line2 = T0 = T3 T1 Line2=T0
T0 = T3 =T3 (ADR2500
eXtra 1)

2 MHz clock output


T4 = T0 = T3 (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

ADR2500 eXtra 3 Synchronization of


SSM = PRC other equipment
) (
2) T0 = T1 Line1 (1
) (

2 MHz clock output


T4 = T0 = T1 Line1 = T3 (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

Synchronization of other equipment

Figure 2-6 : Synchronization using 2 MHz external synchronization input (T3)

T1"Trib" STM-n access


SSM = PRC, STM16 access (T1-c) =:
- Priority = 1. STM16 access (T1-c) =: - Quality = DNU
- Quality = DNU - Priority = 2.
- Priority = 2.
) ADR2500 eXtra 1 ( ) ADR2500 eXtra 2 (
1) (2 SSM = PRC
1) (2
) Internal ( ) T0 = T1 Line 1 (
synchronization T1 Line2=T0=T1"Trib" T1 Line2=T0
T0 = T1"Trib" =T1"Trib"(ADR2500 eXtra 1)

2 MHz clock output


T4 = T0 = T1"Trib" (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

ADR2500 eXtra 3
SSM = PRC
) (
2) T0 = T1 Line1 (1
) (

2 MHz clock output


T4 = T0 = T1 Line1 = T1"Trib" (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

Synchronization of other equipment

Figure 2-7 : Synchronization using a synchronous tributary access

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-63
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.8 - Loops Management


On remote sites (i.e. non-central site), two local outgoing loops (Major and minor local user
outputs) are activated on the appearance of local alarms : equipment alarms and configured remote
indication loops (Local user input #1, #2, #3 and #4).

The remote loopback function allows an equipment named "Central Site", to register faults
present on remote sites.

This function requires each site to transmit to the "Central Site" an alarm presence message.
Depending on the configuration, this message corresponds to the local alarms and/or the remote
monitoring loopback 1 and 2 (Local user input #1 or #2). Data are transmitted within the S1 byte (the 4
bits not used for the synchronisation).

For each site in the network, data chaining in either a bus or ring type network architecture is
provided by a "OR" function between data received via the incoming S1 STM-n, and local data (Local
alarms and/or Local user input #1and #2).

In the "Central Site" equipment, an "OR" function between data received via incoming S1
STM-n and local data enables local alarm loopbacks to be activated (Local user outputs Major and
Minor). Furthermore, a major/critical or minor remote default detected via S1 will trigger in the Central
Site equipment a local alarm with the major or minor severity.

S1 emission and reception may be configured separately for each STM-n access. This allows
the rejection of S1 received from a remote equipment which does not use the S1 byte for remote
loopback. This is also used to deselect S1 emission in some or all STM-n access points from central
sites in order to prevent a permanent alarm activation.

To configure the remote loopback function, the following parameters should be programmed :
"Central Site", Send Remote 1 and Send Remote 2 for local data, and Enable Input (Reception of
S1) and Enable Output (Emission of S1) for each configured STM-n access.

The Enable Input and Enable Output parameters take default values on each modification
of the Central Site option. Therefore, if the equipment becomes Central Site, the Enable Input
boxes become selected and the Enable Output boxes unselected. And if the equipment becomes
Remote Site (default configuration), all Enable Input and Enable Output boxes become
unselected. Then, these default values may be modified when required.

NOTE 1 : When Local User Input #1 and #2 collect major/critical and minor alarm informations, it is
necessary to give them a "warning" severity in order to avoid a permanent activation.

NOTE 2 : If the equipment loopback function is configured, it is necessary to deselect the S1 reception
on the corresponding STM-n access in order to avoid a permanent alarm activation.

NOTE 3 : If a MSP type protection is configured, the loops management parameters are not
configurable on the Protection access. They take the same values as the Working access parameters
and the S1 byte is broadcasted on both access points of the MSP pair.

The Figure 2-8 gives an example of remote management of the local outgoing loops
according to the equipment connections.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-64 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Local Outgoing Loops =


Local Alarms + Remote alarms
* Invalid S1 : S1 whose * Valid S1 : OR with the
most significant bit is set local alarms and the received
to 1 S1 alarms (excepted twin one
with valid one)
ADR2500 eXtra 1
Central Site

S1 Reception enabled
for all accesses

Invalid S1* S1Emission not Invalid S1*


enabled for any access

Valid S1* Valid S1*

ADR2500 eXtra 2 ADR2500 eXtra 3


Remote Site Remote Site

S1 emission and Valid S1* S1 emission and


reception enabled for reception enabled for
all accesses all accesses

Valid S1*

Local Outgoing Loops = Local Outgoing Loops =


Local Alarms Local Alarms

Figure 2-8 : Remote loopback function (collection of alarms on a Central Site)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-65
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.9 - MS-SPRing protection on LINE interfaces


2.2.9.1 - Introduction

To protect a ring-type digital data transmission network, several protection mechanisms are
available, including MS-SPRing, SNC and MSP. The MSP and MS-SPRing protection systems
are exclusive with respect to each other on a single multiplexing section, and the SNC protection
does not apply to channels protected by MS-SPRing.
The MS-SPRing protection function (Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring) is available on
ring topologies with up to 16 nodes. Compared to the SNC protection, it provides the advantage
of shared use of protection resources for several trails within the ring.
In these multiplex section shared protection rings, the active channels carry the normal traffic
signals whereas the protection channels are reserved for protection of the traffic. This is available
on the Line interfaces of the ADR2500 eXtra.

2.2.9.2 - Principle

The ADR2500 eXtra implements the MS-SPRing protection diagram (BSHR) for ring protection
on 2 fibers.
The fibers are divided into channels; for example, one STM-16 contains 16 AU4 channels. The
set of channels is divided into Working channels and protection channels. There are an equal
number of each. A so called "channel" is a channel within the ring and not within an equipment.
Mechanisms are implemented by an equipment to route the Working channel information on
Protection channels in the opposite direction when a fiber break occurs, for example.
Half of the channels on each fiber are used for protection. Thus, there is only a single physical
ring.
The standard calls for the possibility of transmitting the unprotected traffic on certain channels
while other channels are protected : thus we have NUT channels (Non-preemptible Unprotected
Traffic) which cannot be interrupted for protection purposes and Extra-Traffic which is carried in
protection channels, available when the ring is idle, and therefore interrupted during a protection
action (Extra Traffic non supported).

Normal
Backup

Dir. 1 2 3

6 5 4

Figure 2-9 : Example of a protected ring

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-66 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

In the example given above, there is a connection between nodes 6 and 3 via nodes 1 and 2. A
fiber break between nodes 2 and 3 requires re-routing of the channels in node 2. The channels
thus protected cross the ring in the reverse direction to reach node 3 using the protection
channels..

The protection diagram contains 8 Working channels and 8 Protection channels :

Chan. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Type W W W W W W W W P(1) P(2) P(3) P(4) P(5) P(6) P(7) P(8)

When there is no problem on the ring, the traffic passes in 8 AU4 (8 Working).
The association of numbers to the Working and protection channels is defined by the standard
and cannot be reordered. Channel 11 always protects channel 3.

2.2.9.3 - Configuration rules relative to 2-fibers MS-SPRing protection

This section contains the configuration rules to be applied (mandatory). These rules are
automatically applied transparently by IONOS-NMS.

CAUTIONS :
- Implementation and maintenance of the MS-SPRing protection configuration using the operation
interface without the IONOS-NMS network manager is extremely tricky and is not recommended
by SAGEM.
- Node-by-node activation of the protection should only be performed provided no section fault
(SF or SD) is present.

For any automatic configuration of the MS-SPRing protection, refer to the IONOS-NMS
installation and user guide.

Configuration of topological map


The topological map appears in the form of an ordered set of values called identifiers which must
be different for each NE, and therefore unique within a ring.
Starting from any first node, the topological map is filled in by listing the identifiers node by node
while turning in the conventional direction : "East to West" in an node crossed, and therefore
"Line West (L1) to Line East (L2)" between two nodes.
Each node has a topological map of the ring updated by the local personnel or by the
management system.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-67
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

P B
L
M K
J G

A S

H E

N F
D R
C T1516800-94

Figure 2-10 : Topological map of a ring

Nodes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Identifiers A J M P B L K G S E F R C D N H

RULES :
Adding or deleting a node in a ring requires modification of the topological maps of all the nodes.
A MS-SPRing ring cannot contain more than 16 nodes.

Configuration of misconnection map in the case where the VC4 of the ring transport
containers of lower order (VC3 and VC12) that are all extracted in a unique point of the
ring

In this case, the VC4 are the links point to point between the entrance and the exit of the ring and
we are brought back to a MS-SPRing protection therefore with suppression of signal at the level
VC4 normalized

The signal cancellation topological map (used in each node) contains the topological addresses
of the nodes through which the AU4 traffic enters and exits the ring : this map is only used for
signal cancellation purposes (injection of AU-AIS) subsequent to potential erroneous connections
occurring during multiple faults in the ring.

R
T=W3

1 2 3 Normal
Backup

Dir.

T=W5

6 5 4

Figure 2-11 : Example of incoming and outgoing traffic of a ring

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-68 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

For each outgoing traffic via the time slots of the East and West interfaces, the signal cancellation
table gives the node identifier where the traffic is inserted in the ring and the node identifier where
the traffic exits the ring.

In the example above, the signal cancellation table in node 2 is :

Node 2 West :

Time slot W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
Entry 3 4
Exit 1 6

Node 2 East :

Time slot W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
Entry
Exit

The Q connection enters the ring in node 4 and exits in node 6.


It crosses node 2 in the East/West direction on Working timeslot 5.
The R connection enters the ring in node 3 and exits in node 1.
It crosses node 2 in the East/West direction on Working timeslot 3.
No connection crosses node 2 in the West/East direction.

Configuration of misconnection map in the case where the VC4 of the ring transport
containers of lower order (VC3 and VC12) that are inserted / dropped to different places
of the ring (case of the VC4 omnibuses)
In this case, two protection solutions with choice by the operator at the time of the configuration
are proposed :
- the VC4 omnibuses are decomposed in n VC4 carriers joining every adjacent equipment; these
VC4 are protected in MS-Spring and the suppression of signal is assured at the VC4 level in
accordance with the norm. The inter-operability is guaranteed thus
- the VC4 omnibuses are declared as NUT trafic ; they are not therefore protected at the level
MS-Spring and one uses the SNC protection for lower order paths that they transport

RULES :
- The signal cancellation table of each node must be updated when a trail is created or deleted in
the network.
- In each node, each Working timeslot of the signal cancellation table must contain both the entry
and exit numbers of the node on which the traffic circulates on the ring.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-69
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Configuration des NUT

The NUT map (unprotected uninterrupted traffic) must be identical in each node.
It indicates the NUT channels, i.e. channels for which the protection mechanism is inactivated.
Only Working channels are contained in the NUT map. If the Working channel is NUT, the
corresponding protection channel is also NUT.

Example :

Time slot W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
NUT X

In the above example, the channel 3 is set to NUT, so the Working channel N 3 and its
Protection channel N 11 are both NUT.

2.2.10 - TCM Function

The TCM function takes place at network level and provides the operator with a monitoring service for
VC4 data paths by the mean of TC trail delimited by TCM Points.

2.2.10.1 - TCM Points at Equipment Level


TCM Points can be set up at VC4 bi-directional cross-connections level within each equipement.

TCM Points can be configured in 2 modes :

- intrusive mode : TC EndPoint,


- non-intrusive mode : TC Monitoring Point.

The TC EndPoint consists of a Source entity and a Sink entity ; the TC EndPoints work on a pair basis
(TC Endpoint X and TC EndPoint Y) ; the part of data path delimited by the pair X/Y is named a TC
Trail.

The Source of Point X generates a multiframe which is carried by the N1 byte alongside the TC Trail
up to the Sink of Point Y ; samely in the reverse direction, the Source of Point Y generates a
multiframe carried by the N1 byte up to the Sink of Point X.

The Figure 2-12 shows the four entities Source X, Sink X, Source Y and Sink Y working together
according to :

- their localisation within a same EndPoint ;


- their assocation within a same direction.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-70 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

TC EndPoint X TC EndPoint Y

Direction 1
Source Sink

Direction 2 Sink Source

TC Trail
Consequential Action RDI

4 Entities : Source X, Sink X, Source Y, Sink Y VC4 XConnection


2 EndPoints : X (Source X + Sink X) + Y (Source Y + Sink Y)
2 Directions : D1 (Source X + Sink Y) + D2 (Source Y + Sink X) Physical Connection

Figure 2-12 : TC EndPoints X/Y

The operator has to take care of setting up the pair X/Y in a tte-bche position (Soure X(Y) facing
Sink Y(X)) in order to the Source of one Point can communicate with the Sink of the other Point and
this for each direction. TC-UNEQ and Loss of TC alarms can be due to a wrong setting up of the pair
X/Y ; please refer to Figure 2-13, Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15.

TC EndPoint X TC EndPoint Y

Source Sink

Sink Source

TC Trail

TC EndPoints X/Y are Source facing Sink ; they can delimit a TC Trail

Figure 2-13 : TC EndPoints X/Y - Source facing Sink

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-71
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

TC EndPoint X TC EndPoint Y

Source Source

Sink Sink

TC EndPoints X/Y are not Source facing Sink ; they cannot delimit a TC Trail

Figure 2-14 : TC EndPoints X/Y - Source not facing Sink

TC EndPoint X TC EndPoint Y

Sink Source

Source Sink

TC EndPoints X/Y are back to back ; they cannot delimit a TC Trail

Figure 2-15 : TC EndPoints X/Y Source and Sink back to back

Sources and Sinks are then in position to cooperate and provide the following services :

- the Sink can detect a potential multiframe witin the received N1 bytes stream : TC-UNEQ
and Loss of TC alarms are raised if needed,
- the Sink extracts data from the received multiframe : IEC Counter, TC-REI, OEI, TC-RDI,
ODI indications, TC-API field,
- the Source inserts the same data into the transmitted multiframe,
- in case of of incoming AIS signal, VC-AIS information is forced by the Source into the IEC
counter ; this VC-AIS is detected by the Sink and reported as TC-incAIS alarm,
- the Source transmits a API : TC-API Sent configurable by the operator,
- the Sink detects the received API (TC-API Received) ; this API is compared to the TC-API
Expected (configurable by the operator),
- an alarm TC-APIM is reported in case of mismatch between TC-API Expected and TC-API
Received ; this alarm can be inhibited by the operator.

The pair X/Y coherently configured can then take the consequential actions when defaults are
detected by a Sink, by propagating AIS signal in the downwards direction and by generating a RDI
indication in the upwards direction (Sink interacts with local Source) ; consequential actions are taken
by a TC EndPoint only if it has been activated by the operator.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-72 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Nota1 : in order to minimize traffic errors, when a pair of TC Endpoints are set up, it is recommended
to follow the sequence :

- configure TC EndPoint X,
- configure TC EndPoint Y (normally located on another equipment),
- activate TC EndPoint X (or Y),
- activate TC EndPoint Y (or X).

Nota2 : in order to minimize traffic errors, when a pair of TC Endpoints are removed, it is
recommended to follow the sequence :

- deactivate TC EndPoint X,
- deactivate TC EndPoint Y (normally located on another equipment),
- unconfigure TC EndPoint X (or Y),
- unconfigure TC EndPoint Y (or X).

The TC Monitoring Point consists of two Monitor entities ; each one of them dealing with one traffic
direction ; each Monitor entity is able to intercept the N1 byte received in its direction, extract from the
multiframe the same informations as a Sink entity ; however the N1 byte is not terminated and it
continues to flow unchanged in the downwards stream.
A TC Monitoring Point is standalone ; it cannot be activated ; it cannot take consequential actions.

The target of a TC Monitoring Point (Point Z) is to localise the source of a defect causing errors on TC
trail delimited by TC EndPoints X and Y ; the operator can walk Point Z alongside the TC trail between
X and Y ; please refer to Figure 2-16.

When a cross-connection (supporting a TCM Point) is removed , the TCM Point is implicitly removed :
desactivation (if EndPoint) and unconfiguration.

A TCM Point can be located on STM-1/4/16 cards ; Data cards cannot support a TCM Point.
A TCM Point cannot be located on a Stm access involved into a MSP (Working side or Protected
side).
A TCM Point cannot be located on a Connection Point involved into a SNCP.

TC EndPoint X TC MonPoint Z TC EndPoint Y

Source Mon1 Sink

Sink Mon2 Source

TC Trail

Figure 2-16 : TC Monitoring Point Z located between TC EndPoint X and TC EndPoint Y

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-73
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

TC Alarms collected by a Sink/Monitor entity are as following :

Name Alarm Meaning


ltc Loss of Tandem Connection Sink or Monitor is unable to synchronize on multiframe
tc-incAIS Incoming AIS IEC field is forced to VC-AIS as indication that the
upward Source receives an AIS signal ; the problem is
located upward to the TC trail.
tc-APIM TC-API Mismatch The TC-API Received is different from the TC-API
Expected
tc-rdi TC-RDI TC-RDI indication is raised by the upward Source
because its local Sink detects a fault (in the reverse
direction).
tc-odi ODI ODI indication is raised by the upward Source because
its local Sink has generated an AIS signal (in the
reverse direction).
tc-rei TC-REI TC-REI indication is raised by the upward Source
because its local Sink has propagated (in the reverse
direction) blocks with errors caused by the TC trail
crossing.
tc-oei OEI OEI indication is raised by the upward Source because
its local Sink has propagated (in the reverse direction)
blocks with errors.
tc-uneq TC-UNEQ Received N1 byte has value 0 ; there is not a TC
Source in the upwards direction.

Performance Counters collected by Sink/Monitor entity are only IEC Near counter showing BIP errors
caused by the TC trail crossing from the Source.

2.2.10.2 - TCM VC4 Points Management by GUI

A TCM VC4 Point is associated to VC4 cross-connection.

A VC4 cross-connection can be selected from the Traffic Connection window by means of its output
Connection Point :

- selection of the output Slot,


- selection of the output Connection Point.

Configuration of the TC mode is made by checking check-boxes in the Select the interface
belonging to the TC section of the Tandem Connection Function window as following :

Operator action Result


Check-box A Check-box B TC Configuration State
Not checked Not checked TC is not configured
Checked Checked TC is configured in non-intrusive mode
Not checked Checked TC is configured in intrusive mode at Interface B
Checked Not checked TC is configured in intrusive mode at Interface A

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-74 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

In order to configure a TCM VC4 Point :

- select the VC4 cross-connection (the output being point A),


- click on Configuration for access to Traffic Connection window,
- check the Activate TC check-box ,
- click on TC Configuration for access to Tandem Connection Function window,
- select the mode and the interface of the TC as indicated before,
- configure the different items of the TC (Monitoring check-box, Fault severities,
APIMDisable check-box, Expected TC-API, sent TC-API).

In order to unconfigure a TCM VC4 Point ;

- select the VC4 cross-connection,


- click on Configuration for access to Traffic Connection window,
- uncheck the Activate TC check-box .

In order to activate/deactivate a TCM VC4 Point ;

- select the VC4 cross-connection,


- click on Configuration for access to Traffic Connection window,
- click on TC Configuration for access to Tandem Connection Function window,
- check/uncheck the Consequent Actions Enable TC check-box .

The Traffic Connection window can also be accessed (only if there is at least one configured TC) :

- click on a Switch board icon for access to Switch board options,


- click on TC List option for acces to TC Configuration window,
- select from the TC Interfaces section the TC to amend/display.

The Traffic Connection window shows following items :

- the Select the interface belonging to the TC section,


- the Configuration section gathering following items :
- Mon check-box (used if TC alarms/conters are monitored),
- Consequent Actions Enable TC check-box,
- Fault severity fields (one for each alarm type),
- One (intrusive mode) or two (non-intrusive mode) Trace A/B sub-sections,
- One (intrusive mode) or two (non-intrusive mode) Fault A/B sub-sections,

One Trace A/B sub-section gathers following items :

- APIMDisable check-box (tc-APIM fault if mismatch between TC-API Received and TC-API
Expected),
- (Trace) Received field : value of received TC-API,
- (Trace) Exp. field : value configured for expected TC-API,
- (Trace) Sent field : value configured for sent TC-API,

One sub-section Fault A/B gives the list of current active alarms of a Sink/Monitor entity.

The Counters IEC Near window can be made as following :

- click on a Switch board icon for access to Switch board options,


- click on TC Performance option.

This window shows usual performance items.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-75
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.2.11 - Quality of service for VC4nv GigaEthernet of GIG-E card


The GIG-E card allows the association of a gigabit Ethernet flow with a WAN SDH of variable
bandwidth.
If the number of VC4 used on the WAN is strictly lower than 7, then the outgoing bandwidth on
the WAN is lower than the maximum flow on the gigabit Ethernet link and it is advisable to manage the
cases of congestion which can occur.

Moreover, the functions for classification available with the GIG-E card allows to define up to
four classes of traffic.

The ADR2500 eXTra offers several types of parameter settings, adapted to various
applications and various needs for differentiating user flows.

Some operating modes use the flow classification in order to handle the necessary droppings,
but there exists a mode of rejection without discrimination, the QoS None mode, as well as a mode
without loss, the Pause mode used to inform the equipment upstream of the congestion.

Denomination Classification Traffic Loss Criteria


Bandwidth control Yes, among 5 Yes Respect of the requested contract of
criteria traffic
WRED Yes, among 4 Yes Increasing priorities assigned to
criteria classes
QoS None No Yes, by Use rate of the transmission buffer on
RED the WAN side
Pause Mode No No Use rate of the transmission buffer on
the WAN side

2.2.11.1 - Classification criteria


This paragraph enumerates various classifications available within the GIG-E card.
The choice of the classification criterion is exclusive for the whole gigabit Ethernet port.
Excepting the "QoS None" mode depicted below, if the incoming flows do not have the expected type
by the selected mode or if no configuration is explicitly associated with an incoming flow, the implicit
class is class 0.
In these modes, the flows of Ethernet administration - frames with a destination address format as 01
80 C2 XX XX XX - are systematically assigned to class 3.

"None" mode :

In this mode, all the frames coming from the gigabit Ethernet port are associated to the same
class.
Thus, they have the same precedence and consequently the elimination is done without
distinction on the flow types.
Using this mode with small WAN flows and important specific traffics (ftp) can induce some
inconvenience for applications with small traffic.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-76 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

"802.1d" mode :

The 802.1d mode is based on the priority field of the 802.1Q header. The configuration
screen allows to assign a service class to each "Priority" value.

802.1Q header format

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Destination Ethernet address
Source Ethernet address
TPID (Tag Protocol ID)
Priority CFI VLAN ID
VLAN ID
Type/Length

"IPV4 TOS" mode :

The IPV4 TOS mode is based on the value of the precedence field from the "Type Of
Service" byte in the IP header. The configuration screen allows to assign a service class to each value
of the precedence field.

IPV4 header format

0 4 8 16 31
Ver IHL TOS Total length
Identification Flags Fragment Offset
TTL Protocol Header checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Options and padding

TOS field format :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Precedence D T R C 0

The precedence field on 3 bits allows to indicate 8 levels of priority : from 000 for the lowest to 111
for the highest. Bits D,T,R and C are used to specify the transport mode for the data gram

D: 0 = Normal Delay, 1 = Low Delay.


T: 0 = Normal Throughput, 1 = High Throughput.
R: 0 = Normal Reliability, 1 = High Reliability.
C: 0 = Normal cost, 1 = Minimal cost

"IPV6 TClass" mode :

The IPV6 TClass mode is based on the value of the TClass field (Traffic Class) from the
IPV6 header. The configuration screen allows to assign a service class to each value of TClass
"Priority" included between 8 and 15 - bit 0 forced to 1-

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-77
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

IPV6 header format (according to the RFC 2460) :

0 4 12 16 31
Version Traffic Class Flow Label
Payload Length Next Header Hop Limit
IP source address
IP destination address

Traffic Class (TClass) field format :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority

Only the 0 to 3 bits are used to define the 16 levels of priority from 0000 for the lowest, to
1111 for the highest.

"VLanId" mode :

This mode is based on the VLanId field of the 802.1Q header. The configuration screen
allows to assign a service class to each value of the "VlanId" or to a list of VlanId values. The size for
the "Arranges Size" field is in power of 2.

It is possible to define 8 VlanId fields for each four class.

To assign a class of service to a VLanId" or to a group of VLanId :


- select the class of service,
- fill out the First Vlan Id field
- fill out either the Last Vlan Id field or the Range Size field
- click on the Add button

To remove VLanId or a group of VLanId from a class of service :


- select a class of service,
- in the combo box at the bottom of the Item column, select VlanId to be removed
- click on the Delete button

To display all the VLanId configuration


- - select "All Classes".

802.1Q header format :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Destination Ethernet address
Source Ethernet address
TPID (Tag Protocol ID)
Priority CFI VLAN ID
VLAN ID
Type/Length

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-78 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

"Balanced" mode :

The Balanced mode is based on the two less significant bits of the VLanId field in the
802.1Q header. It implements a fixed assignment.

VlanId = xx00 -> class 0


VlanId = xx01 -> class 1
VlanId = xx10 -> class 2
VlanId = xx11 -> class 3

It is also associated with a mode for bandwidth allocation preset to a minimum of 25% and to
a maximum of 100% for each class.

2.2.11.2 - Bandwidth management

"Bandwidth" mode :

In the bandwidth mode, classification is used not to define relative priorities but contracts of
bandwidth for each class. The parameters are the minimum and maximum thresholds.

The minimum threshold indicates the percentage of bandwidth guaranteed for the class. The
sum of the minimum thresholds of the four classes cannot exceed 100%.
The maximum threshold indicates the maximum percentage of the bandwidth that will be
allocated. If a class has an incoming flow equal to the outgoing flow and its maximum threshold is to
80 %, it will be allocated only 80% even if the remaining 20% of the bandwidth are lost.

The "Bandwidth" mode carries out, beyond the flows guaranteed minima, a statistical on-
assignment starting from the flow not allocated with the interval of previous time, which is distributed
equitably between the classes being able there to claim. The rejections related to a going beyond of
the contract of traffic are thus temporal, not statistic.

The configuration screen displays the bandwidth related to the number of VC constituting the
WAN channel.

2.2.11.3 - Congestion management in emission on the WAN


This paragraph enumerates the various methods of congestion management in the GIG-E
card. All the following explanations refer to a context of congestion.

"Red" mode :

This mode, dedicated to the configuration "QoS None", is used to handle frames in a
completely equitable way. As long as the buffer use rate does not reach the "First Point" value, the
frames are accumulated in the buffer without dropping.
Between "First Point" and "Second Point", the recently received frames are dropped
proportionally to the use rate.
When the use rate is above the "Second Point", all frames are dropped, thus making it
possible for the buffer to empty itself.
The rejection with RED makes it possible to use the depth of the outgoing buffer to temporarily
accept an incoming flow with a higher rate than the WAN flow defined before starting to drop
packages. In addition, the statistical and progressive loss leads the higher-layer protocols to control
their outgoing traffic.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-79
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

% Loss

100

Buffer use rate


0
First Point Second Point

"WRed" mode :

In this mode, the frames are dropped according to their class of service : the most important
class is the class 3, least important is the class 0 that is implicit class. The behavior of each class is
defined by the "Profile".
In the case of the "First Profile", below a use rate of 1%, no frame is dropped.
Between 1% and 25%, class 0 frames are dropped proportionally to the buffer use rate, but frames of
other classes are not dropped to in any case.
Beyond 25% of use rate, all frames of class 0 are dropped. An identical reasoning can be held for
classes 1, 2 and 3.
The behavior is the same one in the case of the "Second Profile", only the value of the
thresholds changes.

First Profile
% Loss
100 Class 0 Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

25

Buffer use rate


1 25 50 75 99

Second Profile

% Loss
100 Class 0 Class 2 Class 3

Class 1

25

Buffer use rate

1 69 90 97 99

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-80 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

"Pause" mode :

In the pause mode, the equipment at the ends of the Ethernet link may send or receive
specific frames to temporarily suspend sending traffic. Operation in pause mode depends on the
capacities being allocated to the equipment : Autonegotiation field and Pause Capability field.

If Pause Negotiation status is equal to Disabled, the pause mechanism is disabled. Thus
the equipment is able neither to handle incoming pause frames nor to send them.

If Pause Negotiation status is equal to Received, the equipment will handle incoming
pause frames.

If the Pause Negotiation status is equal to Sent and depending on the buffer use rate, the
equipment will send a pause frame to ask the other end to suspend its traffic.

If the Pause Negotiation status is equal to Sent & Received, the equipment is able to
handle both sending and reception pause frames.

High Threshold defines the buffer use rate from which the equipment will cease sending
pause frames in order to tell the other end to suspend sending.

Low Threshold defines the buffer use rate under which the equipment will have stop sending
pause frames in order to allow the other end to restart sending.

Stop sending XOFF frame


XOFF frame sending
% Loss
100

Buffer use rate


0
Low Threshold High Threshold

Since the Ethernet Pause frames apply to all flow without distinction, no classification is
associated there.

2.2.11.4 - Congestion management in reception WAN


The flow received from the SDH for a transmission on the gigabit Ethernet port has a
simplified congestion management, limited to the treatment of the pauses frames received from the
opposite Ethernet Local. A buffer is used to prevent from immediate rejections, but those are
inevitable if the request for suspending frame transmission continue.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-81
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.3 - CARDS PROTECTION

2.3.1 - PDH cards protection


The PDH cards (63E1 or 3E3DS3) are inserted in the TRB 5 to TRIB 8 slots.

A PDH card inserted in TRIB 2 (63E1) or TRIB 1 (3E3DS3) allows to have a function of 1:n (n=4 max)
card protection provided that it is configured in protection mode as following :

- select in the card menu the "PDH Board Protection" item


- check "1:n"
- define the slots of the PDH cards to be protected in "Board to Protect" (the cases to check appear
according to the present PDH cards in the shelf)

The traffic switching on the protection card is automatic since a default (card default, missing card,
auto test defautl) is detected on the working card ; however the return of the traffic on this card,afer
repair, is not automatic : it is necessary to select "Manual Switch to Working" in the operation window.

If the traffic of a defective card has been switched on the protection card, no other traffic of another
card, even defective, can be switched on the help.

If several cards ask to switch their traffic simultaneously on the protection card, the card in the bigger
number slot TRIB will have the priority.
Example : the TRIBn+1 slot est more important than TRIBn.

In the absence of protection and in the event that TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots would be occupied, a PDH
card can be inserted in TRIB 2 or TRIB 1 to function in working mode provided that it is configured it
as following :

- select in the card menu the "PDH Board Protection" item


- check "No protection"
- associate at this card a free LTU proposed in the dropdown of the "LTU" window

The choice of operating of the card will be validated by clicking on "Apply".

The traffic alarm "Traffic not provided" is activated if :

- the traffic of a working card in defect switches on a protection card itself in defect
- a working card is in breakdown and that no protection has been configured

This alarm is provided by the working card.

2.3.2 - SWITCH HO/LO card protection


A shelf equipped of two SWITCH HO/LO cards allows to have a function of cards protection 1:1.
If a SWITCH HO/LO card falls in breakdown, (auto test default, fuse default, board missing) the traffc
switches automatically on the other card.

The "Maintenance" menu allows, after repair or replacement, to select the card used for traffic.

This menu offers to the operator a manual switch, no reversible ; this switch will be refused if the
SWITCH HO/LO card is not operational.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-82 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.3.3 - PSU card protection


According to the type of SWITC HO/LO card, one or two PSU cards are mandatory for the equipment.

If a second or third card is inserted in the shelf, it allows a function of 1:1 or 1:2 card protection.

As long as no problem appears, loads of power supply are distributed on the present cards ; if one of
them breaks down, loads are automatically balanced on the one or other cards.

2.4 - SUB-ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

REMINDERS : Whenever handling a card, be sure to wear a tightly secured antistatic


bracelet on your wrist connected to ground.

To clean optical connectors, use a pressurized air can.

2.4.1 - Replacement of an Interface card

Remarks :
Alarms will appear when a card is extracted from the shelf. To avoid the alarms and ALA 1
and ALA 2 loops from being fed back, the card should be declared as out of service.
Each module can be extracted or inserted without intervening on the other modules or on
their wiring. The only disturbance will concern the traffic in the concerned module.

Procedure :
The procedure described below can be applied, unless otherwise specified, to all the cards in
the equipment.
1. Switch any possible protected traffic to the redundant card. If the yellow "Traffic" indicator
LED goes off, the replacement will not result in any disturbance.
2. Set the card "out of service" using the web browser.
3. Remove the external connections from the front panel of the card.
NOTE : When the external optical fibers are disconnected, install the protected
covers on the connectors.

4. Unscrew and remove the card observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges.
5. Place the card in an antistatic bag.
6. Remove the new card from its antistatic bag.
7. Carefully insert the card in its slot while observing the mandatory safety precautions relative
to electrostatic discharges and secure it.
8. Perform the connections on the front panel of the card.
NOTE : For the optical cards, remove the protective covers from the connectors.
9. Configure the card if necessary and activate the card.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-83
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.4.2 - Replacement of a SWITCH HO/LO card

REMINDER : If you do not have a redundant SWITCH HO/LO card, this operation
will result in total interruption of traffic.

WARNING : Never replace a SWITCH HO/LO card if a CTRL-2G card is not in


position or has failed (STATUS indicator LEDs off) : inserting a
SWITCH HO/LO card in the shelf without a CTRL-2G card can result
in interruption of traffic.

Replacement procedure if a redundant SWITCH HO/LOcard is present :


1. Switch protected traffic to the redundant SWITCH HO/LOcard.
2. Wait for the yellow "traffic" indicator LED to go off. When the traffic indicator LED is off, the
card can be replaced without causing any disturbance.
3. Set the card "out of service" on the web browser.
4. Unscrew and remove the card observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges.
5. Place the card in an antistatic bag.
6. Remove the new card from its antistatic bag.
7. Carefully insert the new card in its slot observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges and secure it.
8. Activate the card.
9. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes before switching the traffic on this card, duration for the holdover
automaton to validate the current synchronization source.

2.4.3 - Replacement of a PSU module

Procedure :
1. Using the maintenance menu, set the PSU module to be replaced to "Off".
NOTE : If the PSU modules are not to the number of three, the transition to "Off"
will be rejected.
2. Wait for the green indicator LED to go off and the red indicator LED to come on.
3. On the MMI, the maintenance panel will be displayed (refresh the shelf view).
4. Unscrew and remove the PSU module observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges.
5. Place the module in an antistatic bag.
6. Remove the new module from its antistatic bag.
7. Insert a new module observing the mandatory safety measures relative to electrostatic
discharges and secure it.
NOTE : The new module is set into service automatically once inserted.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-84 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

Remarque :

If the equipment receives a SWITCH HO/LO card and if one only PSU card is inserted in the
shelf, the equipment went to degraded mode.

To leave this degraded mode, see the chapter 5 "DEGRADED MODE"

2.4.4 - Replacement of a CTRL-2G card

The CTRL-2G card can be extracted or inserted without disturbing the traffic transiting through an
ADR2500 eXtra.
Without a CTRL-2G card in the shelf, the automatic control functions relative to protection,
synchronization of the equipment and management of the shelf assembly are not fulfilled.
Exception : Even without a CTRL-2G card in place, switchover from a failing in traffic SWITCH
HO/LO card to its protection card is achieved. A CTRL-2G card is needed to put any card type
into service though.
If the CTRL-2G card inserted is different from that previously removed and no power
supply cutout has occurred since the card was extracted, the equipment configuration will
be preserved in its original condition. A date and time set operation is however required to
complete the equipment configuration procedure.
If a new CTRL-2G card is inserted in a shelf which is not powered up, the configuration
saved in the CTRL-2G card will be applied to the equipment on power up. A date and time
set operation is however required to complete the equipment configuration procedure.

Procedure :
1. Remove the external connections on the front panel of the card.2
3. Unscrew and remove the card observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges.
3. Place the card in an antistatic bag.
4. Remove the new card from its antistatic bag.
5. Carefully insert the card in its slot observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges and secure it.
6. Perform the connections on the front panel of the card.
7. Configure the card if necessary.

Remark :

If the four LEDs permanently flash, this means the card went to degraded mode

To leave this degraded mode, see the chapter 5 "DEGRADED MODE"

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-85
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.4.5 - Replacement of a CCU-2G card

Warning : As the shelf power supply connector is located on the CCU card, it is mandatory to
disconnect the powering cable from the POWER/ALM connector before CCU card extraction, to
prevent any risk of contact with hazardous voltages while manipulating the card.

Procedure :
1. Remove the external connections on the front panel of the card.
2. Unscrew and remove the card observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges.
3. Place the card in an antistatic bag.
4. Remove the new card from its antistatic bag.
5. Carefully insert the card in its slot observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges and secure it.
6. Perform the connections on the front panel of the card.
7. Configure the card if necessary.

2.4.6 - Replacement of FAN-2G module


The FAN-2G module contains three redundant FAN-2G to secure adequate ventilation should
any of the fans fail. Fan failures are detected on the card by monitoring the current consumed.
As soon as a default is detected on one of fans or on the power supply, it is necessary to
replace the FAN-2G module.
The FAN-2G module can be removed and replaced with no disturbance to traffic.

Procedure :
1. Unscrew and remove the module observing the mandatory safety measures relative to
electrostatic discharges.
2. Place the module in an antistatic bag.
3. Remove the new module from its antistatic bag.
4. Carefully insert the module in its position observing the mandatory safety measures relative
to electrostatic discharges and secure it.

2.4.7 - Preventive maintenance

In order to avoid a deterioration in the efficiency of ventilation, it is advised to be careful that the
grids of ventilation and blades of the modules FAN-2G are not fouled. A regular check and, if
necessary, a dusting is recommended.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-86 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.5 - FRONT PANEL OF CARDS CHANGE PROCEDURE

ADR2500 eXtra cards have been delivered with extractors from June 2004 to March 2005
ADR2500 eXtra shelves delivered from July 2006 ref. 251313627 BC in galvanised steel do not
accept old cards with extractors.
The following procedure shows how to change the front panel of the card to remove the front
panel with extractors.
Some cards need one step , some cards need two steps. The list is given at the end of this
paragraph.
This procedure is important for customers who have been buying ADR2500 eXtra since
2004/2005 with an important rotation of the spares part.
To use one of these old cards in a new shelf, it is mandatory to replace its front panel with the
new release front panel.

Card with extractor

Card without extractor

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 2-87
COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

TX8 2.5x75

2 Tubular hexagon box


spanner 6 sides N 5

1 Unscrew (2 screws) with one precision screwdriver TX8 2.5x75 (Torx type 6-branch star)

2 Unscrew (6 posts) with one tubular hexagon box spanner 6 sides N 5

Realize the unscrewing procedure on each card.


Replace the new front panel on the card to be used by a screwing procedure.

CARD PROCEDURE
PSU 1
CCU-2G 1 and 2
CTRL-2G 1 and 2
AUX 1 and 2
OPTICAL CARDS 1
4ERE 1
63E1, 3E3DS3 1
GIG-E 1 and 2

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 2-88 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

3 SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

3.1 - LIST OF NO ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS

Mnemonic Name No rohs code


ADR2500 eXtra
Shelf ADR2500 EXTRA SHELF 251 313 627
Shelf without LTU ADR2500 EXTRA SHELF NO LTU 252 711 385
FAN-2G FAN MODULE 2G 251 706 356
KIT FACIA FAN KIT FACIA FAN SAGEM 288 069 950
PSU cover PSU COVER 251 089 346
Trib/line cover TRIB/LINE COVER 251 089 354
1 LTU cover 1 LTU COVER 251 311 248
3 LTU cover 3 LTU COVER 251 311 219
Cards
LTU21E120 21E120 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 251 313 635
LTU21E75 21E75 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 251 313 648
LTU3E3DS3 3E3DS3 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 251 313 656
PSU-2G POWER SUPPLY UNIT 2G 251 253 537
PSU-160 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 160 W 251 515 677
CCU-2G COMMON CONNECTION UNIT 2G 251 313 680
CTRL-2G CONTROL UNIT 2G 251 753 462
AUX AUXILIARY UNIT 251 049 173
SWITCH HO/LO 64 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 251 253 529
SW32HOLO 32 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 251 607 962
63E1 63E1 TRIBUTARY UNIT 251 313 677
63E1FA 63E1TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONT 252 485 331
ACCESS

3E3DS3 3E3DS3 TRIBUTARY UNIT 251 313 669


3E3DS3FA 3x34/45 TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONT 251 943 074
ACCESS
4ERE 4X STM-1 ELECTRICAL UNIT 251 049 152
4xS1.1 (***) 4X STM-1 S-1.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 524 259
4xL1.1 (***) 4X STM-1 L-1.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 530 434
4xL1.2 (***) 4X STM-1 L-1.2 OPTICAL UNIT 251 530 447

Table 3-1 : List of no rohs ADR2500 eXtra items

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 3-1
SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

Mnemonic Name No rohs code


4xMM1 (***) 4X STM-1 MM1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 735 360
4xSTM1-SFP (*) 4XSTM1 SFP UNIT 252 578 425
S4.1 (***) STM-4 S-4.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 049 149
L4.1 (***) STM-4 L-4.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 122 550
L4.2 (***) STM-4 L-4.2 OPTICAL UNIT 251 196 005
L16.1 (***) STM-16 L-16.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 049 128
L16.2 (***) STM-16 L-16.2 OPTICAL UNIT 251 483 164
L1550.92 (***) STM-16 L-1550.92 OPTICAL UNIT 251 049 131
L1547.72 (***) STM-16 L-1547.72 OPTICAL UNIT 251 070 735
L1549.32 (***) STM-16 L-1549.32 OPTICAL UNIT 251 070 748
L1552.52 (***) STM-16 L-1552.52 OPTICAL UNIT 251 070 756
U16.2 (***) STM-16 OPTICAL UNIT for booster 251 120 861
STM16-SFP (*) STM16 SFP UNIT 252 578 438
GIG-E SX (**)(***) GIG-E SX UNIT 251 068 024
GIG-E LX (***) GIG-E LX UNIT 251 560 362
GIG-E ZX (***) GIG-E ZX UNIT 251 582 884
1GE-DM ZX (***) 1GE DUAL MODE ZX UNIT 252 583 398
2GE-DM ZX (***) 2GE DUAL MODE ZX UNIT 252 590 893
2GE-DM-SFP 2GE DUAL MODE SFP UNIT 252 668 670
GFP150 eXtra GFP150EXTRA PLATINUM 251 435 209
Adaptation Kits
19 IN KIT 19 IN MOUNTING KIT 251 436 793
ETSI KIT ETSI MOUNTING KIT 251 436 805
Units
OPTICAL BOOSTER +14 DBM 251 125 832
MUX 10000 T 251 156 410
MUX 10000 A 251 163 949

Table 3-2 : List of no rohs ADR2500 eXtra items

(*) The STMx-SFP and xGE-DM-SFP cards will be equipped with the choice with one of the
types of codified SFP modules which corresponds to them. (Table 3-4 : List of rohs optical
modules of ADR2500 eXtra)

(**) "GIG-E SX" corresponds to previously named GIG-E card of ADR 2500c

(***) Cards in auto-discovery (cards not envisaged but recognized and managed at insertion)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 3-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

3.2 - LIST OF ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS

Mnemonic Name Rohs code


ADR2500 eXtra
FAN-2G FAN MODULE 2G SAGEM 252 727 817
Cards
LTU21E120 21E120 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 252 728 273
LTU21E75 21E75 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 252 728 294
LTU3E3DS3 3E3DS3 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 252 728 306
PSU-160 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 160 W 252 727 838
CCU-2G COMMON CONNECTION UNIT 2G 252 728 210
CTRL-2G CONTROL UNIT 2G SAGEM 252 763 339
AUX AUXILIARY UNIT 252 728 249
SWITCH HO/LO 64 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 252 728 228
SW32HOLO 32 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 252 758 705
63E1 63E1 TRIBUTARY UNIT 252 728 231
63E1FA 63E1TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONT 252 794 553
ACCESS

3E3DS3 3E3DS3 TRIBUTARY UNIT 252 790 203


3E3DS3FA 3x34/45 TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONT 252 790 191
ACCESS

4ERE 4X STM-1 ELECTRICAL UNIT 252 885 015


4xSTM1-SFP 4XSTM1 SFP UNIT 252 790 211
STM4-SFP STM4 SFP UNIT 252 790 224
STM16-SFP STM16 SFP UNIT 252 790232
2GE-DM-SFP 2GE DUAL MODE SFP UNIT 252 790 245
2GE-DM-2G 2GE DUAL MODE 2G UNIT 253 033 800
GFP150 eXtra GFP150EXTRA PLATINUM 252 728 252
GFP2500-2GE GFP2500 2XGE UNIT 252 723 364
Adaptation Kits
19 IN KIT 19 IN MOUNTING KIT 252 759 864
ETSI KIT ETSI MOUNTING KIT 252 759 905

Table 3-3 : List of rohs ADR2500 eXtra items

(*) The STMx-SFP, xGE-DM-SFP, 2GE-DM-2G and GFP2500-2GE cards will be equipped
with the choice with one of the types of codified SFP modules which corresponds to them.
(Table 3-4 : List of rohs optical modules of ADR2500 eXtra)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 3-3
SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

Mnemonic Name Rohs code


SFP modules
SFP DDM S-1.1 MODULE 252 709 939
SFP DDM L-1.1 MODULE 252 586 245
SFP DDM L-1.2 MODULE 252 709 947
SFP DDM S-1.1-Bidi MODULE 252 942 360
SFP DDM S-1.2-Bidi MODULE 252 942 373
SFP DDM L-1.1-Bidi MODULE 253 074 111
SFP DDM L-1.2-Bidi MODULE 253 074 124
SFP STM1-e MODULE 252 912 870
SFP DDM S-4.1 MODULE 252 709 950
SFP DDM L-4.1 MODULE 252 709 905
SFP DDM L-4.2 MODULE 252 709 918
SFP DDM S-16.1 MODULE 252 709 926
SFP DDM L-16.1 MODULE 252 709 968
SFP DDM L-16.2 MODULE 252 586 373
SFP DDM L-1/4/16.2++ MODULE 252 718 392
SFP DDM SX MODULE 252 791 015
SFP DDM LX MODULE 252 791 002
SFP DDM ZX MODULE 252 791 023
SFP 1000 BASE_T MODULE 253 006 650

Table 3-4 : List of rohs optical modules of ADR2500 eXtra

3.3 - LIST OF AVAILABLE CABLES

Card Name Length Code


LTU 21E75 E1 INPUT or E1 OUTPUT
75 ohms SUB D44 St 21x2 Mbit/s In 2,5 m 253 177 623
or Out 12 m 253 177 636
( cable)
LTU 21E120 E1 INPUT or E1 OUTPUT
63E1FA
120 ohms SUB D44 St 21x2 Mbit/s 2,5 m 253 177 644
In or Out 12 m 253 177 657
( cable)

Table 3-5 : List of available cables

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 3-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

Card Name Length Code


LTU3E3DS3 TR or REC 1x155 Mbit/s 75 ohms
3E3DS3FA 1.0/2.3 2,5 m 55 670 592
( cable) 12 m 55 670 594
TR or REC 3x155 Mbit/s 75 ohms
1.0/2.3 2,5 m 55 670 602
( cable) 12 m 55 670 604
CCU-2G SYNC SYNCHRO 120 2,5 m 251 008 309
( cable) 12 m 251 008 320
25 m 251 008 333
SYNC SYNCHRO 75 30 cm 251 118 155
(adapter)
(whole cable - one T3 input / one T4
output)
LOOPS (GTR + TS) 2,5 m 06 013 628
( cable) 5m 06 013 261
12 m 06 013 161
25 m 06 013 262
POWER
Toward PAPA (whole cable) 3m 251 361 272
Free ( cable) 3m 251 361 285
CTRL-2G COMM COM VT100 1,8 m 4 980 214
ETH Ethernet
Direct connection to a HUB 3m 55 670 422
Cross over connection to a PC 3m 55 670 610
AUX V11 access to ARDAX/EOW300 3m 55 670 253
Cable supplied with VDS equipment
4ERE TR or REC
4x155 Mbit/s 1.0/2.3 75 ohms 2,5 m 55 670 602
( cable) 12 m 55 670 604
GFP150 ETH Ethernet
eXtra
Straight-through cable 3m 55 670 422
Cross-over cable 3m 55 670 610
Optical 10dB 1,3/1,5m SC/PC
cards Optical attenuator 187 835 698
10dB 1,3/1,5m LC/PC 189 677 276
Optical attenuator

Table 3-6 : List of available cables

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 3-5
SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

Card Name Length Code


TR or REC 2,5 m 251 035 997
3,4 m 251 036 001
Optical jumper SC-PC/FC-PC
4,6 m 251 036 019
5,8 m 251 036 022
7m 251 036 030
8,2 m 251 036 043
9,4 m 251 036 051
12 m 251 036 064
15 m 251 036 072
20 m 251 036 085
TR or REC 2,5 m 251 091 700
5,8 m 251 091 656
Optical jumpers SC-PC/FC-PC
12 m 251 091 669
with 10 dB attenuator
20 m 251 091 648
TR or REC 1,5 m 251 035 872
2,5 m 251 035 880
Optical jumper SC-PC/SC-PC
3,4 m 251 035 893
4,6 m 251 036 209
5,8 m 251 036 212
7m 251 036 220
8,2 m 251 036 233
9,4 m 251 036 241
12 m 251 036 251
15 m 251 036 262
20 m 251 036 275
TR or REC 2,5 m 251 091 627
5,8 m 251 091 635
Optical jumber SC-PC/SC-PC
12 m 251 091 677
with 10 dB attenuator
20 m 251 091 698
TR or REC 2.5 m 251 559 377
5m 251 559 504
Optical jumper LC-PC/LC-PC
10 m 251 559 517
15 m 251 559 525
20 m 251 559 567
50 m 251 559 570
TR or REC 2.5 m 251 454 262
5m 251 454 283
Optical jumper LC-PC/SC-PC
10 m 251 454 296
15 m 251 454 402
20 m 251 454 410
50 m 251 454 423
TR or REC 2,5 m 251 157 433
4,6 m 251 157 446
Multimode optical jumber
7,0 m 251 157 454
SC-PC/SC-PC
Electrical TR or REC
SFP Modules 1x155 Mbit/s 1.0/2.3 75 ohms 2,5 m 55 670 592
( cable) 12 m 55 670 594
Giga Ethernet RJ45 straight cable Standard cables
Category 5e

Table 3-7 : List of available cables

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 3-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT

Cards access points (see 1.4)

Mechanical characteristics
Height 14U (623 mm)
Width 19" or ETSI (446 mm)
Depth 238 mm
Weight 10.3 kg empty + 2.6 kg (two brackets) ; 26 kg for
maximum configuration
Protection Index (PI) Corresponds to PI of used rack
SFP optical or electrical modules Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver MultiSource
Agreement 14 Sept 2000
Consumption See Table 4-3

Environment characteristics
Mechanical ETS 300 019
Climatic condition ETS 300 019
Operating temperature - 5C to + 45C
Extended operating temperature -10 C to + 55C (MTBF [Mean Time Between
Failure] slightly downgraded)
Transport and storage temperature - 40C to + 70C
Relative humidity < 85%
Electrical NF EN 300 386 (April 2000)
Interference voltage (radioelectric NF EN 55022
frequency emissions)
Safety NF EN 60950-1 (Avril 2002) - EN 60825
Power ETS 300 132-2 (equipment is SELV)
Table 4-1 : Technical characteristics of ADR2500 eXtra

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 4-1
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT

Predicted reliability (1)


FDP 3.46 10-6
FAN-2G 5.65 10-6
LTU21E120 0.25 10-6
LTU21E75 0.25 10-6
LTU3E3DS3 0.14 10-6
PSU-2G 2.58 10-6
PSU-160 1.44 10-6
CCU-2G 0.41 10-6
CTRL-2G 0.65 10-6
AUX 0.11 10-6
SWITCH HO/LO 2.10 10-6
SW32HOLO 1.71 10-6
63E1 0.58 10-6
63E1FA 0.90 10-6
3E3DS3 0.52 10-6
3E3DS3FA 0.57 10-6
4xS1.1, 4xL1.1, 4xL1.2, 4xMM1 3.67 10-6
4ERE 0.30 10-6
4xSTM1-SFP (without optical module) 0.24 10-6
SFP S1.1 Module (2) 0.08 10-6
SFP L1.1 Module (2) 0.11 10-6
SFP L1.2 Module (2) 0.12 10-6
SFP S1.1 Bidi / S1.2 Bidi Modules (2) 0.13 10-6
SFP L1.1 Bidi / L1.2 Bidi Modules (2) 0.13 10-6
SFP STM1-e Module (2) 0.20 10-6
S4.1, L4.1, L4.2 1.08 10-6
STM4-SFP (without optical module) 0.18 10-6
SFP S4.1 Module (2) 0.08 10-6
SFP L4.1 Module (2) 0.23 10-6
SFP L4.2 Module (2) 0.23 10-6
L16.1, L16.2 0.99 10-6
L16.2+, U16.2 0.93 10-6
STM16-SFP (without optical module) 0.41 10-6
SFP S16.1 Module 0.81 10-6
SFP L16.1 Module 0.95 10-6
SFP L16.2 Module 0.95 10-6
SFP L1/4/16.2++ Module 0.67 10-6
GIG-E SX, GIG-E LX, GIG-E ZX 2.72 10-6
GFP150 eXtra 1.08 10-6
1GE-DM-ZX 1.15 10-6
2GE-DM-ZX 1.25 10-6
2GE-DM-SFP/2G (without optical module) 1.08 10-6
GFP2500-2GE (without optical module) 2.17 10-6
SFP SX Module (2) 0.04 10-6
SFP LX Module (2) 0.05 10-6
SFP ZX Module (2) 0.36 10-6
SFP1000BaseT Module (2) 0.18 10-6
Table 4-2 : Technical characteristics of ADR2500 eXtra

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 4-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

(1) The predicted reliability computations have been realized according to the UTE C 80-
810 RDF 2000 standard under ambient temperature conditions of 25C (with ventilation
conditions ensuring an average internal temperature in the rack not exceeding 40C)
and precise conditions relative to the environment (on ground, fixed and protected),
qualification and age of the components. Any changes to these hypotheses will provide
different results.
(2) Predicted reliability calculated for a case temperature of 40C

EQUIPMENT

Power consumption (3) per sub-assembly (measured on 48V power supply)


PSU-160 0.08 W
LTU21E120 2.97 W
LTU21E75 2.97 W
LTU3E3DS3 2.72 W
FAN-2G 11.52 W
CCU-2G 0.97 W
CTRL-2G 4.95 W
AUX 1.07 W
SWITCH HO/LO 29.29 W
SW32HOLO 20.21 W
63E1 6.52 W
63E1FA 10.73 W
3E3DS3 9.74 W
3E3DS3FA 10.93 W
4xS1.1 2.72 W
4xL1.1 2.72 W
4xL1.2 2.72 W
4ERE 4.04 W
4xMM1 5.1 W
4xSTM1-SFP (equipped with four 2.97 W
optical modules)
S4.1 3.7 W
L4.1 3.7 W
L4.2 3.7 W
STM4-SFP (equipped with one 2.56 W
optical module)
L16.1 7.71 W
L16.2 9.41 W
L16.2+, 8.57 W (4)
U16.2 8.57 W (4)
STM16-SFP (equipped with one 6.25 W (4)
optical module)
GIG-E SX, LX, ZX 19.53 W
1GE-DM-ZX 11.39 W
2GE-DM-ZX 13.08 W
2GE-DM-SFP/2G (equipped with 13.16 W
two optical modules)
GFP150 eXtra 12.69 W
GFP2500-2GE (equipped with one 26.24 W
optical module)
Table 4-3 : Technical characteristics of ADR2500 eXtra

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 4-3
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

(3) These power consumption data are typical values and can be used to evaluate the
dissipation. 20% should be added when estimating the peak values governing sizing of the
power supply devices. This provides for transient variations in consumption and variations in
efficiency of the converter as a function of the total power.
Caution : an additional 10% should be added if a 72V power supply is used.

(4) This consumption can reach the max value of 12,5 W at laser power up, during its
operation temperature acquisition (for less than 5 seconds).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 4-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

5 DEGRADED MODE

5.1 - DEFINITION

The degraded mode is an operation mode in which the CTRL-2G card software can switch when
starting, after a CTRL-2G card replacement (maintenance) or a shelf power supply cut.

The software switches in this mode on at least one of following cases :

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes of the GIG-E pack or
between the CTRL software and the GIG-E software code in CTRL Flash (missing or
incompatible code in Flash)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes of the GFP150 eXtra pack
or between the CTRL software and the GFP150 eXtra software code in CTRL Flash (missing
or incompatible code in Flash)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes of the GFP2500 pack or
between the CTRL software and the GFP2500 software code in CTRL Flash (missing or
incompatible code in Flash)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the current shelf configuration (database in
the CCU-2G card memory)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the shelf current states memory ("shelf hot
data" in the CCU-2G card memory) ; these data persist on CTRL-2G card extraction but on
shelf power supply cut

- FPGA code change between already loaded codes in shelf cards and present codes in
CTRL-2G card Flash

- a GIG-E software code change between already loaded codes in shelf GIG-E cards and
present code in CTRL-2G card Flash

- a GFP150 eXtra software code change between already loaded codes in shelf GFP150
eXtra cards and present code in CTRL-2G card Flash

- a GFP2500 software code change between already loaded codes in shelf GFP2500-2GE
cards and present code in CTRL-2G card Flash

- only one operational PSU associated to a SWITCH HO/LO card (minimum 2 cards are
mandatory)

The CTRL software switches in this mode in order to avoid to :

- loss the current shelf configuration


- loss the informations of the shelf current states
- switch to a default card
- load again a FPGA code or a GIG-E software code or a GFP150 eXtra code or a GFP2500
software code.

and so, to avoid a temporarily or definitely transmission cutting

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-1
DEGRADED MODE

These cases correlate, either to CTRL-2G card replacement by a card with not updated Flash
software or to momentary shelf power supply cut when the software or the FPGA codes in CTRL
Flash are not all updated.

To go out of this degraded mode :


- in case of software incompatibility, the operator must locally act on the equipment by
updating the software codes or the FPGA codes in CTRL-2G card memory Flash or by
forcing the software start-up,
- in case of only one operational PSU associated to a SWITCH HO/LO card, insert a second
one or change the failed card. Software automatically reset until 2 PSU cards are in service.

5.2 - CHARACTERIZATION

In case of software incompatibility, the switch on this degraded mode is indicated by the four LEDS of
CTRL-2G card which flash (switched on red status + minor alarm LEDS, then switched on green
status + major alarm LEDS).
The state of major and minor alarms output loops is not modified.

At VT100, by pressing "enter" touch, the switch reason is displayed.

In case of only one operational PSU, equipment reset every 20 seconds.

5.3 - POSSIBLE CAUSES

The causes are indicated in the "Definition" paragraph.


Ten cases are managed by the CTRL software ; at each time, a message is displayed on the VT 100
terminal which is connected on the CTRL-2G card COMM interface.

1) - The CTRL software code is not compatible with the FPGA codes of the Shelf, GIG-E, GFP150
eXtra or GFP2500 packs in Flash or some FPGA codes are missing in Flash.

The CTRL software version is not compatible with Fpga codes in Flash
If you start CTRL software, incompatible or missing Fpga codes
will not be loaded and some cards will be declared failed!!!

2) -The software code CTRL is not compatible with the GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra or GFP2500 software
codes or one of these software codes is missing in Flash (only if a GIG-E card or a GFP150 eXtra
card or a GFP2500-2GE card is configured in the shelf).

The CTRL software version is not compatible with Soft. codes in Flash
If you start CTRL software, incompatible or missing Soft. codes
will not be loaded and some cards will be declared failed!!!

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

3) - The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is not compatible with the Shelf Database ;
some parts of Database can be reinitialized, if continue.
This case correlates to an older software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf Database and
which is not compatible with this database
For example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 2 CTRL software is replaced by a level 1

The Shelf Database is not compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G card
If you start CTRL software, part of Database (Configuration) will be lost !!!
and the transmission will be broken up to new configuration

4) -The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is compatible with the Shelf Database provided
some parts of this database are converted.
This case correlates to a more recent software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf
Database and which must convert. some parts of this database
For example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 1 CTRL software is replaced by a level 2
If conversion is accepted by the operator, then if later the previous CTRL-2G card (level 1) is inserted
again, the converted parts of database will be reinitialized (case 3).

The Shelf Database is compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G card
But will be convert to a new format ; if you continue and convert the database
you will not insert the previous CTRL-2G card without breaking part of database !!!

5) -The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is not compatible with the Shelf Hot Data ; some
parts of Hot Data can be reinitialized, if continue.
This case correlates to an older software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf Hot Data and
which is not compatible with this Hot Data.
For example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 2 CTRL software is replaced by a level 1

The Shelf Hot Data is not compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G card
If you start CTRL software, part of Hot Data will be lost
and transmission will be broken a few seconds

6) -The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is compatible with the Shelf Hot Data provided
some parts of this Hot Data are converted.
This case correlates to a more recent software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf Hot
Data and which must convert. some parts of this Hot Data
For example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 1 CTRL software is replaced by a level 2
If conversion is accepted by the operator, then if later the previous CTRL-2G card is inserted again
(level 1), the converted parts of Hot Data will be reinitialized (case 5).

The Shelf Hot Data is compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G card
But will be convert to a new format ; if you continue and convert Hot Data
you will not insert the previous CTRL-2G card without breaking transmission !!!

7) -Some FPGA codes,already loaded on cards, must be loaded again because new releases exist in
Flash.
If a FPGA code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loading time and the
commissioning card.

Some of Fpga codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card contains
other Fpga Codes in Flash than those loaded in hardware
If you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-3
DEGRADED MODE

8) The GIG-E code present in flash is different from the GIG-E code in progress.
If the GIG-E code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loading time and
the commissioning card.

The Soft. codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card contains
other Soft. codes in Flash than those loaded in hardware
If you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds

9) The GFP150 eXtra code present in flash is different from the GFP150 eXtra code in progress.
If the GFP150 eXtra code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loading
time and the commissioning card.

The Soft. codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card contains
other Soft. codes in Flash than those loaded in hardware
If you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds

10) The GFP2500 code present in flash is different from the GFP2500 code in progress.
If the GFP2500 code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loading time
and the commissioning card.

The Soft. codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card contains
other Soft. codes in Flash than those loaded in hardware
If you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds

11) Only one operational PSU (in case of a SWITCH HO/LO card inserted in the shelf) :

Two PSU cards are mandatory to supply the Equipment


Insert another PSU card
Software automatically reset until two PSU cards are in service

5.4 - OPERATOR ACTIONS

The possible operator actions are of 3 kinds :

CTRL-2G card extraction

Extract the CTRL-2G card and update the Shelf, GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra and GFP2500 packs on a
non-operational shelf.

VT100 operation
Connect a VT100 Terminal or an emulation VT100 PC on the CTRL-2G card, type "enter" in order to

- display the cause, the software release of the previous CTRL-2G in case of card change, the
releases of the Shelf, GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra and GFP2500 packs in Flash
- have access to the commands menu

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

The commands menu is as following :

1 - Switch GIG-E pack


2 - Switch and Reset GIG-E pack
3 - Switch GFP150 eXtra pack
4 - Switch and Reset GFP150 eXtra pack
5 - Switch GFP2500 pack
6 - Switch and Reset GFP2500 pack
7 - Switch and Reset Shelf pack
8 - Start CTRL Code

1) - Switch GIG-E Pack

The software swaps the GIG-E packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then displays again
the codes in flash then displays again the commands menu.

2) - Switch and Reset GIG-E Pack

The software swaps the GIG-E packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then start again the
CTRL software.

3) - Switch GFP150 eXtra Pack

The software swaps the GFP150 eXtra packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then displays
again the codes in flash then displays again the commands menu.

4) - Switch and Reset GFP150 eXtra Pack

The software swaps the GFP150 eXtra packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then start
again the CTRL software.

5) - Switch GFP2500 Pack

The software swaps the GFP2500 packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then displays again
the codes in flash then displays again the commands menu.

6) - Switch and Reset GFP2500 Pack

The software swaps the GFP2500 packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then start again the
CTRL software.

7) - Switch and Reset Shelf Pack

The software swaps the Shelf packs (CTRL software code, FPGA codes of Equipment
cards,) in Flash (selected and reserve) then start again the CTRL software

8) - Start CTRL Code

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-5
DEGRADED MODE

Before hitting (8),.it is recommended to upgrade the Shelf, GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra and
GFP2500 packs by using a "cross-over Ethernet" cable (between PC and CTRL-2G
card) and the default IP address "135.10.114.11"

If the operator ignores the recommendations and ask the shelf operation starting, the
transmission risks to be disrupted.

Warning : when the software goes out of the degraded mode after theStart CTRL Code, it
causes a CTRL software reset in order to be able to restart the Ethernet interface with the
configured IP address (the default IP address in degraded mode is 135.10.114.11)

GUI operation

A reduced operation GUI can be started in local via the Ethernet interface.
The equipment IP address via the Ethernet interface is the default address 135.10.114.11.

A download window allows the download of the software codes that are not updated.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

A switching window of software packs allows to select the current packs and to restart the CTRL
software.

The VT100 operation is always possible in parallel with the GUI operation

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-7
DEGRADED MODE

5.5 - DEGRADED MODE SWITCH WARNING

On codes upgrade or downgrade from GUI or from SNMP, the degraded mode is never used.

Nevertheless, we can have incompatibilities between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes or the
software codes of transmission cards.

In this case and if a momentary power supply cut appends, the CTRL-2G card software would fatally
switch in degraded mode, that can have unfortunate consequences as an intervention on the site.

In order to prevent these problems, a board defective alarm is positioned on the CTRL-2G card.as
soon as a risk exists.

An associated information to this alarm stipulates the cause which can be :

Fpga Codes Missing or Not Compatible

Unless one FPGA code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible

Soft. Codes Missing or Not Compatible

The GIG-E code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible (only if a GIG-E card is
configured in the shelf).
The GFP150 eXtra code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible (only if a GFP150
eXtra card is configured in the shelf).
The GFP2500 code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible (only if a GFP2500-2GE
card is configured in the shelf).

This alarm is updated on the download and switch of Shelf, GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra or GFP2500 packs.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

5.6 - ACTIONS TO REALIZE ACCORDING TO CASES

Manual Action VT100 GUI


1) Incompatibility between the FPGA codes of the Shelf, - Replace the CTRL-2G card - Start (Alarm "ON" on the - Download of Shelf pack then
GIG-E, GFP150 eXtra or GFP2500 packs and the CTRL CTRL-2G card) Switch and Reset of Shelf
software, or FPGA codes missing - Update the CTRL-2G card pack
on another shelf then reinsert - Switch and Reset of Shelf - Download of GIG-E pack
Make them compatible by changing the Shelf pack or the it. pack (return to the previous then Switch and Reset of
GIG-E pack or the GFP150 eXtra pack or the GFP2500 version) GIG-E pack
pack - Download of GFP150 eXtra
pack then Switch and Reset
In case of start-up : of GFP150 eXtra pack
The cards whose the FPGA codes are incompatible or - Download of GFP2500 pack
missing and which already are in service, stay in service, then Switch and Reset of
The cards whose the FPGA codes are incompatible or GFP2500 pack
missing and which must switch in service, pass in - Switch and Reset of Shelf
defective state, pack (return to the previous
An alarm stay "ON" on the CTRL-2G. card FPGA Codes version)
Missing or not compatible - Switch and Reset of GIG-E
pack (return to the previous
version)
- Switch and Reset of
GFP150 eXtra pack (return to
the previous version)
- Switch and Reset of
GFP2500 pack (return to the
previous version)

Table 5-1 : Actions to realize according to cases

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-9
DEGRADED MODE

Manual Action VT100 GUI


2) Incompatibility between the GIG-E software code or the - Start (Alarm "ON" on the - Download of Shelf pack then
GFP150 eXtra software code or the GFP2500 software CTRL-2G card) Switch and Reset of Shelf
code and the CTRL software, or GIG-E software code pack
missing or GFP150 eXtra software code missing or - Switch and Reset of Shelf - Download of GIG-E pack
GFP2500 software code missing pack (return to the previous then Switch and Reset of
version) GIG-E pack
Make them compatible by changing the Shelf pack or the - Download of GFP150 eXtra
GIG-E pack or the GFP150 eXtra pack or the GFP2500 - Switch and Reset of GIG-E pack then Switch and Reset
pack pack (return to the previous of GFP150 eXtra pack
version) - Download of GFP2500 pack
In case of start-up : then Switch and Reset of
The GIG-E cards or the GFP150 eXtra cards or the - Switch and Reset of GFP2500 pack
GFP2500-2GE cards whose the software code is GFP150 eXtra pack (return to - Switch and Reset of Shelf
incompatible or missing and which already are in service, the previous version) pack (return to the previous
stay in service, version)
The GIG-E cards or the GFP150 eXtra cards or the - Switch and Reset of - Switch and Reset of GIG-E
GFP2500-2GE cards whose the software code is GFP2500 pack (return to the pack (return to the previous
incompatible or missing and which must switch in service, previous version) version)
pass in defective state, - Switch and Reset of
An alarm stay "ON" on the CTRL-2G. card Soft Codes GFP150 eXtra pack (return to
Missing or not compatible the previous version)
- Switch and Reset of
GFP2500 pack (return to the
previous version)

Table 5-2 : Actions to realize according to cases

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-10 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

Manual Action VT100 GUI


3) The database is incompatible with the CTRL software and - Replace the CTRL-2G card - Start (the incompatible parts - Download of Shelf pack then
will be partly reinitialized of database are reinitialized Switch and Reset of Shelf
> case of downgrade (switching to a CTRL software release - Update the CTRL-2G card by default) pack
previous to the one that generated the database) of CTRL on another shelf then reinsert
software incompatible with the current database it. - Switch and Reset of Shelf - Switch and Reset of Shelf
pack (return to the previous pack (return to the previous
Start at VT100 ; the database is partly reinitialized version) version)

Otherwise, return to the previous CTRL software code


(Switch and Reset of Shelf pack)

4) The database is incompatible with the CTRL software and - Start (the incompatible parts
will be converted of database are converted
> case of upgrade (switching to a CTRL software release
posterior to the one that generated the database) of CTRL - Switch and Reset of Shelf
software incompatible with the current database pack (return to the previous
version)
Start at VT100 ; the transmission will not be perturbed and
the database will be converted
This message prevents that, after effected conversions,
previous CTRL card insertion will cause a reinitialization
of some parts of database (case 3).

Otherwise, return to the previous CTRL software code


(Switch and Reset of Shelf pack)

Table 5-3 : Actions to realize according to cases

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-11
DEGRADED MODE

Manual Action VT100 GUI


5) The Hot Data are incompatible with the CTRL software and - Replace the CTRL-2G. card - Start (the incompatible parts - Download of Shelf pack then
will be partly reinitialized of Hot Data are reinitialized by Switch and Reset of Shelf
> case of downgrade (switching to a CTRL software release - Update the CTRL-2G card default) pack
previous to the one that generated the Hot Data) of CTRL on another shelf then reinsert
software incompatible with the current Hot Data it. - Switch and Reset of Shelf - Switch and Reset of Shelf
pack (return to the previous pack (return to the previous
Start at VT100 ; the Hot Data is partly reinitialized version) version)

Otherwise, return to the previous CTRL software code


(Switch and Reset of Shelf pack)

6) The Hot Data are incompatible with the CTRL software and - Start (the incompatible parts
will be converted of Hot Data are converted)
> case of upgrade (switching to a CTRL software release
posterior to the one that generated the Hot Data) of CTRL - Switch and Reset of Shelf
software incompatible with the current Hot Data pack (return to the previous
version)
Start at VT100 , the transmission will not be perturbed and
the Hot Data will be converted
This message prevents that a return to the previous
software will cause a loss of Hot Data part and will be able
to cause a temporarily transmission breaking (case 5).

Otherwise, return to the previous CTRL software code


(Switch and Reset of Shelf pack)

Table 5-4 : Actions to realize according to cases

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-12 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
DEGRADED MODE

Manual Action VT100 GUI


7), 8), 9) and 10) Some FPGA or GIG-E or GFP150 eXtra or - Replace the CTRL-2G card - Start (the FPGA or the - Download of Shelf pack then
GFP2500 codes will be loaded, that can perturb the software code of some cards Switch and Reset of Shelf
transmission. - Update the CTRL-2G card will be loaded) pack
on another shelf then reinsert - Download of GIG-E pack
Start at VT100 it. - Switch and Reset of Shelf then Switch and Reset of
pack GIG-E pack
Otherwise, switch again to the previous Shelf pack or to - Download of GFP150 eXtra
the previous GIG-E pack or to the GFP150 eXtra pack or - Switch and Reset of GIG-E pack then Switch and Reset
to the GFP2500 pack pack of GFP150 eXtra pack
- Download of GFP2500 pack
- Switch and Reset of then Switch and Reset of
GFP150 eXtra pack GFP2500 pack
- Switch and Reset of Shelf
- Switch and Reset of pack (return to the previous
GFP2500 pack version)
- Switch and Reset of GIG-E
pack (return to the previous
version)
- Switch and Reset of
GFP150 eXtra pack (return to
the previous version)
- Switch and Reset of
GFP2500 pack (return to the
previous version)
11) The shelf does not contain 2 operational PSU - If only one PSU card is
(in case of a SWITCH HO/LO card inserted in the shelf) present in the shelf, insert a
second one.
- If 2 PSU cards are inserted
in the shelf, replace the failed
card.
Whatever is the case, wait for
the next automatic reset (all
20s)
Table 5-5 : Actions to realize according to cases

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 5-13
DEGRADED MODE

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 5-14 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6 GFP150 EXTRA CARD

All the services mentioned in this document can be performed between the GFP150 eXtra cards from ADR2500
eXtra but also between these cards and the DATA cards from ADR range, with equivalent services and
granularities.

Each ADR2500 eXtra can include up to six GFP150 eXtra cards which must take place in "TRIB 1" or "TRIB 2"
or "TRIB 5" to "TRIB 8" slots, in the left part of the slot.

6.1 - GFP150 EXTRA CARD AND SERVICES PRESENTATION

This chapter has for objective to guide the user for the commissioning of the GFP150 eXtra card in the
ADR2500 eXtra. It gives simple examples which should be easily adapted to the needs.

Services provided by GFP150 eXtra card in ADR2500 eXtra are :

SMART LL EPLine Service (from P2.1 release)

The EPLine service (Ethernet Private Line) allows the point to point interconnection of Ethernet
10BaseT/100BaseTX flows through a SDH network by using, for each connection, a VCG (VC-Group)
based on virtual concatenation (VCAT). It is possible to obtain up to 8 independent point to point
connections per GFP150 eXtra card. Rate granularity for each VCG is based either on VC12, or on VC3.
With each VCG, it is possible to concatenate from 1 to 46 VC12 or from 1 to 2 VC3. The sum of the
concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 8 ETH ports, cannot be above the STM1 payload (about
150Mbit/s).

SHARING EVPLine Service (from P2.2 release)

The EVPLine service (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) allows the point to point interconnection of several
Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX flows through a SDH network by using over shared VCG (VC-Group) based
on virtual concatenation (VCAT). These flows are separated by Tag VMAN, that adds a level of VLAN in
relation to the possible VLANs of Customers. It is possible to put until 16 shared traffic (VMAN) on a VCG.
In the GFP150 eXtra card we can have 64 (63 if the MSTP protection is used) different VMAN maximum.
The rate granularity for each VCG is the same as EPLine.

SMART LL EPLAN Service (from P2.1 release)

The EPLAN service (Ethernet Private LAN) allows the multipoint to multipoint interconnection of Ethernet
10BaseT/100BaseTX flows through a SDH network by using, for each connection between two points of the
network, a VCG (VC-Group) based on virtual concatenation (VCAT). It is possible to obtain up to 8
independent connections per GFP150 eXtra card. Rate granularity for each VCG is based either on VC12
or on VC3. With each VCG, it is possible to concatenate from 1 to 46 VC12 or from 1 to 2 VC3. The sum of
the concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 8 ETH ports, cannot be above the STM1 payload
(about 150Mbit/s). In this case, each GFP150 eXtra card includes a Switch function allowing Ethernet
10BaseT/100BaseTX multipoint to multipoint interconnection.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-1
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

SHARING EVPLAN Service (from P2.2 release)

The EVPLAN service (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN) allows the multipoint to multipoint interconnection of
several Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX flows through a SDH network by using over shared VCG (VC-Group)
based on virtual concatenation (VCAT).
It is possible to configure 4 VMANs by TC1 class of traffic and 12 VMANs by TC0 class of traffic
(2 classes of traffic are available on the GFP150 eXtra card).It is therefore possible to put until 16 shared
traffic (VMAN) on a VCG. In the GFP150 eXtra card we can have 64 (63 if the MSTP protection is used)
different VMAN maximum.
In this case, each GFP150 eXtra card includes a Switch function allowing Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX
multipoint to multipoint interconnection

These services allow to answer, for example, to the following needs :

point to point application: to build an Ethernet LAN between 2 remote sites

multilink application (Star) : LAN interconnection between a central site and remote sites

multipoint to multipoint application : to share a LAN between several sites in a BUS topology

Ethernet frames are transported on SDH by using the GFP-F protocol.

The use of the GFP protocol and the advanced Switch features allows to offer Quality of Services features
(QoS). The QoS in GFP150 eXtra card is based on a traffic differentiation : metering, congestion control and
scheduling.

Hardware design

Micro
MicroProcessor
Processor

To switch
8
fabric GFP
GFPMapper
Mapper Switch
Switch E/FE TX
155 Mb/s

Figure 6-1: Hardware design of the card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2 - CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATIONS OF GFP150 EXTRA CARDS

6.2.1 - GFP150 eXtra card setup


a) Unwrap the card
b) Insert and screw the card in an allowed slot of the ADR2500 eXtra shelf.
c) Verify that the GFP150 eXtra pack is present in the system (Upload/Download > Switching menu).
d) Select GFP150 eXtra as expected card on the slot where it was inserted
e) Connect the Ethernet cable(s) to the GFP150 eXtra card
f) Wait a few seconds and check that the green LED status is steadily on.

6.2.2 - Create a LAN interconnection

6.2.2.1 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EPLine service

In the diagram below, one intends to deport a full duplex LAN Ethernet 100BaseTX between 2 sites equipped of
ADR2500 extra. In a first time, one supposes that the rate of the Ethernet traffic exchanged between the 2 sites
does not exceed 10Mbps. The QoS configuration is explained later in this document in greater details.

ADR2500 eXtra ADR2500 eXtra


Eth/VC12
SDH

Ethernet 10/100M Ethernet 10/100M

Figure 6-2 : EPLine service

6.2.2.1.1 - GFP150 eXtra cards configuration


Login on the first ADR2500 eXtra to open the Shelfview GUI screen. On this screen, click on the GFP150
eXtra card then on the ETH link.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-3
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Configuring the Ethernet interface


Click on the Interface Settings link. By default the Ethernet interface is forced in 100BaseTX full duplex. We
choose to keep the default configuration for this example.

Figure 6-3 : Configuring the Ethernet interface

Note : The Ethernet interface of the remote equipment (switch, IP router, PC, ) connected to the GFP150
eXtra card must mandatory be configured the same way. Due to possible interoperability issues with
Auto-Negotiation between equipment from different origins, this feature (Automatic option) should
preferably not be used.

This screen is also used to set the alarms severity associated to the interface defects.

Logical Interface

Select the UNI mode (User to Network Interface) : this type of interface corresponds to an interface customer
with one service per port. On these interfaces the provider OAM and BPDU MSTP management frames are
filtered : they are not sent to the customer network.

The NNI untagged choice (Network to Network Interface) corresponds to a provider interface without provider
VMAN tag (no VLAN sharing).

The NNI tagged choice (Network to Network Interface) corresponds to a provider interface on which a
provider VMAN tag is inserted in the out coming frames and a provider VMAN tag is treated in the incoming
frames.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Link Down Retransmit

The Link Down Retransmit function can only be used in point to point mode on a VMAN constituted of one ETH
port and one VCG port in each equipment.

Tick "Enable" allows to report the state of the Ethernet Down or VCG Down link on the remote Ethernet link.

ETH Down Report


3 Locs + VCG Down
Status Down SDH
2
4
GFP 150 VCG VCG GFP 150
"LDR "LDR Forced
1 Cut off
ETH Enable" Enable" ETH

VCG Down Report


2 2
3 VCG Down SDH VCG Down 3
GFP 150 VCG VCG GFP 150
Forced Forced
"LDR "LDR
Cut off ETH 1 ETH Cut off
Enable" Enable"

Pause Mode

The Pause function (IEEE 802.3 Flow control) can only be used in point to point mode/full duplex on a VMAN
constituted of one UNI ETH port and one NNI untagged VCG port (or of two UNI and NNI untagged ETH ports).

If the "Status" field = Pause (result of auto negotiation or forcing)

- At reception of a pause frame on the ETH port, the transmission of Ethernet frames on the ETH port is
suspended temporarily

- On detection of traffic obstruction on the VMAN considered in the direction ETH = > VCG, a pause
frame is transmitted on the ETH port to ask the remote equipment to stop the transmission of Ethernet
frame temporarily.

Warning : When the Pause mode is activated, be careful to configure the CIR and PIR to the maximum of the
capacity of the VCG

Configuring a VCG

Click on the VCG link, then on the List link. For the selected VCG#1 interface, click on VC#1 and then on the
Multiple Add Member link. In the new screen coming up, select VC12 as type and VC#6 as last connection.
Click on Apply in order to create the virtually concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6) that will be
used to transport Ethernet traffic.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-5
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Figure 6-4 : Configuring the VCG (1)

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration: Admin Status at Up,
"Logical Interface NNI" at "untagged", LCAS at Yes and FCS at No. We choose to keep the default
options for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC12) and the number of constituting
VC members (6).

Figure 6-5 : Configuring the VCG (2)

Logical Interface NNI (Network to Network Interface) : untagged or tagged

- untagged : corresponds to a provider interface without provider VMAN tag (no VLAN sharing).
- tagged : corresponds to a provider interface on which a provider VMAN tag is inserted in the outcoming
frames and a provider VMAN tag is treated in the incoming frames.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1 . Tick option "Monitor " and click on "APPLY " in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 6-9).

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the Switch link, then on the VMAN Create link. Enter 2 as new VMAN ID and click on Apply in
order to add it. A new screen comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the Add Port link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, enter 10Mbps
for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority) (for more information on the notion of
priority, see the 6.2.4 - on the QoS). The CBS and EBS values are left to default. Then click on Add to
complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, and
enter 10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values
are left to default value. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Figure 6-6 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1)

The association of these 2 ports to the same and unique VMAN ID isolates the Ethernet Switching between
these 2 ports from the rest of the ports (all the other Ethernet and VCG interfaces). Ethernet traffic forwarded
between these 2 ports cannot leak out on other ports and vice versa.

Note : In order to install a point-to-point connection (EPLine service), there should never be more than 2 ports
(1 customer UNI Ethernet port and 1 untagged NNI Ethernet or VCG port) in the same VMAN on the
GFP150 eXtra card.
Tick the "EPLine" case allows to obtain a better throughput.

To double check the configuration click on the VMAN List link. A table displays what ports are associated with
each VMAN configured on the GFP150 eXtra card.

Figure 6-7 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-7
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Configuring the SDH cross-connects


Click on the Connection tab of the shelf view and configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the
GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote GFP150 eXtra card.

Figure 6-8 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects

Configuring the remote GFP150 eXtra card


Just do the configuration on the second ADR2500 eXtra following the exact same steps again.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connection


Once both ADR2500 eXtra systems are configured, the ports used by the Point-to-Point link can be activated on
each ADR2500 eXtra.

Click on the ETH link, then on the Interface Settings link. For interface ETH#1 , tick ifAdminStatus up and
click on Apply.

6.2.2.1.2 - Connectivity check

Perform the following verifications with both GFP150 eXtra cards:


1. Click on the "ETH" link, check that the Ethernet ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would be
marked yellow or red depending on alarm severity) ; then click on the "VCG" and "Alarms" links, check that
the VCG ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would be marked yellow or red depending on alarm
severity). Otherwise click on the alarmed port to go to the proper screen, where the specific alarm is
displayed (this brings you directly to step 2, 3 or 4 below). Repeat the operation for every alarmed port.
2. Click on the ETH link and select Ethernet interface ETH#1. Verify that the interface is running in
100BaseTX full duplex and that there is no alarm (the Fault option of the Interface Defect alarm is
unchecked). Otherwise double-check both the cables and the configuration of the connected Ethernet
interface.
3. Verify that there are no alarms on all the VC's being used. Otherwise double-check end-to-end SDH
configuration as well as the signal quality over the various links.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

4. Click on the VCG link then on the Alarms link, and select the VCG#1 interface. Once configuration is
complete all alarms should disappear after a few seconds. Otherwise double-check the configuration in the
VCG functional block on both ends as well as the configuration of the SDH cross-connects.

Figure 6-9 : Connectivity check

Note : This screen can be used to configure the severity of the alarms related to concatenated VCs.

5. Click on the Settings link and verify that the VCG#1 is Up.
6. Try sending bi-directional Ethernet traffic across the end-to-end connection. You could for example:
Run a ping or a file transfer between 2 PCs to control Ethernet connectivity.
Use an Ethernet traffic generator in order to further qualify the end-to-end connection.

As a final step, double-check compliance of the GFP150 eXtra counters on both ends based on the traffic
being forwarded. Namely the following counters:
- Ethernet counters: click on the ETH link and then on the MIB2 Counters link
- GFP counters: click on the VCG link and then on the MIB2/GFP Counters link
- SLA compliance counters: click on the Switch link. Select VMAN ID 2, click on the VMAN SLA
counters link. Verify the set of counters for interfaces ETH#1 and VCG#1. These counters are
described later in this document in greater details.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-9
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.2.2 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EVPLine service (sharing)

In the diagram below, one intends to deport two full duplex LAN Ethernet 100BaseTX between 2 sites equipped
of ADR2500 extra by sharing the same VCG for the two traffics (sharing), this in order to optimize the SDH
bandwidth.

One supposes that the Ethernet traffic rate exchanged between the 2 sites does not exceed 10Mbps for each
flow.

1 VCG

ADR2500 eXtra
ADR2500 eXtra
Eth/VC12
SDH

Ethernet 10/100M Ethernet 10/100M

Figure 6-10 : Service EVPLine

6.2.2.2.1 - GFP150 eXtra cards configuration

Configuration of the Ethernet interface

Click on the "ETH" link then on the Interface Settings link. By default the Ethernet interface is forced in
100BaseTX full duplex. Apply the same configuration for all Ethernet ports.

Configuring a VCG

By proceeding in the same way as to the 6.2.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface, create a virtually concatenated
group of 12 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#12) that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic.

Click on the Settings link to configure VCG#1 as following : Admin Status at Up, "Logical Interface NNI" at
"tagged", LCAS at Yes and FCS at No. These options correspond to the needed example for the sharing,
on the VCG1 the frames must be tagged.The screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC12) and the number of
constituting VC members (12).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select the interface VCG#1 . Tick "Monitor" option and click on "APPLY" in order to
start monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 6-9).

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

For the first ETH port (ETH1):


Click on the Switch link, then on the VMAN Create link. Enter 2 as new VMAN ID and click on Apply in
order to add it. A new window comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the Add Port link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, enter 10Mbps
for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority) (for more information on the notion of
priority, see the 6.2.4 - on the QoS). The CBS and EBS values are left to default values. Then click on Add
to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-10 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, enter
10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority ". The CBS and EBS values are left to default values.
Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Then for the other Eth port (ETH2):


Click on the Switch link, then on the VMAN Create link. Enter 3 as new VMAN ID and click on Apply in
order to add it. A new window comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the Add Port link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#2, the trTCM policing algorithm, enter 10Mbps
for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority ". The CBS and EBS values are left to default values. Then
click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 3

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, enter
10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority ". The CBS and EBS values are left to default values.
Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 3.

The association of these 2 ports to the same and unique VMAN ID isolates the Ethernet Switching between
these 2 ports from the rest of the ports (all the other Ethernet and VCG interfaces). Ethernet traffic forwarded
between these 2 ports cannot leak out on other ports and vice versa.
With the selection of tagged mode for the VCG1, it is possible to differentiate traffics of the two Eth links on the
VCG.

Note : In order to install a point-to-point connection (EVPLine service), there should never be more than 2
ports (1 customer UNI Ethernet port and 1 tagged NNI Ethernet or VCG port) in the same VMAN on the
GFP150 eXtra card.

To check the configuration click on the VMAN List link. A table displays the associated ports to each
configured VMAN on the GFP150 eXtra card.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tab of the shelf view and configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#12 of the
GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote GFP150 eXtra card.

Configuring the remote GFP150 eXtra card

Just do the configuration on the second ADR2500 eXtra by following the exact same steps again.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connection

Once both ADR2500 eXtra systems are configured, the ports used by the point-to-point links can be activated
on each ADR2500 eXtra.

Click on the ETH link, then on the Interface Settings link. For ETH#1 and ETH#2 interfaces, tick
ifAdminStatus up and click on Apply.

6.2.2.2.2 - Connectivity check

Take again the procedure of the paragraph 6.2.2.1.2 - to do controls, by verifying the 2 links.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-11
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.2.3 - Hub and Spoke interconnection: EPLAN service

In the network below, we show interconnection of three remote sites with one central site in a hub and spoke
topology. Although Ethernet interfaces are 100BaseTX full duplex, the load of traffic between the remote sites
and the central site is as follows:
remote sites 1 and 2 : 10Mbps (6VC12),
remote site 3 : 5Mbps (3VC12).

The sum of the data rates going to the central site is 25Mbps. However we consider in this example that the
total rate of traffic going in the opposite direction (a.k.a. from the central site to the remote sites) does not go
over 20Mbps ; this is just for the purpose of the example.

In this example, the central site acts as a full bridge : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between remote sites.

If no traffic must be allowed between remote sites (for security purpose for instance), one should use 3 separate
Ethernet interfaces on the central site, and 1 point to point connection between each remote site and the central
site. In this case configure 3 independent point-to-point connections as described in the previous section.

Remote site 1

Eth / 6xVC12
Central site

SD H

Ethernet 10/100

Eth / 6xVC12 Ethernet 10/100


Eth / 3xVC12

Ethernet 10/100
Remote site 3

Remote site 2 Ethernet 10/100

Figure 6-11 : EPLAN service

6.2.2.3.1 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra card of the central site

Login on the ADR2500 eXtra of the central site to open the Shelfview GUI screen. On this screen, click on the
GFP150 eXtra card then on the ETH link.

Configuring the Ethernet interface

Click on the Interface Settings link. By default the Ethernet interface is forced in 100BaseTX full duplex. We
choose to keep the default configuration for this example.

Note : The Ethernet interface of the remote equipment (switch, IP router, PC, ) connected to the GFP150
eXtra card MUST always be configured the same way. Due to possible interoperability issues with Auto-
Negotiation between equipment from different origins, this feature (Automatic option) should preferably
not be used.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-12 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Configuring the VCGs

By proceeding in the same way as to the 6.2.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface, create the virtually
concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6) that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic.

Select interface VCG#2 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 6 VC12 (VC12#7 to VC12#12) ; if
the request is refused, verify that the VCG#2 is configured to Down in the "VCG > Settings" window.

Select interface VCG#3 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 3 VC12 (VC12#13 to VC12#15).

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1, VCG#2 and VCG#3 are set with default configuration. We
choose to keep the default options for this example. The screen also displays the type of VCG#1,#2,#3 (VC12)
and the number of constituting VC members (6,6,3).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Monitor " and click on "APPLY " in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 6-9). Repeat with VCG#2 and VCG#3.

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the Switch link and then on the VMAN Create link. Enter 2 as new VMAN ID and click on Apply in
order to add it. A new screen comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the Add Port link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, and enter
20Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values are left
to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, and
enter 10Mbps for the CIR, and PIR and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values
are left to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#2, the trTCM policing algorithm, and
enter 10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values
are left to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#3, the trTCM policing algorithm, and
enter 5Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values are
left to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

To double check the configuration click on the VMAN List link. A table displays what ports are associated with
each VMAN configured on the GFP150 eXtra card.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tab. Configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the GFP150 eXtra card as
usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 1.

Configure the connections from VC12#7 to VC12#12 of the GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-
to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 2.

Configure the connections from VC12#13 to VC12#15 of the GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-
to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 3.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-13
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.2.3.2 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra cards of the remote sites

The GFP150 eXtra cards of the remote sites must be configured as if they were in point-to-point mode. Hence,
we apply the configuration described in the point-to-point section of this document ( 6.2.2.1 -). However the
policing rates (10Mbps or 5Mbps) and the right number of VC12 (6 or 3) must be configured appropriately for
each remote site 1, 2 and 3. See the topology figure of this example.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connections

Once both GFP150 eXtra cards at the ends of a connection are configured, the Ethernet interfaces should be
activated.

Click on the ETH link and then on the Interface Settings link. For interface ETH#1 , tick ifAdminStatus up
and click on Apply.

6.2.2.3.3 - Connectivity check

For each GFP150 eXtra card, take again the procedure of the paragraph 6.2.2.1.2 -

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-14 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.2.4 - Bus interconnection : service EPLAN

In the network below, we setup an Ethernet 100BaseTX LAN spanning over 4 sites connected to an ADR2500
eXtra.

In this example, sites 2 and 4 play the role of a full bridge: : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between all
remote sites based on MAC address learning.

Each inter-site link of the bus topology is configured to transport a load of 10Mbps (6 VC12). Similarly, on each
ADR2500 eXtra the Ethernet interface connected to the bus is policed at 10Mbps.

Site n1 Site n3
Eth / 4xVC12
Eth / 4xVC12
SDH

Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100

Site n4
Site n2

Ethernet 10/100
Ethernet 10/100

Figure 6-12 : EPLAN Service - "bus" mode

6.2.2.4.1 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra cards of sites 1 and 3

The GFP150 eXtra cards of sites 1 and 3 must be configured in point-to-point mode following configuration
guidelines of the point-to-point section of this document ( 6.2.2.1 -).

6.2.2.4.2 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra cards of sites 2 and 4

For sites 2 and 4, the configuration of functional blocks VCG, Connection and Ethernet Switch is different from
the two other sites.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-15
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Configuring the VCGs

By proceeding in the same way as to the 6.2.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface, create the virtually
concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6) that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic.

Select interface VCG#2 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 6 VC12 (VC12#7 to VC12#12).

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 and VCG#2 are set with the default configuration. We choose to
keep the default options for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 and VCG#2 (VC12) and
the number of constituting VC members (6).

Click on the "Alarms " link. Select interface VCG#1 . Tick option "Monitor" and click on "APPLY " in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 6-9). Repeat with VCG#2.

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the Switch link and then on the VMAN Create link. Enter 2 as new VMAN ID and click on Apply in
order to add it. A new screen comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the Add Port link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, and enter
10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values are left
to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the trTCM policing algorithm, and
enter 10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values
are left to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the Add Port link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#2, the trTCM policing algorithm, and
enter 10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority" (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values
are left to default. Then click on Add to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

To double check the configuration click on the VMAN List link. A table displays what ports are associated with
each VMAN configured on the GFP150 eXtra card.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tap. Configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the GFP150 eXtra card as
usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between each middle site (2 or 4) and each edge site
(respectively 1 or 3).

Configure the connections from VC12#7 to VC12#12 of the GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-
to-end SDH connectivity between both middle sites (2 and 4).

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connections

Once both GFP150 eXtra cards at the ends of a connection are configured, the ETH interfaces should be
activated.

Click on the ETH link and then on the Interface Settings link. For interface ETH#1 , tick ifAdminStatus up
and click on Apply.

6.2.2.4.3 - Connectivity check

For each GFP150 eXtra card, take again the procedure of the paragraph 6.2.2.1.2 -

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-16 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.2.5 - Bus interconnection : service EVPLAN

In the network below, we setup two Ethernet 100BaseTX LAN spanning over 4 sites connected to an ADR2500
eXtra.

To the difference of the EPLAN service, the two LAN use the same VCG to circulate, it is possible with the
sharing in the same VCG. For this the VCG ports of the N1, N2, N3 and N4 equipment must be configured in
fashion NNI tagged.

In this example, 2 and 4 sites play the role of a full bridge : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between all
remote sites based on MAC address learning.

Each inter-site link of the bus topology is configured to transport a load of 20Mbps (12 VC12). Similarly, on each
ADR2500 eXtra, the Ethernet interface connected to the bus is policed at 10Mbps.

Site n1
Site n3
Eth/12xVC12 Eth/12xVC12

SDH

Ethernet 10/100

Ethernet 10/100

Site n4
Site n2
Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100

Figure 6-13 : EVPLAN Service - "bus" mode

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-17
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.3 - Implementation of the OAM-CC function (Operation Administration


Maintenance - Continuity Check) on the GFP150 eXtra card
The OAM function (Operation Administration Maintenance) in the GFP card, is used to supervise the customer
traffic.
This function consists in the broadcast and receipt of specific messages to supervise customer traffic. This
allows to know the state of the network, in relation to the progress of this flux
It is based on the IEEE-802. 1ag] norm. The supervision frames for broadcast and receipt are named frames
CC : Continuity Check.

Below an example of utilization of the OAM function:

NNI
NNI
CE UNI UNI
SDH Network
CE

ADR2500 eXtra N1 VMANi ADR2500 eXtra N 2

Probe Source OAM-CC

Probe Sink OAM-CC

Figure 6-14 : Example of OAM utilization

The OAM-CC function is constituted of source and sink probes:

A source probe that transmits a multicast frame periodically (by default 10 seconds in the extra) toward
sink probes. A probe source can transmits towards several sink probes.
A sink probe that treats the multicast frame, and a time-out (by default 10 secondes in the eXtra).

In the example of the figure N1, a source probe is declared in the equipment N1 and a sink probe in the
equipment N2 on the same VMANi, that allows the monitoring of the VMANi customer traffic between
equipment N1 and equipment N2 in one direction.

To supervise the other direction of this VMANi it is necessary to add two supplementary probes, a source probe
on the equipment N2 and a sink probe on the equipment N1.

The OAM-CC function manages 2 supervision alarms :

OAM Degraded : in this case it is the loss of one up to three consecutive CC frames
OAM Defect : in this case it is the loss of at least four consecutive CC frames.
The period between two OAM frames is configurable : 10s by default.

The number of source probes is limited to 10 and the number of sink probes to 64 by GFP150 eXtra card.

The frame multicast OAM is not distributed on the UNI port (customer), and is distributed tagged on tagged NNI
port and no tagged on untagged NNI port

The OAM CC multicast MAC address is by default: 01-80-C2-00-00-67.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-18 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Notes :
- The periodic OAM defect, can mean that network capacity for the VCG are not adjusted, and that congestions
appear (example : a VC link loss in a VCG with LCAS).
- No OAM probe must be activated on a flow created between a GFP150 eXtra card and a 4E/FE card. The
provider OAMcc frames are not filtered by the 4E/FE card and are forwarded to the customer network.

6.2.4 - Implementation of Quality of Service features of GFP150 eXtra


card

6.2.4.1 - QoS functions of GFP150 eXtra card

The GFP150 eXtra card provides various QoS functions. These functions format outgoing traffic flows on all
interfaces. Namely:

Traffic is forwarded in compliance with a pre-configured Service Level Agreement (SLA)


Committed and peak rates are guaranteed for every traffic flow

The QoS functions implemented on the GFP150 eXtra card are:


definition of guaranteed rate contracts per traffic flow
congestion management of traffic flows in agreement with their conformity to contracts

Functional diagram

The GFP150 eXtra QoS can be represented by the following diagram. It includes:
a block of metering and policing,
two waiting queues, one file (TC0) in Low priority and one queue (TC1) in SP (Strict Priority)
a scheduler mechanism for outgoing theses packets of theses queues toward the exit port.

The object of this mechanism is to encourage an important customer by report on a lower customer in
aggregate traffic to respect times of latency associated to every class of service.

The egress treatment (side port broadcast) permits a differentiated treatment according to the priority of the
VMAN with these different queues of transmission (TC: Traffic Class) as well as the means of outgoing
(scheduling in priority the TC1 SP (Strict Priority) file untill its shaping is reached).

This diagram applies to all ports: the 8 Ethernet interfaces plus the 8 Ethernet over SDH interfaces. All functions
are configured separately per port.

Compteurs SLA

Toward SDH
S switch fabric
LP C
From File TC 0
GREEN GREEN H
Ethernet SP E
File TC 1
Metering Policing D
YELLOW YELLOW %Shaping U
L
E
RED R

Ingress Egress VC3-nV or VC12-nV

Figure 6-15 : QoS architecture

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-19
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

QoS management - Rate control

Rate control of GFP150 eXtra card compares the temporal characteristics of received traffic (based on the rate
and length of bursts) with a contract subscribed by the customer sending this traffic. This type of contract is
commonly called a Service Level Agreement (SLA).

In the first stage, the temporal characteristics of the actual traffic flow are measured (metering). By comparing
them to the configured profile (or contract), each frame is colored according to the following rule:
Green: the frame is in profile
Yellow: the frame is partially out of profile
Red: the frame is entirely out of profile

The GFP150 eXtra card provides counters displaying the number of frames associated with each color.

In a second stage, all frames run through the policing function and all Red frames are dropped. Only Green and
Yellow frames can progress.

Metering of the GFP150 eXtra card is based on two IETF standards that can be selected via configuration:
Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) per the IETF RFC 2697
Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) per the IETF RFC 2698

When an interface is added to a VMAN, a traffic profile must be configured to be used with traffic entering that
interface.

Traffic profiles
Traffic profiles use the following parameters on the GFP150 eXtra card:

Parameter Description Unit srTCM trTCM


CIR Committed Information Rate Mbps YES YES
PIR Peak Information Rate Mbps NO YES
EBS Excess Burst Size KB YES YES
CBS Committed Burst Size KB YES YES

Figure 6-16 : Traffic profile

The QoS parameters strictly apply to the Ethernet traffic. The overhead generated by GFP encapsulation is not
accounted for in these rates.

srTCM (single rate Three Color Marker) :


A srTCM meter is useful for policing of a service where only the length and not the peak rate of the burst
determine its eligibility. Metering is based on a Committed Information Rate (CIR) and two associated burst
sizes, a Committed Burst Size (CBS) and an Excess Burst Size (EBS). A packet is set compliant or green if its
rate is less or equal to the CIR or if its excess rate does not exceed the CBS. It is set partially compliant or
yellow if its excess rate does exceed the CBS but not the EBS. It is set non compliant or red otherwise.

trTCM (two rate Three Color Marker) :


A trTCM meter is useful for policing of a service where a peak rate needs to be enforced separately from a
committed rate. Metering is based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and their associated burst sizes, Excess Burst Size (EBS) and Committed Burst Size (CBS). A packet is
set non compliant or red if its rate exceeds the PIR and its excess rate exceeds the EBS. A packet is set
compliant or green if its rate is less or equal to the CIR or if its excess rate does not exceed the CBS. Otherwise
it is set partially compliant or yellow.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-20 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Congestion avoidance and buffer management

The GFP150 eXtra card uses a standard algorithm to control the distribution of resources between classes of
service LP (Low Priority) and SP (Strict Priority) in order to manage congestion phases.

The QOS configuration in the GFP150 extra holds account of the priority information affected to every
aggregate customer. The priority affectation to a customer is done according to a SLA (service level
agreement), via the field configuration "User Priority" (between 0 and 7). To a priority data (configured in UNI
and NNI untagged ports or extracted from VMAN tags in NNI tagged ports) corresponds a traffic class :
User Priority 0,1,2,3,4,5 => TC0 (Low Priority)
User Priority 6,7 => TC1 (Strict Priority)

In the current version of GFP150 eXtra card, congestion can happen on transmission on an Ethernet or an
Ethernet over SDH interface under the following two (non exclusive) circumstances:
In a point-to-multipoint topology, when traffic coming from several ports must be mixed for transmission over
another port of the GFP150 eXtra. There can be more or less transitory phases where the sum of incoming
traffic is significantly greater than the bandwidth available on the outbound port. Point-to-multipoint
topologies especially subject to this type of congestion are those involving an Ethernet port configured at
10Mbps or an Ethernet over SDH port configured with a small number of VCs.
Regardless of the actual topology, when a large quantity of traffic goes through the policing stage but with
the Yellow color (only partially compliant traffic). There can be more or less transitory phases where the
excess rate is actually too high to be transmitted fast enough over the outbound port. Traffic profiles
especially subject to this type of congestion are those with a large differential between the configured CIR
and PIR.

Some repetitive or lasting congestion problems generally require an evolution of the topology network.

6.2.4.2 - Configuring the QoS features

Configuring Metering and Policing, Classification

Examples above with Point-to-Point, Hub-and-Spoke and Bus topologies already describe the configuration of a
traffic profile when adding a new port to a VMAN (see Configuring the Ethernet Switch for each example).

Instructions are different to configure a traffic profile on ports already associated with a VMAN. Click on the
Switch link and on the VMAN List link. Then three commands are available:

Add Port: use this link to add a new port in a VMAN with a traffic profile
Delete Port: use this link to remove a port from a VMAN and remove the associated traffic profile
Modify Port: use this link to change the traffic profile associated with a VMAN configured on a port

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-21
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

The following screen shows the configuration of a srTCM traffic profile on an Ethernet port.

Figure 6-17 : Configuring a srTCM profile

The following screen shows the configuration of a trTCM traffic profile on an Ethernet port.

Figure 6-18 : Configuring a trTCM profile

User Priority
The priority affectation to a customer (VMAN) is done via the "User Priority" field configuration (between 0
and 7). The values 6 and 7 are the most important values because they use the SP.

Parameters regulating for Classes of Service


The GFP150 eXtra card rules the reserved bandwidth for the SP queue (SP Bandwidth%). To read theses
informations, click on the "Global Params " link then on the " Classes of service " link ; the following screen is
then displayed:

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-22 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Figure 6-19 : Reading Traffic Classes parameters

If the operator wants to modify one of these parameters he must disactivate the calculation mode automatic.
For this, click on the "Global Params " link then on the "Advanced " link, select the wanted port for the mode
change, then pass from ON to OFF the column parameter " Auto ", then one can modify the SP bandwidth.

Figure 6-20 : Regulating Traffic Classes SP parameters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-23
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

SP Bandwidth % (1-100%) Translation in percentage of configured bandwidth for Strict Priority waiting
queue.
This queue encourages flux latency times that are affected to it, but with a limited queue shaping in order to
keep bandwidth for low priority queue.

Reading the SLA counters


The GFP150 eXtra card provides counters with the quantity of compliant (green), partially compliant (yellow)
and non-compliant (red) traffic received on a specific interface for a specific VMAN. Click on the Switch link
and on the VMAN List link. Select the row of the VMAN, click on the VMAN SLA Counters link. Then select a
port.

Figure 6-21 : SLA compliance counters

The GFP150 eXtra card also offers supplementary counters by port and VMAN.To read these counters, click on
the "Switch " link then on the "VMANPortCounters " link. In the top window, select the ETH and VCG ports on
which one wants these counters. The number is limited to 2.
In the below window, select the wanted port for the visualization.

Figure 6-22 : VMAN Port counters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-24 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.5 - Implementation of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the


GFP150 eXtra card

6.2.5.1 - Description of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtra
card

The GFP150 eXtra card enables activation of the "Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol " (MSTP), standard Ethernet
protocol defined in IEEE 802.1S.

MSTP can remove loops in an Ethernet network setup with redundant links. Without MSTP, these loops are
forbidden by the Ethernet standard to avoid a "broadcast storm ". With a loop and no MSTP, all broadcast
frames or unicast frames with an unknown address are endlessly replicated on all the links to the point where
the whole bandwidth is consumed.

In simple topologies such as point-to-point, hub-and-spoke or bus, MSTP is not necessary.

However, in ring or meshed topologies, MSTP is recommended since the network contains Ethernet loops.

Notes :
- A SDH loop to activate SDH protection mechanisms does not imply a loop at the Ethernet level. Ethernet links
are terminated by Ethernet ports or Ethernet over SDH ports.
- No MSTP must be activated on a flow created between a GFP150 eXtra card and a 4E/FE card. The provider
BPDU MSTP frames are not filtered by the 4E/FE card and are forwarded to the customer network.

On the GFP150 eXtra card, MSTP can be turned ON/OFF at a global level first. Then, once globally activated,
each port Ethernet or Ethernet over SDH can be included or not in the Spanning Tree. Once a port is configured
with MSTP, the protocol controls transmission over this port. Namely, MSTP can block transmission on the port
momentarily or until MSTP converges again following a link loss on an Ethernet port.

The MSTP protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card permanently exchanges control packets called "BPDUs " with all
other GFP150 eXtra cards running MSTP in the network. These packets are only forwarded on links included in
the Spanning Tree by configuration.

Note : In the present configuration, only the VMAN of which the identifying is between 4032 and 4094 can use
MSTP. Therefore, MSTP can only be used on 63 VMANS.

Warning :
- The VMAN ID of an activated VMAN cannot be modified ; this VMAN must be formerly suppressed.
- The sharing of a VMAN using MSTP (VMAN ID from 4032 to 4094) with a VMAN without MSTP (VMAN ID
from 2 to 4031) can broke the traffic associated to the VMAN without MSTP because this last is automatically in
the CIST.

CIST and MSTI definition


CIST (Common Instance Spanning Tree) manages a region, when more than 63 instances are used.
MSTI (Multi Spanning Tree Instance) manages a VLAN.
CIST and MSTI are independent .
Each MSTI is independent of other one. Each MSTI corresponds to one and only one VLAN.

Port MSTP state


Once a port is included in the Spanning Tree, MSTP compute the state of the port based both on the
information of the BPDUs received from the network as well as the transitions of the operational state of any
local port (in case of link loss/recovery for example).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-25
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Each MSTP port is managed by two different informations PORT STATE and PORT ROLE.

"PORT STATE" can be:


"DISABLED " : The port is not included in the MSTP Protocol. This happens when the physical port is
disconnected or when MSTP is deactivated by configuration on that port.
"FORWARDING " : The port id included in the MSTP Protocol and is connected.

"PORT ROLE" can be:


"DISCARDING " : The MSTP protocol decided to block transmission on the port to avoid an Ethernet loop.
Once a port in this state, it cannot receive or transmit any kind of Ethernet frame, except for MSTP BPDUs
that it continues to manage.
"BACKUP " : The MSTP protocol decided to block transmission on the port to avoid an Ethernet loop. This
state indicates the bridge has received its owner frame.
"LEARNING " : The port is going to transit to "DISCARDING " or "FORWARDING " state depending on the
result of MSTP convergence. No other Ethernet frame than BPDUs are received or transmitted on that port
in this state. However, in this state, MAC address learning starts for frames received on that port.
"DESIGNATED " : The port is completely functional. The port transmits data and learning @MAC.
"ROOT " : The port is completely functional. The port transmits data and learning @MAC. The root port is
the shortest way to the ROOT BRIDGE.

The following example displays a network with an Ethernet loop annihilated by MSTP. It shows the principle of
convergence towards a Tree topology ("Multiple Spanning Tree ") with a node elected as root of the tree ("Root
Bridge ").

Root Port
1
Bridge C

Designated
Port
2 Bridge A
3

Designated
1 1
Ports
Bridge Z Bridge D
Root Ports Blocking
(Root)
2

Root Ports
Designated 4
Port
3 1

Bridge B 2

1
Bridge E

Designated
Ports

Forwarding frames between Root ports and Designated ports

Figure 6-23 : MSTP port types

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-26 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Controlling MSTP convergence


A specific MSTP cost can be configured on every port (port priority), and on every Bridge (Bridge priority) in
order to control the Tree topology of the network during stable phases. At times where there is no link loss on
any port, either Ethernet or Ethernet over SDH. Naturally, redundant links blocked by MSTP during stable
phases can be unblocked when a link is lost in the network. Later, when the link failure is fixed and the primary
link comes back up, MSTP re-converges towards the stable topology and blocks back the redundant links.

Transparency of MSTP on the GFP150 eXtra


Per IEEE 802.1D standard, MSTP BPDUs must be sent with a reserved multicast address as MAC destination :
01-80-C2-00-00-00 ("Bridge Group Address "). "). By default, the GFP150 eXtra card uses the address :
01-80-C2-00-00-08.

However, the MSTP implementation on the GFP150 eXtra card supports configuration of a different multicast
address (standard : 01-80-C2-00-00-00 or non standard : inside the range 01-80-C2-00-00-04 to 01-80-C2-00-
00-0F) for use by the protocol. Using a different address does not change the MSTP algorithm at all. It is just a
way to distinguish the BPDUs sent by the GFP150 eXtra card from BPDUs sent by any other Ethernet bridge
(which would logically use the standard address).

The GFP150 eXtra cards are useful to interconnect client Ethernet LANs across a network providers backbone
(Ethernet over SDH). There can be cases where the clients themselves would be running STP between their
remote sites. By using a non standard address only known by the ADR2500 eXtra, the GFP150 eXtra card can
transport BPDUs coming from client networks in a totally transparent manner.

This way, the STP protocol in the operator network is completely isolated from any MSTP instances running in
the client networks. Moreover, the ADR2500 eXtra ensures continuity of clients STP across remote client sites.

Note : It is recommended not to activate MSTP on the Ethernet ports unless otherwise required by the
topology. It is generally useless to activate the operator MSTP on ports connected to client networks.

6.2.5.2 - MSTP Licence Activation on a GFP150 eXtra card

The MSTP utilization by the GFP150 eXtra card is submitted to a Licence. To activate this Licence, proceed as
following :

1) note the GFP150 eXtra MAC address on which the MSTP Licence must be activated
2) provide these informations to the Hotline via phone or E-MAIL to get the Licence key
3) enter the MSTP Licence key (32 characters) provided by the Hotline, via the "MSTP > Licence Activation"
menu, then click on Apply.

Figure 6-24 : MSTP Licence Activation

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-27
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Nota :

An alarm "No MSTP Licence" of card level is activated if at least one port has a MSTP configuration to ON and
if the MSTP licence is not activated.
The severity of this alarm is major and no configurable.

6.2.5.3 - Example of MSTP configuration

Use the previous example with a bus topology. Just a redundant link between the remote ADR2500 eXtra 1 and
3 is added. The final topology works like a ring.

First the 4 ADR2500 eXtra should be configured according to the instructions of the bus topology section of this
document (*). Then, the three steps below should be followed in order :

1. Configure the redundant link (*).


2. Activate MSTP on all ports of the bus (as well as on the redundant link)
3. Turn ON the redundant link

Once the link is activated, one should see that MSTP puts each end of the redundant link in the
"DISCARDING " state. All other ports of the bus go in "FORWARDING " or ROOT state.

(*) Warning : the used VMAN for MSTP should have a VMAM ID between 4032 and 4094 ; it will be 4032 for
this example.

Site n1
Site n3
Eth / 4xVC12
Eth / 4xVC12
SDH

Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100

Site n2 Site n4

Ethernet 10/100
Ethernet 10/100

Figure 6-25 : Example of MSTP configuration

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-28 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Bus configuration

See the bus section in this document. ( 6.2.2.4 -)

Configuring the redundant link between the ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3

Configure the VCG#2 port on ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3 with the same instructions as for VCG#2 between
ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4.

In the end, ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3 must be connected via VCG#2 configured with 6 VC12 and included in the
same VMAN as all other ports (VMAN ID "4032").

Note : The link is not activated yet in order to avoid creating an Ethernet loop in the network before MSTP is
running.

Activating MSTP on ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4

Click on the "MSTP" link then on the "Bridge settings " link of the GFP150 eXtra card. Set the "MSTP Procotol "
parameter at the "MSTP " value and click on "Apply ".

Figure 6-26 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (1)

The default values of fields of the Bridge Configuration screen are those of the 802.1d norm ; to optimize the
times of convergence of the MSTP protocol, it is necessary to adjust the parameters "Forward Delay",
"Hello Time" and "Max Age".

The other parameters allow to configure MSTP according to the user's , Before modify these fields, read the
802.1s standard.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-29
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Click on the "Port Settings " link. Set ports VCG#1 and VCG#2 at the "Enable " value and leave other field at
default value, then click on "Apply ".

Figure 6-27 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (2)

Activating MSTP on ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3

To activate MSTP on cards n1 and n3, repeat previous step.

Activating the redundant link

On ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3, we turn ON the VCG#2 interfaces :


Click on the VCG link of the GFP150 eXtra and then on the Settings link. Set the Admin Status of interface
VCG#2 to Up and click on Apply.

Once the two interfaces are activated, MSTP starts exchanging BPDUs across the new link and a new state is
calculated. However, after a few seconds each port of this link goes in "BLOCKING " state thanks to the
difference in "Path Cost " over the ring. Except for MSTP BPDUs, no Ethernet frame is forwarded over this link.

Connectivity check

It is possible to check a MSTI state on a GFP150 card.

Click on the "MSTP" link then on the "MSTI List" link.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-30 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

Figure 6-28 : MSTI Checking (1)

Select MSTI Id 1and click on the MSTI-Port Informations and Settings link to see the next panel.

All selected MSTI port state can be verified.

Figure 6-29 : MSTI Checking (2)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-31
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.2.6 - Implementation of LCAS on the GFP150 eXtra card

6.2.6.1 - Description of LCAS

The GFP150 eXtra card enables activation of the standard protocol "Link Capacity Adjustment System" (LCAS)
independently on each of the 8 VCGs.

LCAS is useful to :
Dynamically add or remove VC members from a VCG without deactivating the VCG (making it a hitless
operation for traffic)
Dynamically adjust the available bandwidth when alarms are triggered ON/OFF on the VC members of a
VCG. The bandwidth of every VC under failure is subtracted from the VCG bandwidth. Hence, in case of
failures the VCG continues to forward traffic as long as there is still at least one operational VC.

Without LCAS :
The GFP150 eXtra card requires deactivation of a VCG before VC members can be added or removed (it
forces a traffic interruption)
A VCG becomes completely broken as soon as an alarm is triggered on at least one VC member. Plus, it
becomes operational again only once no VC is under failure anymore.

In order to run, LCAS only needs to be activated on both ends of a VCG. LCAS is transparent for the SDH
backbone point of view. Once both ends of a VCG are configured with LCAS they start exchanging control
information in the SDH overhead (namely, in the multi-frame of virtual concatenation).

LCAS can be used as a mechanism to protect transmission of Ethernet traffic : when a part of the VCs of a VCG
fail, transmission continues with the remaining operational VCs.

This protection mechanism makes sense only if the VCs of a VCG are not all configured the same way across
the SDH network :
Either they must take different path via independent SDH links ;
Or a part of the VCs must be protected at the SDH level (SNC, etc.) ;
Or some of both.

6.2.6.2 - Example of LCAS configuration

We use again the point-to-point connection example described earlier in this document. The VCs just use two
different SDH paths. The LCAS option is at Yes by default.

Configuring the VCG

By proceeding in the same way as to the 6.2.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface, create the virtually
concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6) that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic.

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration. The screen also displays the
type of VCG#1 (VC12) and the number of constituting VC members (6).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Monitor " and click on "APPLY " in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 6-9).

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tap. Configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the GFP150 eXtra card in
way where 3 VC12 go through a SDH card and the 3 other VC12 go through a second SDH card. Make sure
you have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote ADR2500 eXtra.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-32 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.3 - A FEW RULES FOR SET-UP

6.3.1 - Various configuration rules

1. The configuration of the Ethernet interface must be identical between the GFP150 eXtra card and the
transmission equipment present on the LAN. It is preferable to use the manual modes rather than the
"auto negotiation" mode because of the incompatibility of operation of this mode between certain
equipment.

2. The changes of configuration of VCG interface (LCAS, FCS) must be done when the interface is "OFF "
(Admin Status ticked "Down"). The interface is configured to "ON " (Admin Status ticked "Up") when
configurations of the 2 extremities of the link are effective. However, when LCAS is activated on a VCG
interface and when this interface is itself in the state "ON ", it is possible to modify the VCG composition
(add/delete VC members) without putting the interface "OFF " before. In this case, these modifications are
directly taken into account.

3. For each VCG, it is preferable to configure the FCS parameter to "No ".

6.3.2 - QoS configuration rules


It is necessary to respect the following rules, when configuring the QoS :
1. For each customer Ethernet interface, corresponding CIR and PIR must be under 100Mbit/sec if this
interface is configured in 100BaseTX or in Auto negotiation, or under 10Mbit/sec if this interface is
configured in 10BaseT (corresponding to the Connection Automatic Control feature).
2. For each Ethernet over SDH interface with associated CIR and PIR, the VCG payload must be upper CIR +
0.1*(PIR-CIR) (corresponding to the Connection Automatic Control feature).

6.4 - APPLICATIONS

6.4.1 - Meshed networks


In topologies of the type "shared LAN", in multipoint to multipoint (EPLAN or EVPLAN), it is necessary to avoid
to create Ethernet loops between 2 GFP150 eXtra cards (site 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 1 to 3)
- either to avoid to create Ethernet loops by construction of the links, which makes unnecessary the
activation of MSTP
- or to activate the "multiple spanning tree " protocol (MSTP).

6.4.2 - Protection of channels


The VC12/VC3 containers used by the GFP150 eXtra card can be protected by SNCP mechanism as all other
VC12/VC3.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-33
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.4.3 - Degraded mode


When a virtual container (VC3 or VC12) used by the GFP150 eXtra card is out of service, transmission folds
back on VC3/VC12 left (thanks to the LCAS protocol, when activated). In these conditions, transmission over an
interface is possible as long as there is at least one VC3 or VC12 available (for this interface).
When the VC3/VC12 comes back available, the VCG resynchronize automatically (thanks to the LCAS protocol)
and the transmission restarts over all the available VC3/VC12.

6.5 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

6.5.1 - Main characteristics


Main characteristics of the GFP150 eXtra card in the ADR2500 eXtra are :
Default values of GFP header fields :
PFI field (Payload FCS Indicator ) is at 0 (absence of FCS on Payload)
Permanent values of GFP header fields :
PTI field (Payload Type Identifier) is at 000 (Data Client Frame)
EXI field (Extension Header Identifier) is at 0000 (Null Extension Header)
UPI field (User Payload Identifier) is at 0000 0001 (Frame-Mapped Ethernet)
Number of VCG per GFP150 eXtra card : 1 to 8
Number of virtual containers per VCG : from 1 to 46 VC12 (with a limitation to 63 VC12 for the whole VCGs)
or from 1 to 2 VC3 (with a limitation of 3 VC3 for the whole VCGs)
VCG/VC12-nV and VCG/VC3-nV mixity allowed
Differential delay between VCG containers VC12/VC3 : 47ms maximum for VC12 and 47ms maximum for
VC3
Ethernet interface 10/100BaseTX half or full duplex
MTU is 1548 bytes (including @dest, @src, lgd trame and FCS), which allows to transport the ISL protocol.
Frames which length is under 64 bytes are rejected.
In validated PAUSE mode (Flow control), the PAUSE frames are generated and managed.
In no validated PAUSE mode, the received PAUSE frames are thrown and no PAUSE frame is generated.
The received PAUSE frames are only counted in the "InPauseFrames" counter.
The transmitted PAUSE frames are only counted in the "OutPauseFrames" counter.
The MAC address table runs in IVL mode (Independent VLAN Learning)
Ethernet frames with a reserved MAC destination address (01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-00-FF) are
transparently forwarded. It deviates from the IEEE recommendation for Ethernet bridges. However, this
design choice ensures continuity of the "client STP" across remote client sites. Naturally, if MSTP is
activated on the ADR2500 eXtra, frames received with the address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 (Mac STP address)
on MSTP ports will be transparently forwarded because the MSTP of ADR2500 eXtra uses the Mac
addresses 01-80-C2-00-00-04 to 01-80-C2-00-00-04F (by default 01-80-C2-00-00-08) (for more details, see
6.2.5.1 -).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-34 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.5.2 - Ethernet rate / VCG rate


The object of this chapter is to help the user when configuring VCG regarding Ethernet rates on GFP150 eXtra
card interfaces.

Concerning Ethernet rates :

The Ethernet rate configured for each interface of the GFP150 eXtra card is corresponding to the payload
avalaible at the Ethernet interface.
This rate is called MTU (64 to 1548 bytes including 6 Bytes @dest, 6 Bytes @src, 2 Bytes lgd trame, and 4
Bytes FCS).

Knowing there is 12 intergap Bytes between 2 Ethernet frames, which are outside the payload, and 8
preamble Bytes per Ethernet frame, which are also outside the payload, when an Ethernet 100BaseTX
interface is used to the maximum of its capacity (end to end frames at 100Mbit/sec), payload rate in
100BaseTX is 76.19Mbit/sec for 64 Bytes (MTU) frames, and 98.72Mbit/sec for 1548 Bytes (MTU) frames.
In the same way, payload rate in 10BaseT is 7.62Mbit/sec for 64 Bytes (MTU) frames, and 9.87Mbit/sec for
1548 Bytes (MTU) frames.
Because we dont control Ethernet frames lengths in a link, which may change from frame to frame, we
have to imagine the most critical case, in order to configure the VCG rate for the link. Note the GFP protocol
adds an 8 Bytes header (12 Bytes when the GFP FCS is ON), header taken into account in
6.5.3 -and 6.5.4 -

Note that even if we know how to configure, in the case of 100BaseTX, a CIR upper than 1 and under 100
Mbit/sec (per 1Mbit/sec step) at the customer Ethernet interface (and in the case of the 10BaseT mode a CIR
between 1 and 10Mbit/sec sec (per 1Mbit/sec step)), some normal limitations are to be taken into account :

1. When the active mode is 100BaseTX :


The maximum rate is 98.72Mbit/sec, with a limitation to 76.29Mbit/sec for a customer flow including only
64 Bytes length frames, even if the configuration is CIR=100Mbit/sec.
When the VCG is a VC3-2V, the Ethernet rate is limited to 96.27Mbit/sec by taken into account the GFP
header in the VC3-2V payload (VC3-2V payload is 96.768Mbit/sec). It is impossible in this case to
obtain an Ethernet rate upper 96Mbit/sec.
2. When the active mode is 10BaseT :
The maximum rate is 9.872Mbit/sec, with a limitation to 7.629Mbit/sec for a customer flow including only
64 Bytes length frames, even if the configuration is CIR=10Mbit/sec.
3. In all cases :
The addition of payload rates of each active VCG must be under the payload of a VC4. So, we can
consider 4 cases :
1. No VC3 used (neither for VCG, nor by another card in ADR2500 eXtra) : the number of all VC12
used must be 63.
2. 1 VC3 is used among all the VCG and/or the other cards in ADR2500 eXtra : the number of all
VC12 used must be 42.
3. 2 VC3 are used among all the VCG and/or the other cards in ADR2500 eXtra : the number of all
VC12 used must be 21.
4. 3 VC3 are used among all the VCG and/or the other cards in ADR2500 eXtra : No VC12 can be
used

Of course, if others VC3 and/or VC12 are used for transporting flows coming from other cards in
ADR2500 eXtra, it must be taken into account.

Note than all VCG VC3 based in the GFP150 eXtra card cant use more than 2 VC3.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 6-35
GFP150 EXTRA CARD

6.5.3 - Number of VC12 in a VCG


VC12 payload is Dvc12=2.176 Mbit/sec.

The maximum number of VC12 allowed per VCG equals 46.

We suppose customer Ethernet interfaces CIR and PIR in the link are already configured.

In point to point (EPLine service), the minimal number N of VC12 necessary for transmitting a CIR of E
Mbit/sec at the customer Ethernet interface is :

N = UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(E*1.125/Dvc12) and N46

This calculation takes into account GFP header with FCS OFF. When FCS is ON, replace 1.125 with 1.1875.

Note that in this case, the customer Ethernet interface remote rate must equals E and we advise to configure
PIR=CIR.

Example :

If we suppose E=PIR=20Mbit/sec
We obtain N=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(20*1.125/2.176)=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(10.34)=11 (46)

In all cases, we advise after the configuration of customers interfaces Ethernet CIR/PIR and the corresponding
VCG, to configure Ethernet over SDH interfaces CIR/PIR as CIR=PIR=VCG payload.

6.5.4 - Number of VC3 in a VCG


VC3 payload is Dvc3=48.384 Mbit/sec.

The maximum number of VC3 allowed per VCG equals 2.

We suppose customer Ethernet interfaces CIR and PIR in the link are already configured.

In point to point (EPLine service), the minimal number N of VC3 necessary for transmitting a CIR of E
Mbit/sec at the customer Ethernet interface is :

N = UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(E*1.125/Dvc3) and N2

This calculation takes into account GFP header with FCS OFF. When FCS is ON, replace 1.125 with 1.1875.

Note that in this case, the customer Ethernet interface remote rate must equals E and we advise to configure
PIR=CIR.

Example :

If we suppose E=PIR=60Mbit/sec
We obtain N=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(60*1.125/48.384)=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(1.395)=2 (2)

In all cases, we advise after the configuration of customers interfaces Ethernet CIR/PIR and the corresponding
VCG, to configure Ethernet over SDH interfaces CIR/PIR as CIR=PIR=VCG payload.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 6-36 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7 GFP2500-2GE CARD

All the services mentioned in this document can be performed between the GFP2500-2GE cards from ADR2500
eXtra but also between these cards and the DATA cards from ADR range, with equivalent services and
granularities.

Each ADR2500 eXtra can include up to 4 GFP2500-2GE cards according to the chosen configuration :
- in STM4 mode : TRIB 1 to TRIB 8, LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots
- in STM16 mode : TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots
Four GFP2500-2GE cards max per shelf in the presence of one SWITCH HO/LO card
Two GFP2500-2GE cards max per shelf in the presence of one SW32HOLO card

7.1 - S-VLAN DESCRIPTION

7.1.1 - Tag of frames


The GFP2500 card allows to define two S-Vlan tags which can be used for the configuration :
- the tag 802.1Q defined by the standard
- a tag whose configuration is offered in the Global Settings window of the "Switch" menu

Figure 7-1 : Global Settings

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-1
GFP2500-2GE CARD

During the creation of S-Vlan three operations of tag are possible (Switch menu > New case) :

- None : no tag is added to the frames of this service. This configuration allows an optimum use of the
band-width. If this choice of tag is carried out, only classification Point To Point will be offered for
S-Vlan.

Figure 7-2 : Tag of frames (1)

- Add : a S-Vlan tag will be added to each frame belonging to the S-Vlan and entering on a UNI-N port.
This tag will contain the seized value of S-Vlan, the priority defined for the S-Vlan (see 7.1.3 -) and the
Ethertype field defined in the Global Setting window.
Remark : The taggage is removed on the outgoing on an UNI port or a NNI port classified in
PortBased.

Figure 7-3 : Tag of frames (2)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

- Replace : the C-Vlan field of the C-Vlan tag of the frames entering on the UNI-N port will be replaced
by the value of S-Vlan. In this configuration only C-Vlan classification will be authorized and no range of
C-Vlan could be defined

Figure 7-4 : Tag of frames (3)

The class of priority of the frames from 0 to 7 could also be defined in this window at the time of the
creation of S-Vlan (the default value is 0).

7.1.2 - Classification
The S-Vlan being created, for each port of the S-Vlan a rule of classification will be defined :

- Classification based on "Port" : all the frames received on this port are associated to the S-Vlan.
The frames outgoing on this port will not be tagged S-Vlan.

Figure 7-5 : Classification based on "Port"

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-3
GFP2500-2GE CARD

- Classification based on "C-Vlan" : all the frames received on this port and whose value of C-Vlan
corresponds to the defined values in "C-Vlan range" will be associated to the S-Vlan.

Figure 7-6 : Classification based on "C-Vlan"

- Classification based on "User Predefined" : all the frames satisfying User Predefined will be
associated to this S-Vlan.

Figure 7-7 : Classification based on " User Predefined "

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

It is possible to define 8 "User Predefined" in the screen (See Figure 7-1 : Global Settings).
These 8 "User Predefined" are total with the card ; for each of them it will be defined :
- the name
- the field of the Ethernet frame which must contain the defined value in "Matching value"

- Classification based on "Default" : all the frames of this port answering no other classification will be
associated to this S-Vlan

Figure 7-8 : Classification based on " Default "

- Classification based on "Point to Point" : all the frames of this port will be associated to this S-Vlan.
This S-Vlan will contain to the maximum two ports for which no SLA could be defined.

Figure 7-9 : Classification based on " Point to Point "

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-5
GFP2500-2GE CARD

- Classification based on "S-Vlan" :

For all the frames received on this port, the value of the S-Vlan tag defines the associated S-Vlan.
For an E-NNI port it is possible to define a different S-Vlan associated to the incoming S-Vlan tag

Figure 7-10 : Classification based on " S-Vlan "

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.1.3 - CoS
For each S-Vlan the class of priority of the frames is defined from 0 to 7 (S-Vlan List > CoS menu). In
this configuration the same priority will be allotted to all the frames of the S-Vlan.

Figure 7-11 : Class of Priority

It is also possible to choose the mode User Priority. In this case the priority of each frame of the S-Vlan
will be defined according to the configuration of the table proposed in the screen Switch > Port Priority.

Figure 7-12 : Port Priority

In this screen, for each value of the priority field of the coming C-Tag, it is defined a priority associated
with all the frames having this value of priority field.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-7
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.1.4 - MAC addresses Table


The screen Switch > MAC @ Table visualizes all the MAC addresses known in the S-Vlan as well as the
associated ports.

Figure 7-13 : MAC addresses Table

It is possible to prohibit with certain frames having a particular MAC address to forward in the S-Vlan even if
they satisfy the criteria of classification (Switch > Forbidden MAC @ window)

Figure 7-14 : Forbidden MAC addresses

In the same way it is possible to define in one S-Vlan a static address, always known and not subjected to the
criteria of ageing (Switch > Static MAC @ Configuration window)

Figure 7-15 : Static MAC addresses

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.2 - GFP2500 CARD AND SERVICES PRESENTATION

This chapter has for objective to guide the user for the commissioning of the GFP2500 card in the ADR2500
eXtra. It gives simple examples which should be easily adapted to the needs.

The services provided by GFP2500 card in ADR2500 eXtra are :

SMART LL EPLine Service

The EPLine service (Ethernet Private Line) allows the point to point interconnection of Ethernet 1 Gigabit
flows through a SDH network by using, for each connection, a VCG (VC-Group) based on virtual
concatenation (VCAT).
It is possible to obtain up to 2 independent point to point connections per GFP2500 card. Rate granularity
for each VCG is based either on VC3, or on VC4. With each VCG, it is possible to concatenate from 1 to 12
VC3 or from 1 to 4 VC4 in STM4 mode, from 1 to 21 VC3 or from 1 to 7 VC4 in STM16 mode. Only the
VCG#1, 7, 13 and 19 offfer a rate equal to or higher than 100 Mbit/s.

In STM4 mode, the sum of the concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 2 GE ports, cannot be
above the STM4 payload (about 622 Mbit/s).
In STM16 mode, the sum of the concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 2 GE ports, cannot be
above the STM16 payload (about 2400 Mbit/s).

SHARING EVPLine Service

The EVPLine service (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) allows the point to point interconnection of several
Ethernet 1 Gigabit flows through a SDH network by using over shared VCG (VC-Group) based on virtual
concatenation (VCAT) ; these flows are separated by Tag S-Vlan, that adds a level of VLAN in relation to
the possible VLANs of Customers.
It is possible to put until 256 shared traffic (S-Vlan) on a VCG. In the GFP2500 card we can have
256 different S-Vlan maximum, whose 63 for the MSTP protection (S-Vlan =4032-4094). The rate
granularity for each VCG is the same as EPLine.

SMART LL EPLAN Service

The EPLAN service (Ethernet Private LAN) allows the multipoint to multipoint interconnection of Ethernet 1
Gigabit flows through a SDH network by using, for each connection between two points of the network, a
VCG (VC-Group) based on virtual concatenation (VCAT).
It is possible to obtain up to 22 independent connections per GFP2500 card. Rate granularity for each VCG
is based either on VC3, or on VC4. With each VCG, it is possible to concatenate from 1 to 12 VC3 or from 1
to 4 VC4 in STM4 mode, from 1 to 21 VC3 or from 1 to 7 VC4 in STM16 mode. Only the VCG#1, 7, 13 and
19 offfer a rate equal to or higher than 100 Mbit/s.
In STM4 mode, the sum of the concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 2 GE ports, cannot be
above the STM4 payload (about 622 Mbit/s).
In STM16 mode, the sum of the concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 2 GE ports, cannot be
above the STM16 payload (about 2400 Mbit/s).
In this service, each GFP2500 card includes a Switch function allowing Ethernet multipoint to multipoint
interconnection.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-9
GFP2500-2GE CARD

SHARING EVPLAN Service

The EVPLAN service (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN) allows the multipoint to multipoint interconnection of
several Ethernet 1 Gigabit flows through a SDH network by using over shared VCG (VC-Group) based on
virtual concatenation (VCAT) ; these flows are separated by Tag S-Vlan, that adds a level of VLAN in
relation to the possible VLANs of Customers.
It is possible to configure until 256 independent shared traffic (S-Vlan) on a VCG. In the GFP2500 card we
can have 256 different S-Vlan maximum whose 63 for the MSTP protection ( S-Vlan =4032-4094). The rate
granularity for each VCG is the same as EPLAN.
In this service, each GFP2500 card includes a Switch function allowing Ethernet multipoint to multipoint
interconnection.

These services allow to answer, for example, to the following needs :

point to point application: to build an Ethernet LAN between 2 remote sites

multilink application (Star) : LAN interconnection between a central site and remote sites

multipoint to multipoint application : to share a LAN between several sites in a BUS topology

Ethernet frames are transported on SDH by using the GFP-F protocol.

The use of the GFP protocol and the advanced Switch features allows to offer Quality of Services features
(QoS). The QoS in GFP2500 card is based on a traffic differentiation : classification, metering, marking,
shaping, policing, congestion control and scheduling.

Hardware design

Micro Processor

To switch fabric
622 Mb/s in STM4 mode
2.4 Gb/s in STM16 mode
GFP Switch
Mapper 2 GE

Figure 7-16 : Hardware design of the card

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-10 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3 - CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATIONS OF GFP2500 CARDS

7.3.1 - GFP2500 card setup


a) Unwrap the card
b) Insert and screw the card in an allowed slot of the ADR2500 eXtra shelf.
c) Verify with GUI configuration manager that the GFP2500 pack (Upload/Download > Switching menu)
is present in the system.
d) In the GUI configuration manager, select GFP2500 as expected card on the slot where it was
inserted
e) Connect the optical cables to the GFP2500 card
f) Wait a few seconds and check that the green LED status is steadily on.

7.3.2 - Create a LAN interconnection

7.3.2.1 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EPLine service

In the diagram below, one intends to deport a full duplex LAN Ethernet 1 Gigabit between 2 sites equipped of
ADR2500 extra. In a first time, one supposes that the rate of the Ethernet traffic exchanged between the 2 sites
does not exceed 100Mbps. The QoS configuration is explained later in this document in greater details.

ADR2500 eXtra
ADR2500 eXtra
Eth/2VC3
E
SDH Eth/2VC3

Ethernet 1 Gigabit Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Figure 7-17 : EPLine service

7.3.2.1.1 - GFP2500 cards configuration


Login on the first ADR2500 eXtra to open the Shelfview GUI screen. On this screen, click on the GFP2500
card then on the GE Ports link.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-11
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Configuring the Ethernet interface

Click on the Interface Settings link.

Figure 7-18 : Configuring the Ethernet interface

Note : The Ethernet interface of the remote equipment (switch, IP router, PC, ) connected to the GFP2500
card MUST always be configured the same way. Due to possible interoperability issues with Auto-
Negotiation between equipment from different origins, this feature (Automatic option) should preferably
not be used.

This screen is also used to set the alarms severity associated to the interface defects.

Network Interface

Select the UNI-N mode (User to Network Interface Network) : this type of interface corresponds to an
customer interface which can offer up to 256 services per port (256 services max per card). On these interfaces
the provider OAM management frames and the provider BPDU MSTP frames are filtered : they are not sent to
the customer network.

The I-NNI choice (Internal Network to Network Interface) corresponds to a provider interface with provider
S-VLan tag. This interface is used to connect with a PCP encoding aware data card ; there is no metering on
I-NNI port. This interface is used between GFP2500 cards.

The E-NNI choice (External Network to Network Interface) corresponds to a provider interface with or without
provider S-VLan tag.This interface is suggested to connect with a PCP encoding unaware data card ; there is
metering on E-NNI port. This interface is used between GFP2500 cards and other Data cards.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-12 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Link Down Retransmit

The Link Down Retransmit function can only be used in point to point mode on a S-Vlan constituted of one
Ethernet port and one VCG port in each equipment.

Tick "Enable" allows to report the state of the Ethernet Down or VCG Down link on the remote Ethernet link.

ETH Down Report


3 Locs + VCG Down
Status Down SDH
2
4
GFP2500 VCG VCG GFP2500
"LDR "LDR Forced
1 Cut off
GE Enable" Enable" GE

VCG Down Report


2 2
3 VCG Down SDH VCG Down 3
GFP2500 VCG VCG GFP2500
Forced Forced
"LDR "LDR
Cut off GE 1 GE Cut off
Enable" Enable"

Flow control

The Pause function (IEEE 802.3 Flow control) can only be used in point to point mode/full duplex on a S-Vlan
constituted of one UNI-N GE port and one VCG port.

Tick "Enable" allows to process received pause frames and to send pause frames in case of congestion ; the
pause mode of each GE port can be changed independently and is optional.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects


Click on the Connection tab of the shelf view and configure the connections of VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22 of the
GFP2500 card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote GFP2500 card.

Figure 7-19 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-13
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Configuring a VCG
For the VCG#1 interface, click on VC#1_1 and then on the Multiple Add Member link. In the new screen
coming up, select VC3 as type and VC#1_22 as last connection. Click on Apply in order to create a group of
2 concatenated VC3 that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic (VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22).

Figure 7-20 : Configuring the VCG (1)

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration: Admin Status at Up, "Network
Interface" at "E-NNI", LCAS at Yes and FCS at No. We choose to keep the default options for this example.
This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC3) and the number of constituting VC members (2).

Figure 7-21 : Configuring the VCG (2)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-14 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Mon." and click on "Apply" in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-25).

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the Switch link, then on "New" in the table. Enter 2 as new S-Vlan Id, select "None" as Tag Process,
choose the 802.1ad priority then click on Apply in order to create it. A new screen comes up in order to
associate ports to this S-Vlan.

Select the Ethernet GE:1 interface and the Peer Port VCG#1 then click on "Add" to complete the addition of
these ports to S-Vlan 2.

Figure 7-22 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-15
GFP2500-2GE CARD

To modify the priority granted to this S-Vlan (7), click on the "S-Vlan List" link then on the "CoS" link.

Figure 7-23 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2)

The association of these 2 ports to the same and unique S-Vlan Id isolates the Ethernet Switching between
these 2 ports from the rest of the ports (all the other Ethernet and VCG interfaces). Ethernet traffic forwarded
between these 2 ports cannot leak out on other ports and vice versa.

Note : In order to install a point-to-point connection (EPLine service), there should never be more than 2 ports
(1 customer UNI-N Ethernet port and 1 I-NNI or E-NNI VCG port) in the same S-Vlan on the GFP2500
card.

To check the configuration, click on the S-Vlan List link. A table displays all the S-Vlan configured on the card.
Select one S-Vlan and click on the "S-Vlan Configuration" > "Port List" link in order to identify the ports which
are associated for it.

Figure 7-24 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (3)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-16 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Configuring the remote GFP2500 card


Just do the configuration on the second ADR2500 eXtra following the exact same steps again.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connection


Once both ADR2500 eXtra systems are configured, the ports used by the Point-to-Point link can be activated on
each ADR2500 eXtra.

Click on the GE Ports link, then on the Interface Settings link. For interface GE:1, tick ifAdminStatus up and
click on Apply.

7.3.2.1.2 - Connectivity check


Perform the following verifications with both GFP2500 cards:
1. Click on the "GE Ports" link, check that the Ethernet ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would be
marked yellow or red depending on alarm severity) ; then click on the "VCG" and "Alarms" links, check that
the VCG ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would be marked yellow or red depending on alarm
severity). Otherwise click on the alarmed port to go to the proper screen, where the specific alarm is
displayed (this brings you directly to step 2, 3 or 4 below). Repeat the operation for every alarmed port.
2. Click on the GE Ports link and select Ethernet interface GE:1. Verify that there is no alarm (the Fault
options of the Interface Defect and LOS alarms are unchecked). Otherwise check both the cables and the
configuration of the connected Ethernet interface.
3. Verify that there is no alarm on the VC3 (LPT) being used. Otherwise check end-to-end SDH configuration
as well as the signal quality over the various links.
4. Click on the VCG link then on the Alarms link, and select the VCG#1 interface. Once configuration is
complete all alarms should disappear after a few seconds. Otherwise check the configuration in the VCG
functional block on both ends as well as the configuration of the SDH cross-connects.

Figure 7-25 : Connectivity check

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-17
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Note : This screen can be used to configure the severity of the alarms related to the defaults on the groups
of concatenated paths.
5. Click on the Settings link and verify that the VCG#1 is Up.
6. Try sending bi-directional Ethernet traffic across the end-to-end connection. You could for example:
Run a ping or a file transfer between 2 PCs to control Ethernet connectivity.
Use an Ethernet traffic generator in order to further qualify the end-to-end connection.

As a final step, check compliance of the GFP2500 counters on both ends based on the traffic being
forwarded. Namely the following counters:
- Ethernet counters : click on the GE Ports link and then on the MIB2 Counters link
- GFP counters : click on the VCG link and then on the MIB2/GFP Counters link
- S-Vlan counters : click on the Switch link. Select S-Vlan Id 2, click on the S-Vlan SLA Counters and
"S-Vlan Port Counters" links. Verify the set of counters for interfaces GE:1 and VCG#1. These counters
are described later in this document in greater details.

7.3.2.2 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : EVPLine service (sharing)

In the diagram below, one intends to deport two full duplex LAN Ethernet 1 Gigabit between 2 sites equipped of
ADR2500 extra by sharing the same VCG for the two traffics (sharing), this in order to optimize the SDH
bandwidth.

One supposes that the Ethernet traffic rate exchanged between the 2 sites does not exceed 100Mbps for each
flow.

1 VCG
ADR2500 eXtra ADR2500 eXtra

Eth/4VC3
E Eth/4VC3
SDH

Ethernet 1 Gigabit Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Figure 7-26 : Service EVPLine

7.3.2.2.1 - GFP2500 cards configuration

Configuration of the Ethernet interface

Click on the "GE Ports" link then on the Interface Settings link. Choose the Network Interface mode "UNI-N".
Apply the same configuration for the two Ethernet ports.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tab of the shelf view and configure the connections of VC3#1_1, VC3#1_22, VC3#2_1
and VC3#2_22 of the GFP2500 card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote
GFP2500 card.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-18 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

To obtain the list of connections carried out, click on one of the blue tapes of the matrix of connection located in
top and on the right of the screen

Figure 7-27 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects

Configuring a VCG

By proceeding in the same way as to the 7.3.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface create a group of 4
concatenated VC3 on which Ethernet will be transported (VC3#1_1, VC3#1_22, VC3#2_1 and VC3#2_22).

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration. These options correspond to
the needed example for the sharing.This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC3) and the number of
constituting VC members (4).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select the interface VCG#1. Tick "Mon." option and click on "Apply " in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-25).

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

For the first Ethernet port (GE:1) :


Click on the Switch link, then on "New" in the table. Enter 2 as new S-Vlan Id, select "Add" as Tag Process,
choose the 802.1ad priority then click on Apply in order to create it. A new screen comes up in order to
associate ports to this S-Vlan.

Select the Ethernet GE:1 interface, the Classification based on "Port", the trTCM (*) policing algorithm, enter
100Mbps for the CIR and PIR. The CBS value is left to default value (16KB).
Click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2.

Click on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#1 interface, choose the Classification based on "S-Vlan" and metering values then
click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2.

(*) In trTCM mode, the operator can configure a value of PIR ranging between the specified CIR and the port
rate, but the actual value of the PIR used by the GFP2500 will be equal to the port rate.

Then for the other Ethernet port (GE:2) :


Click again on the Switch link, then on "New" in the table. Enter 3 as new S-Vlan Id, select "Add" as Tag
Process, choose the 802.1ad priority then click on Apply in order to create it. A new screen comes up in order
to associate ports to this S-Vlan.

Select the Ethernet GE:2 interface, the Classification based on "Port", the trTCM policing algorithm, enter
100Mbps for the CIR and PIR. The CBS value is left to default value.
Click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 3.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-19
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Click on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#1 interface, choose the Classification based on "S-Vlan" and metering values then
click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 3

The association of each GE port to a specific S-Vlan Id isolates the Ethernet Switching between these 2 ports
from the rest of the ports (all the other Ethernet and VCG interfaces). Ethernet traffic forwarded between these 2
ports cannot leak out on other ports and vice versa.

With the selection of Tag Process at "Add" for each one of the S-Vlan, it is possible to differentiate traffics of the
two Ethernet links on the VCG.

Note : In order to install a point-to-point connection (EVPLine service), there should never be more than 2
ports (1 customer UNI-N Ethernet port and 1 I-NNI or E-NNI VCG port) in the same S-Vlan on the
GFP2500 card.

To check the configuration, click on the S-Vlan List link. A table displays all the S-Vlan configured on the card.
Select one S-Vlan and click on the "S-Vlan Configuration" > "Port List" link in order to identify the ports which
are associated for it.

Configuring the remote GFP2500 card


Just do the configuration on the second ADR2500 eXtra by following the exact same steps again.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connection


Once both ADR2500 eXtra systems are configured, the ports used by the point-to-point links can be activated
on each ADR2500 eXtra.

Click on the GE Ports link, then on the Interface Settings link. For GE:1 and GE:2 interfaces, tick
ifAdminStatus up and click on Apply.

7.3.2.2.2 - Connectivity check

Take again the procedure of the paragraph 7.3.2.1.2 - to do controls, by verifying the 2 links.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-20 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.2.3 - Hub and Spoke interconnection : EPLAN service

In the network below, we show interconnection of three remote sites with one central site in a hub and spoke
topology. Although Ethernet interfaces are 1 Gigabit full duplex, the load of traffic between the remote sites and
the central site is as following:
remote sites 1 and 2 : 100Mbps (2VC3),
remote site 3 : 50Mbps (1VC3).

The sum of the data rates going to the central site is 250Mbps. However we consider in this example that the
total rate of traffic going in the opposite direction (a.k.a. from the central site to the remote sites) doesnt go over
200Mbps ; this is just for the purpose of the example.

In this example, the central site acts as a full bridge : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between remote sites.

When no traffic can pass between the remote sites (for security purpose for instance), one should use 3 separate
Ethernet interfaces on the central site, and 1 point to point connection between each remote site and the central
site. In this case configure 3 independent connections as described in the previous section ( 7.3.2.2 -).

Remote site 1

Eth/2xVC3
Central site

SD H

Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Ethernet 1 Gigabit
Eth/2xVC3
Eth/1xVC3

Ethernet 1 Gigabit Remote site 3

Remote site 2
Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Figure 7-28 : EPLAN service

7.3.2.3.1 - Configuring the GFP2500 card of the central site

Login on the ADR2500 eXtra of the central site to open the Shelfview GUI screen. On this screen, click on the
GFP2500 card then on the GE Ports link.

Configuring the Ethernet interface


Click on the Interface Settings link. Choose the Network Interface mode "UNI-N".

Note : The Ethernet interface of the remote equipment (switch, IP router, PC, ) connected to the GFP2500
card MUST always be configured the same way. Due to possible interoperability issues with Auto-
Negotiation between equipment from different origins, this feature (Automatic option) should preferably
not be used.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-21
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tab. Configure the connections of VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22 of the GFP2500 card as
usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 1.

Configure the connections VC3#2_1 and VC3#2_22 of the GFP2500 card as usual in order to have end-to-end
SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 2.

Configure the connections from VC3#3_1 of the GFP2500 card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH
connectivity between the central site and remote site 3.

Configuring the VCGs

By proceeding in the same way as to the 7.3.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface create a group of 2
concatenated VC3 that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic (VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22).

Select interface VCG#2 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 2 VC3 to this VCG (VC3#2_1and
VC3#2_22).

Select interface VCG#3 and redo the same operation to add 1VC3 to this VCG (VC3#3_1).

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1, VCG#2 and VCG#3 are set with default configuration. We
choose to keep the default options for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1,#2,#3 (VC3)
and the number of constituting VC members (2,2,1).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Mon." and click on "Apply " in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-25). Repeat with VCG#2 and VCG#3.

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the Switch link, then on "New" in the table. Enter 2 as new S-Vlan Id, select "Add" as Tag Process,
choose the 802.1ad priority then click on Apply in order to create it. A new screen comes up in order to
associate ports to this S-Vlan.

Select the Ethernet GE:1 interface, the Classification based on "C-Vlan", the value of the C-Vlan tag in the input
frames "10", the trTCM policing algorithm, enter 200Mbps for the CIR and PIR. The CBS value is left to default
value.
Click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2.

Click on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#1 interface, choose the Classification based on "Port" and metering values then click
on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2

Click again on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#2 interface, choose the Classification based on "Port" and metering values then click
on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2

Click again on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#3 interface, choose the Classification based on "Port" and metering values then click
on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2

To check the configuration, click on the S-Vlan List link. A table displays all the S-Vlan configured on the card.
Select one S-Vlan and click on the "S-Vlan Configuration" > "Port List" link in order to identify the ports which
are associated for it.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-22 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.2.3.2 - Configuring the GFP2500 cards of the remote sites

The GFP2500 cards of the remote sites must be configured as described in the previous section
( 7.3.2.1 -). However the VCG#1,2,3, the policing rates (100Mbps or 50Mbps) and the right number of VC3
(2 or 1) must be configured appropriately for each remote site 1, 2 and 3. See the topology figure of this
example.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connections


Once both GFP2500 cards at the ends of a connection are configured, the Ethernet interfaces should be
activated.

Click on the GE Ports link and then on the Interface Settings link. For interface GE:1 , tick ifAdminStatus up
and click on Apply.

7.3.2.3.3 - Connectivity check


Take again the procedure of the paragraph 7.3.2.1.2 - to do controls, by checking each link.

7.3.2.4 - Bus interconnection : service EPLAN

In the network below, we setup an Ethernet 1 Gigabit LAN spanning over 4 sites connected to an
ADR2500 eXtra.

In this example, sites 2 and 4 play the role of a full bridge : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between all
remote sites based on MAC address learning.

Each inter-site link of the bus topology is configured to transport a load of 100Mbps (2 VC3). Similarly, on each
ADR2500 eXtra the Ethernet interface connected to the bus is policed at 100Mbps.

Site n1 Site n3
Eth/2xVC3 Eth/2xVC3
SDH

Ethernet 1 Gigabit
Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Eth/2xVC3
Eth/2xVC3

Site n4
Site n2

Ethernet 1 Gigabit Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Figure 7-29 : EPLAN Service - "bus" mode

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-23
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.2.4.1 - Configuring the GFP2500 cards of sites 1 and 3


The GFP2500 cards of sites 1 and 3 must be configured as described in the previous section ( 7.3.2.2 -).

7.3.2.4.2 - Configuring the GFP2500 cards of sites 2 and 4


For sites 2 and 4, the configuration of functional blocks VCG, Connection and Ethernet Switch is different from
the two other sites.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tap. Configure the connections of VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22 of the GFP2500 card as
usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between each middle site (2 or 4) and each edge site
(respectively 1 or 3).

Configure the connections VC3#2_1 and VC3#2_22 of the GFP2500 card as usual in order to have end-to-end
SDH connectivity between both middle sites (2 and 4).

Configuring the VCGs

By proceeding in the same way as to the 7.3.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface create the virtually concatenated
group of 2 VC3 that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic (VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22).

Select interface VCG#2 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 2 VC3 to this VCG (VC3#2_1 and
VC3#2_22).

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 and VCG#2 are set with the default configuration: Admin Status
at Up, "Network Interface" at "E-NNI", LCAS at Yes and FCS at No. We choose to keep the default
options for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 and VCG#2 (VC3) and the number of
constituting VC members (2).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Mon." and click on "Apply" in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-25). Repeat with VCG#2.

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the Switch link, then on "New" in the table. Enter 2 as new S-Vlan Id, select "Add" as Tag Process,
choose the 802.1ad priority then click on Apply in order to create it. A new screen comes up in order to
associate ports to this S-Vlan.

Select the Ethernet GE:1 interface, the Classification based on "C-Vlan", the value of the C-Vlan tag in the input
frames "35-37", the trTCM policing algorithm, enter 100Mbps for the CIR and PIR. The CBS value is left to
default value.
Click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2.

Click on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#1 interface, choose the Classification based on "S-Vlan" and metering values then
click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2

Click again on the Add Port link


Select the Ethernet VCG#2 interface, choose the Classification based on "S-Vlan" and metering values then
click on "Add" to complete the addition of this port to S-Vlan 2

To check the configuration, click on the S-Vlan List link. A table displays all the S-Vlan configured on the card.
Select one S-Vlan and click on the "S-Vlan Configuration" > "Port List" link in order to identify the ports which
are associated for it.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-24 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connections


Once both GFP2500 cards at the ends of a connection are configured, the GE interfaces should be activated.

Click on the GE Ports link and then on the Interface Settings link. For interface GE:1, tick ifAdminStatus up
and click on Apply.

7.3.2.4.3 - Connectivity check


Take again the procedure of the paragraph 7.3.2.1.2 - to do controls, by checking each link.

7.3.2.5 - Bus interconnection : service EVPLAN

In the network below, we setup two Ethernet 1 Gigabit LAN full duplex spanning over 4 sites connected to an
ADR2500 eXtra.

To the difference of the EPLAN service, the two LAN use the same VCG to circulate, it is possible with the
sharing in the same VCG. The two created S-Vlan must be in Tag Process "Add".

In this example, 2 and 4 sites play the role of a full bridge : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between all
remote sites based on MAC address learning.

Each inter-site link of the bus topology is configured to transport a load of 200Mbps (4 VC3). Similarly, on each
ADR2500 eXtra, the Ethernet interface connected to the bus is policed at 100Mbps.

Site n1
Site n3
Eth/4xVC3 Eth/4xVC3

SDH Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Ethernet 1 Gigabit Eth/4xVC3

Site n4
Site n2 Eth/4xVC3

Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Figure 7-30 : EVPLAN Service - "bus" mode

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-25
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.3 - Implementation of the OAM-CC function (Operation Administration


Maintenance - Continuity Check) on the GFP2500 card
The OAM function (Operation Administration Maintenance) in the GFP card, is used to supervise the customer
traffic.

This function consists in the broadcast and receipt of specific messages to supervise customer traffic. This
allows to know the state of the network, in relation to the progress of this flux.
It is based on the IEEE-802.1ag norm. The supervision frames for broadcast and receipt are named frames
CC : Continuity Check.

Below an example of utilization of the OAM function:

NNI
NNI
CE UNI-N UNI-N
SDH Network
CE

ADR2500 eXtra N1 S-Vlan ADR2500 eXtra N 2

Probe Source OAM-CC

Probe Sink OAM-CC

Figure 7-31 : Example of OAM utilization

The OAM-CC function is constituted of source and sink probes:

A source probe that transmits a multicast frame periodically (by default 10 seconds in the extra) toward
sink probes. A probe source can transmit towards several sink probes.
A sink probe that treats the multicast frame, and a time-out (by default 10 seconds in the eXtra).

In the example of the figure 8-41, a source probe is declared in the equipment N1 and a sink probe in the
equipment N2 on the same S-Vlan, that allows the monitoring of the S-Vlan customer traffic between
equipment N1 and equipment N2 in one direction

To supervise the other direction of this S-Vlan it is necessary to add two supplementary probes, a source probe
on the equipment N2 and a sink probe on the equipment N1.

The OAM-CC function manages 2 supervision alarms :

OAM Degraded : in this case it is the loss of one up to three consecutive CC frames
OAM Defect : in this case it is the loss of at least four consecutive CC frames.
The period between two OAM frames is configurable : 10s by default.

The number of source probes is limited to 256 and the number of sink probes is limited to 256, per GFP2500
card.

The frame multicast OAM is not distributed on the UNI-N port (customer), it is distributed on NNI ports.

The OAM CC multicast MAC address is by default: 01-80-C2-00-00-67.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-26 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Notes :
- The periodic OAM defect, can mean that network capacity for the VCG are not adjusted, and that congestions
appear (example : a VC link loss in a VCG with LCAS).
- No OAM probe must be activated on a flow created between a GFP2500 card and a 4E/FE or xGE-DM card.
The provider OAMcc frames are not filtered by the 4E/FE or xGE-DM cards and are forwarded to the customer
network.

7.3.4 - Implementation of Quality of Service features of GFP2500 card

7.3.4.1 - QoS functions of GFP2500 card

The GFP2500 card provides various QoS functions ; these functions format outgoing traffic flows on all
interfaces ; namely :

Traffic is forwarded in compliance with a pre-configured Service Level Agreement (SLA)


Committed and peak rates are guaranteed for every traffic flow

The QoS functions implemented on the GFP2500 card are:


definition of guaranteed rate contracts per traffic flow
congestion management of traffic flows in agreement with their conformity to contracts

Functional diagram

The GFP2500 QoS can be represented by the following diagram. It includes:


a block of metering and policing,
four waiting queues : 3 queues (TC0,1,2) in WRR (Weight Round Robin ) and one queue (TC3) in SP (Strict
Priority)
a scheduler mechanism for outgoing theses packets of theses queues toward the exit port.

The object of this mechanism is to encourage an important customer by report on a lower customer in
aggregate traffic to respect times of latency associated to every class of service.

The egress treatment (side port broadcast) permits a differentiated treatment according to the priority of the
S-Vlan with these different queues of transmission (TC: Traffic Class) as well as the means of outgoing
(scheduling in priority the SP (Strict Priority) file until its shaping is reached).

This diagram applies to all ports : the 2 Ethernet interfaces plus the 22 Ethernet over SDH interfaces. All
functions are configured separately per port.

SLA Counters

Toward SDH
SCHEDULER switch fabric
From File TC 0
Ethernet GREEN GREEN WRR
File TC 1
Metering Policing
YELLOW YELLOW File TC 2
SP
File TC 3
RED
%Shaping

Ingress Egress VC3-nV or VC4-nV

Figure 7-32 : QoS architecture

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-27
GFP2500-2GE CARD

QoS management - Rate control

Rate control of GFP2500 card compares the temporal characteristics of received traffic (based on the rate and
size of bursts) with a contract subscribed by the customer sending this traffic. This type of contract is commonly
called a Service Level Agreement (SLA).

In the first stage, the temporal characteristics of the actual traffic flow are measured (metering). By comparing
them to the configured profile (or contract), each frame is colored according to the following rule:
Green : the frame is in profile
Yellow : the frame is partially out of profile
Red : the frame is entirely out of profile

The GFP2500 card provides counters displaying the number of frames associated with each color.

In a second stage, all frames run through the policing function and all Red frames are dropped. Only Green and
Yellow frames can progress.

Metering of the GFP2500 card is based on two IETF standards that can be selected via configuration:
Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) per the IETF RFC 2697
Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) per the IETF RFC 2698

When an interface is added to a S-Vlan, a traffic profile must be configured to be used with traffic entering that
interface.

Traffic profiles
Traffic profiles use the following parameters on the GFP2500 card:

Parameter Description Unit srTCM trTCM


CIR Committed Information Rate Kbps YES YES
PIR Peak Information Rate Kbps NO YES
CBS Committed Burst Size KB YES YES

Figure 7-33 : Traffic profile

The QoS parameters strictly apply to the Ethernet traffic. The overhead generated by GFP encapsulation is not
accounted for in these rates.

srTCM (single rate Three Color Marker) :


A srTCM meter is useful for policing of a service where only the length and not the peak rate of the burst
determine its eligibility. Metering is based on a Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the associated burst size :
Committed Burst Size (CBS). A packet is set compliant (green) if its rate is less or equal to the CIR or if its excess
rate does not exceed the CBS. If its excess rate exceeds the CBS, it is set non compliant (red).

trTCM (two rate Three Color Marker) :


A trTCM meter is useful for policing of a service where a peak rate (PIR) needs to be enforced separately from a
committed rate (CIR). Metering is based on two rates : Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information
Rate (CIR) and the associated burst size : Committed Burst Size (CBS). A packet is set non compliant (red) if its
rate exceeds the PIR. A packet is set compliant (green) if its rate is less or equal to the CIR or if its excess rate
does not exceed the CBS. Otherwise it is set partially compliant (yellow).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-28 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Congestion avoidance and buffer management

The GFP2500 card uses a standard algorithm to control the distribution of resources between classes of service
WRR (Weight Round Robin) and SP (Strict Priority) in order to manage congestion phases.

The QOS configuration in the GFP2500 holds account of the priority information affected to every aggregate
customer. The priority affectation to a customer is done according to a SLA (service level agreement), via the
field configuration "CoS for S-Vlan Id based on 802.1ad priority" field configuration by clicking on "S-Vlan List
> CoS" link (between 0 and 7 and user defined). To a priority data (configured for the S-Vlan on UNI-N or E-NNI
ports or extracted from tag priority on the I-NNI ports) corresponds a traffic class :

User Priority 0,1 => TC0 (WRR)


User Priority 2,3 => TC1 (WRR)
User Priority 4,5 => TC2 (WRR)
User Priority 6,7 => TC3 (Strict Priority)

In the current version of GFP2500 card, congestion can happen on transmission on an Ethernet or an Ethernet
over SDH interface under the following two (non exclusive) circumstances:
In a point-to-multipoint topology, when traffic coming from several ports must be mixed for transmission over
another port of the GFP2500. There can be more or less transitory phases where the sum of incoming traffic
is significantly greater than the bandwidth available on the outbound port. Point-to-multipoint topologies
especially subject to this type of congestion are those involving an Ethernet over SDH port configured with a
small number of VCs.
Regardless of the actual topology, when a large quantity of traffic goes through the policing stage but with
the Yellow color (only partially compliant traffic). There can be more or less transitory phases where the
excess rate is actually too high to be transmitted fast enough over the outbound port. Traffic profiles
especially subject to this type of congestion are those with a large differential between the configured CIR
and PIR.

Some repetitive or lasting congestion problems generally require an evolution of the topology network.

7.3.4.2 - Configuring the QoS features

Configuring Metering and Policing, Classification

Examples above with Point-to-Point, Hub-and-Spoke and Bus topologies already describe the configuration of a
traffic profile when adding a new port to a S-Vlan (see Configuring the Ethernet Switch for each example).

Instructions are different to configure a traffic profile on ports already associated with a S-Vlan. Click on the
Switch link and on the S-Vlan List link. Select the case of the concerned S-Vlan and click on the
"S-Vlan Configuration" link. Then three commands are available :

Add Port : use this link to add a new port in a S-Vlan with a traffic profile
Delete Port : use this link to remove a port from a S-Vlan and remove the associated traffic profile
Modify Port : use this link to change the traffic profile associated with a S-Vlan configured on a port

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-29
GFP2500-2GE CARD

The following screen shows the configuration of a srTCM traffic profile on an Ethernet port.

Figure 7-34 : Configuring a srTCM profile

The following screen shows the configuration of a trTCM traffic profile on an Ethernet port.

Figure 7-35 : Configuring a trTCM profile

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-30 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

User Priority
The priority affectation to a customer (S-Vlan) is done via the "CoS for S-Vlan Id based on 802.1ad priority"
field configuration by clicking on "S-Vlan List > CoS" link (between 0 and 7 and user defined). The values 6 and
7 are the most important values because they use the SP (Figure 7-11 : Class of Priority).

Parameters regulating for Classes of Service


The GFP2500 card rules the reserved bandwidth for the SP queue (SP Bandwidth%). To read theses
informations, click on the "Switch" link then on the "Global CoS" link ; the following screen is then displayed :

Figure 7-36 : Reading Traffic Classes parameters

Bandwidth (CoS0,1,2) : this parameter allows to limit the rate at exit of a class of traffic to a certain percentage
of the band-width of the port. A value of 100% of this parameter means that there is no more limitation.

WRR (CoS0,1,2) : (Weight Round Robin) weights used by the mechanism of unstacking of the classes of traffic
0 to 2 (scheduling). More the weight is high more the associated CoS will emit frames.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-31
GFP2500-2GE CARD

To change the bandwidth, click on the "Switch" link then on the "Advanced" link, select the port to be modified.

Figure 7-37 : Regulating Traffic Classes SP parameters

SP Bandwidth % (1-100%) : Translation in percentage of configured bandwidth for Strict Priority waiting queue.
This queue encourages flux latency times that are affected to it, but with a limited queue shaping in order to
keep bandwidth for WRR queues.

Port shaping : this parameter allows to limit the rate at exit of a port to a certain percentage of the max band-
width of the port. A value of 100% of this parameter means that there is no more limitation.

Reading the counters associated to a S-Vlan

The GFP2500 card provides counters with the quantity of compliant (green), partially compliant (yellow) and
non-compliant (red) traffic received on a specific interface for a specific S-Vlan. Click on the Switch link and on
the S-Vlan SLA Counters link. In the first part of the screen, for each S-Vlan select the concerned ports and
click on "Apply". In the second part of the screen, select the port for which to look at the counters. The number
of selected ports is limited to 14 per GFP2500-2GE ; when the Master port of 802.3ad Link aggregation is
selected, it will cost 2 counters.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-32 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Figure 7-38 : SLA compliance counters

The GFP2500 card also offers supplementary counters by port and S-Vlan. To read these counters, click on the
"Switch" link then on the "S-Vlan Port Counters" link. In the top window, select the GE and VCG ports on which
one wants these counters. The number is limited to 2.
In the below window, select the wanted port for the visualization.

Figure 7-39 : S-Vlan Port counters

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-33
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.5 - Implementation of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the


GFP2500 card

7.3.5.1 - Description of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP2500 card

The GFP2500 card enables activation of the "Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol" (MSTP), standard Ethernet
protocol defined in IEEE 802.1S.

MSTP can remove loops in an Ethernet network setup with redundant links. Without MSTP, these loops are
forbidden by the Ethernet standard to avoid a "broadcast storm ". With a loop and no MSTP, all broadcast
frames or unicast frames with an unknown address are endlessly replicated on all the links to the point where
the whole bandwidth is consumed.

In simple topologies such as point-to-point, hub-and-spoke or bus, MSTP is not necessary.

However, in ring or meshed topologies, MSTP is recommended since the network contains Ethernet loops.

Notes :
- A SDH loop to activate SDH protection mechanisms does not imply a loop at the Ethernet level. Ethernet links
are terminated by Ethernet ports or Ethernet over SDH ports.
- MSTP must be desable on a flow created between a GFP2500 card and a 4E/FE or xGE-DM card. The
provider BPDU MSTP frames are not filtered by the 4E/FE or xGE-DM cards and are forwarded to the customer
network.

On the GFP2500 card MSTP can be turned ON/OFF at a global level first. Then, once globally activated, each
port Ethernet or Ethernet over SDH can be included or not in the Spanning Tree. Once a port is configured with
MSTP, the protocol controls transmission over this port. Namely, MSTP can block transmission on the port
momentarily or until MSTP converges again following a link loss on an Ethernet port.

The MSTP protocol on the GFP2500 card permanently exchanges control packets called "BPDUs " with all
other GFP2500 or GFP150 cards running MSTP in the network. These packets are only forwarded on links
included in the Spanning Tree by configuration.

Note : In the present configuration, only the S-Vlan of which the identifying is between 4032 and 4094 can use
MSTP. Therefore, MSTP can only be used on 63 S-Vlan.

Warning :
- The S-Vlan Id of an activated S-Vlan cannot be modified ; this S-Vlan must be formerly suppressed.
- The sharing of a S-Vlan using MSTP (S-Vlan Id from 4032 to 4094) with a S-Vlan without MSTP (S-Vlan Id
from 2 to 4031) can possibly break the traffic associated to the S-Vlan without MSTP because of the port state
in the CIST.

CIST and MSTI definition


CIST (Common Instance Spanning Tree) manages a region, when more than 63 instances are used.
MSTI (Multi Spanning Tree Instance) manages a VLAN.
CIST and MSTI are independent .
Each MSTI is independent of the others. Each MSTI corresponds to one and only one VLAN.

Port MSTP state


Once a port is included in the Spanning Tree, MSTP compute the state of the port based both on the
information of the BPDUs received from the network as well as the transitions of the operational state of any
local port (in case of link loss/recovery for example).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-34 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Each MSTP port is managed by two different informations PORT STATE and PORT ROLE.

"PORT STATE" can be:


"DISABLED" : The port is not included in the MSTP Protocol. This happens when the physical port is
disconnected or when MSTP is deactivated by configuration on that port.
"FORWARDING" : The port is included in the MSTP Protocol and is connected ; it can transmit and receive
frames.

"PORT ROLE" can be:


"DISCARDING" : The MSTP protocol decided to block transmission on the port to avoid an Ethernet loop.
Once a port in this state, it cannot receive or transmit any kind of Ethernet frame, except for MSTP BPDUs
that it continues to manage.
"BACKUP" : The MSTP protocol decided to block transmission on the port to avoid an Ethernet loop. This
state indicates the bridge has received its owner frame.
"LEARNING" : The port is going to transit to "DISCARDING " or "FORWARDING " state depending on the
result of MSTP convergence. No other Ethernet frame than BPDUs are received or transmitted on that port
in this state. However, in this state, MAC address learning starts for frames received on that port.
"DESIGNATED" : The port is completely functional. The port transmits data and learning @MAC.
"ROOT" : The port is completely functional. The port transmits data and learning @MAC. The root port is
the shortest way to the Root Bridge .

The following example displays a network with an Ethernet loop annihilated by MSTP. It shows the principle of
convergence towards a Tree topology ("Multiple Spanning Tree ") with a node elected as root of the tree ("Root
Bridge ").

Root Port
1
Bridge C

Designated
Port
2 Bridge A
3

Designated
1 1
Ports
Bridge Z Bridge D
Root Ports Blocking
(Root)
2

Root Ports
Designated 4
Port
3 1

Bridge B 2

1
Bridge E

Designated
Ports

Forwarding frames between Root ports and Designated ports

Figure 7-40 : MSTP port types

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-35
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Controlling MSTP convergence


A specific MSTP cost can be configured on every port (port priority), and on every Bridge (Bridge priority) in
order to control the Tree topology of the network during stable phases. At times where there is no link loss on
any port, either Ethernet or Ethernet over SDH. Naturally, redundant links blocked by MSTP during stable
phases can be unblocked when a link is lost in the network. Later, when the link failure is fixed and the primary
link comes back up, MSTP re-converges towards the stable topology and blocks back the redundant links.

Transparency of MSTP on the GFP2500


Per IEEE 802.1D standard, MSTP BPDUs must be sent with a reserved multicast address as MAC destination :
01-80-C2-00-00-00 ("Bridge Group Address "). By default, the GFP2500 card uses the address :
01-80-C2-00-00-08.

However, the MSTP implementation on the GFP2500 card supports configuration of a different multicast
address (standard : 01-80-C2-00-00-00 or non standard : inside the range 01-80-C2-00-00-04 to 01-80-C2-00-
00-0F) for use by the protocol. Using a different address does not change the MSTP algorithm at all. It is just a
way to distinguish the BPDUs sent by the GFP2500 card from BPDUs sent by any other Ethernet bridge (which
would logically use the standard address).

The GFP2500 cards are useful to interconnect client Ethernet LANs across a network providers backbone
(Ethernet over SDH). There can be cases where the clients themselves would be running STP between their
remote sites. By using a non standard address only known by the ADR2500 eXtra, the GFP2500 card can
transport BPDUs coming from client networks in a totally transparent manner.

This way, the STP protocol in the operator network is completely isolated from any MSTP instances running in
the client networks. Moreover, the ADR2500 eXtra ensures continuity of clients STP across remote client sites.

Note : It is recommended not to activate MSTP on the Ethernet ports unless otherwise required by the
topology. It is generally useless to activate the operator MSTP on ports connected to client networks.

7.3.5.2 - MSTP Licence Activation on a GFP2500 card

The MSTP utilization by the GFP2500 card is submitted to a Licence. To activate this Licence, proceed as
following :

1) note the GFP2500 MAC address on which the MSTP Licence must be activated
2) provide these informations to the Hotline via phone or E-MAIL to get the Licence key
3) enter the MSTP Licence key (32 characters) provided by the Hotline, via the "MSTP > Licence Activation"
menu, then click on Apply.

Figure 7-41 : MSTP Licence Activation

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-36 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Note :

An alarm "No MSTP Licence" of card level is activated if at least one port has a MSTP configuration to ON and
if the MSTP licence is not activated.
The severity of this alarm is major and no configurable.

7.3.5.3 - Example of MSTP configuration

Use the previous example with a bus topology. Just a redundant link between the remote ADR2500 eXtra 1 and
3 is added. The final topology works like a ring.

First the 4 ADR2500 eXtra should be configured according to the instructions of the bus topology section of this
document (*). Then, the three steps below should be followed in order to :

1. Configure the redundant link (*).


2. Activate MSTP on all ports of the bus (as well as on the redundant link)
3. Turn ON the redundant link

Once the link is activated, one should see that MSTP puts each end of the redundant link in the "DISCARDING"
state. All other ports of the bus go in "FORWARDING" state.

(*) Warning : the used S-Vlan for MSTP should have a VMAM Id between 4032 and 4094 ; it will be 4032 for
this example.

Site n1 Eth/4xVC3 Site n3

Eth/4xVC3
SDH Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Eth/4xVC3
Eth/4xVC3

Site n4
Site n2
Ethernet 1 Gigabit
Ethernet 1 Gigabit

Figure 7-42 : Example of MSTP configuration

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-37
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Bus configuration

See the bus section in this document. ( 7.3.2.4 -)

Configuring the redundant link between the ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3

Configure the VCG#2 port on ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3 with the same instructions as for VCG#2 between
ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4.

In the end, ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3 must be connected via VCG#2 configured with 6 VC12 and included in the
same S-Vlan as all other ports (S-Vlan Id "4032").

Note : The link is not activated yet in order to avoid creating an Ethernet loop in the network before MSTP is
running.

Activating MSTP on ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4

Click on the "MSTP" link then on the "Bridge settings" link of the GFP2500 card. Set the "MSTP Procotol"
parameter at the "MSTP " value and click on "Apply ".

Figure 7-43 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (1)

The default values of fields of the Bridge Configuration screen are those of the 802.1d norm ; to optimize the
times of convergence of the MSTP protocol, it is necessary to adjust the parameters "Forward Delay",
"Hello Time" and "Max Age".

The other parameters allow to configure MSTP according to the user's. Before modify these fields, read the
802.1s standard.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-38 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Click on the "Port Settings" link. Verify that the VCG#1 and VCG#2 ports are "Enable" and others fields at
default value ; if not, change them and click on Apply.

Figure 7-44 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (2)

Activating MSTP on ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3

To activate MSTP on cards n1 and n3, repeat previous step.

Activating the redundant link

On ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3, the VCG#2 interfaces are activated :


Click on the VCG link of the GFP2500 and then on the Settings link. Set the Admin Status of interface
VCG#2 to Up and click on Apply.

Once the two interfaces are activated, MSTP starts exchanging BPDUs across the new link and a new state is
calculated. However, after a few seconds each port of this link goes in "BLOCKING" state thanks to the
difference in "Path Cost " over the ring. Except for MSTP BPDUs, no Ethernet frame is forwarded over this link.

Connectivity check

It is possible to check a MSTI state on a GFP2500-2GE card.

Click on the "MSTP" link then on the "MSTI List" link.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-39
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Figure 7-45 : MSTI Checking (1)

Select MSTI Id 1and click on the MSTI-Port Informations and Settings link to see the next panel.

All selected MSTI port state can be verified.

Figure 7-46 : MSTI Checking (2)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-40 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.6 - Implementation of LCAS on the GFP2500 card

7.3.6.1 - Description of LCAS


The GFP2500 card enables activation of the standard protocol "Link Capacity Adjustment System" (LCAS)
independently on each of the 22 VCGs.

LCAS is useful to :
Dynamically add or remove VC members from a VCG without deactivating the VCG (reducing traffic
disturbance)
Dynamically adjust the available bandwidth when alarms are triggered ON/OFF on the VC members of a
VCG. The bandwidth of every VC under failure is subtracted from the VCG bandwidth. Hence, in case of
failures the VCG continues to forward traffic as long as there is still at least one operational VC.

Without LCAS :
The GFP2500 card requires deactivation of a VCG before VC members can be added or removed (it forces
a traffic interruption)
A VCG becomes completely broken as soon as an alarm is triggered on at least one VC member. Plus, it
becomes operational again only once no VC is under failure anymore.

In order to run, LCAS only needs to be activated on both ends of a VCG. LCAS is transparent for the SDH
backbone point of view. Once both ends of a VCG are configured with LCAS they start exchanging control
information in the SDH overhead (namely, in the multi-frame of virtual concatenation).

LCAS can be used as a mechanism to protect transmission of Ethernet traffic : when a part of the VCs of a VCG
fail, transmission continues with the remaining operational VCs.

This protection mechanism makes sense only if the VCs of a VCG are not all configured the same way across
the SDH network :
Either they must take different path via independent SDH links ;
Or a part of the VCs must be protected at the SDH level (SNC, etc.) ;
Or some of both.

7.3.6.2 - Example of LCAS configuration

We use again the point-to-point connection example described earlier in this document. The VCs just use two
different SDH paths. The LCAS option is at Yes by default.

Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the Connection tap. Configure the connections VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22 of the GFP2500 card in way
where 1 VC3 go through a SDH card and the other VC3 go through a second SDH card. Make sure you have
end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote ADR2500 eXtra.

Configuring the VCG

By proceeding in the same way as to the 7.3.2.1.1 -, for the VCG#1 interface create a group of 2
concatenated VC3 that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic (VC3#1_1 and VC3#1_22).

Click on the Settings link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration. This screen also displays the
type of VCG#1 (VC3) and the number of constituting VC members (2).

Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Mon." and click on "Apply" in order to start
monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-25).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-41
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.7 - Implementation of the Link Aggregation Function (Trunk) on the


GFP2500 card

7.3.7.1 - GE Trunk function

The Link aggregation function implemented in the GFP card allows to define a logical Ethernet interface made
up of 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports.
This function consists in offering an interface having a physical rate of 2 Gigabit. The distribution of the traffic on
the physical Gigabit Ethernet ports is based on the value of the MAC addresses source and destination of the
entering frames.
The configuration of the logical interface is that of the port defined as being the MASTER.
If one of the Gigabit Ethernet links had suddenly been defective, the logical link would function in degraded
mode with a capacity equal to that of the Gigabit Ethernet link always operational.

Below an example of use of the 802.3ad function :

I-NNI
I-NNI
CE UNI-N GE :1 UNI-N
GE :1
SDH Network
GE :2
GE :2 CE
UNI-N
UNI-N
ADR2500 eXtra N1 S-Vlan ADR2500 eXtra N 2

Figure 7-47 : Example of 802.3ad use

Figure 7-48 : GE Trunk Function

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-42 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.3.7.2 - VCG Trunk function

VCG trunk function defines a logical interface made up of 2 VCG ports. GFP2500 card supports up to 2 groups
of VCG trunk.
To create a VCG trunk, the bandwidth of both VCG ports must be more than 100Mbps, and it is recommended
that both VCG ports have the same bandwidth.
A VCG trunk offers a logical interface with a physical rate that equals to the sum of the bandwidth of both VCG
ports.The distribution of the traffic on the physical VCG ports is based on the value of the source and destination
MAC addresses of the frames.
The configuration of the logical interface is applied through the VCG port defined as MASTER.
If one of the two VCG ports had suddenly been defective, the logical link would function in degraded mode with
a capacity equal to one VCG port.

Figure 7-49 : VCG Trunk Function

7.3.7.3 - Trunk function alarms

For both GE trunk and VCG trunk, the 802.3ad function manages 2 alarms

Degraded : one of the two physical Gigabit Ethernet ports has an "Operstatus" at down
Defect : the two physical Gigabit Ethernet ports have an "Operstatus" at down

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-43
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.4 - A FEW RULES FOR SET-UP

7.4.1 - Various configuration rules

1. The configuration of the Ethernet interface must be identical between the GFP2500 card and the
transmission equipment present on the LAN. It is preferable to use the manual modes rather than the
"auto negotiation" mode because of the incompatibility of operation of this mode between certain
equipment.

2. The changes of configuration of VCG interface (LCAS, FCS) must be done when the interface is "OFF"
(Admin Status ticked "Down"). The interface is configured to "ON " (Admin Status ticked "Up") when
configurations of the 2 extremities of the link are effective. However, when LCAS is activated on a VCG
interface and when this interface is itself in the state "ON ", it is possible to modify the VCG composition
(add/delete VC members) without putting the interface "OFF" before. In this case, these modifications are
directly taken into account.

3. For each VCG, it is preferable to configure the FCS parameter to "No ".

7.4.2 - QoS configuration rules


It is necessary to respect the following rules, when configuring the QoS :
1. For each customer Ethernet interface, corresponding CIR and PIR must be under 1Gigabit/sec.
2. For each Ethernet over SDH interface with associated CIR and PIR, the VCG payload must be upper
CIR + 0.1*(PIR-CIR) (corresponding to the Connection Automatic Control feature).

7.5 - APPLICATIONS

7.5.1 - Meshed networks


In topologies of the type "shared LAN", in multipoint to multipoint (EPLAN or EVPLAN), it is necessary to avoid
to create Ethernet loops between GFP2500 cards or between GFP2500 and GFP150 cards (site 1 to 2, 2 to 3
and 1 to 3).
- either to avoid to create Ethernet loops by construction of the links, which makes unnecessary the
activation of MSTP
- or to activate the "Multiple Spanning Tree " protocol (MSTP).

7.5.2 - Protection of channels


The VC4VC3 containers used by the GFP2500 card can be protected by SNCP mechanism as all other
VC4/VC3.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-44 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.5.3 - Degraded mode


When a virtual container (VC3 or VC4) used by the GFP2500 card is out of service, transmission folds back on
VC3/VC4 left (thanks to the LCAS protocol, when activated). In these conditions, transmission over an interface
is possible as long as there is at least one VC3 or VC4 available (for this interface).
When the VC3/VC4 comes back available, the VCG resynchronize automatically (thanks to the LCAS protocol)
and the transmission restarts over all the available VC3/VC4.

7.6 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.6.1 - Main characteristics


Main characteristics of the GFP2500 card in the ADR2500 eXtra are :
Default values of GFP header fields :
PFI field (Payload FCS Indicator ) is at 0 (absence of FCS on Payload)
Permanent values of GFP header fields :
PTI field (Payload Type Identifier) is at 000 (Data Client Frame)
EXI field (Extension Header Identifier) is at 0000 (Null Extension Header)
UPI field (User Payload Identifier) is at 0000 0001 (Frame-Mapped Ethernet)
Number of VCG per GFP2500 card : 1 to 22
Number of virtual containers per VCG :
- in STM4 mode : from 1 to 12 VC3 or from 1 to 4 VC4
- in STM16 mode : from 1 to 48 VC3 or from 1 to 16 VC4
VCG/VC4-nV and VCG/VC3-nV mixity allowed
Differential delay between VCG containers VC4/VC3 : 48ms maximum for VC4 and 48ms maximum for VC3
Ethernet interface 1 Gigabit full duplex
MTU is 1548 bytes (including @dest, @src, lgd frame and FCS), which allows to transport the ISL protocol.
Frames which length is under 64 bytes are rejected.
In validated PAUSE mode (Flow control), the PAUSE frames are generated and managed.
In no validated PAUSE mode, the received PAUSE frames are thrown and no PAUSE frame is generated.
The received PAUSE frames are only counted in the "InPauseFrames" counter.
The transmitted PAUSE frames are only counted in the "OutPauseFrames" counter.
The MAC address table runs in IVL mode (Independent VLAN Learning)
Ethernet frames with a reserved MAC destination address (01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-00-FF) are
transparently forwarded. It deviates from the IEEE recommendation for Ethernet bridges. However, this
design choice ensures continuity of the "client STP" across remote client sites. Naturally, if MSTP is
activated on the ADR2500 eXtra, frames received with the address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 (MAC STP address)
on MSTP ports will be transparently forwarded because the MSTP of ADR2500 eXtra uses the MAC
addresses 01-80-C2-00-00-04 to 01-80-C2-00-00-04F (by default 01-80-C2-00-00-08) (for more details, see
7.3.5.1 -).

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-45
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.6.2 - Ethernet rate / VCG rate


The object of this chapter is to help the user when configuring VCG regarding Ethernet rates on GFP2500 card
interfaces.

Concerning Ethernet rates :

The Ethernet rate configured for each interface of the GFP2500 card is corresponding to the payload
available at the Ethernet interface.
This rate corresponds to the MTU (from 64 to 1548 bytes including 6 Bytes @dest, 6 Bytes @src, 2 Bytes
lgd frame, 2 bytes and 4 Bytes FCS).
Knowing there is 12 intergap Bytes between 2 Ethernet frames which are outside the payload, and 8
preamble Bytes per Ethernet frame which are also outside the payload, when an Ethernet 1 Gigabit
interface is used to the maximum of its capacity (end to end frames at 1 Gigabit/sec), payload rate in 1
Gigabit is 762.9Mbit/sec for 64 Bytes MTU frames and 987.2Mbit/sec for 1548 Bytes MTU frames.
Because we dont control Ethernet frames lengths in a link, which may change from frame to frame, we
have to imagine the most critical case, in order to configure the VCG rate for the link. It should be noted that
the GFP protocol adds an 8 Bytes header (12 Bytes when the GFP FCS is ON), header taken into account
in 7.6.3 -and 7.6.4 -

Note that even if we know how to configure a CIR rate upper than 1 and under 1000 Mbit/sec at the customer
Ethernet interface, some normal limitations are to be taken into account :

The maximum rate is 987.2Mbit/sec with a limitation to 762.9Mbit/sec for a customer flow including only
64 Bytes length frames, even if the configuration is CIR=1000Mbit/sec.
When the VCG is a VC3-2V, the Ethernet rate is limited to 96.27Mbit/sec by taken into account the GFP
header in the VC3-2V payload (VC3-2V payload is 96.768Mbit/sec). It is impossible in this case to
obtain an Ethernet rate upper 96Mbit/sec.

7.6.3 - Number of VC4 in a VCG


VC4 payload is Dvc4 = 149.760 Mbit/sec.

We suppose customer Ethernet interfaces CIR and PIR in the link are already configured.

In point to point (EPLine service), the minimal number N of VC4 necessary for transmitting a CIR of
E Mbit/sec at the customer Ethernet interface is :

N = UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(E*1.125/Dvc4) and N7

This calculation takes into account GFP header with FCS OFF. When FCS is ON, replace 1.125 with 1.1875.

It should be noted that in this case, the customer Ethernet interface remote rate must equals E and we advise to
configure PIR=CIR.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-46 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
GFP2500-2GE CARD

Example :

If we suppose E=PIR=200Mbit/sec
We obtain N=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(200*1.125/149.760)=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(1.502)=2 (7)

In all cases, we advise after the configuration of customers interfaces Ethernet CIR/PIR and the corresponding
VCG to configure Ethernet over SDH interfaces CIR/PIR as CIR=PIR=VCG bandwidth.

7.6.4 - Number of VC3 in a VCG


VC3 payload is Dvc3=48.384 Mbit/sec.

We suppose customer Ethernet interfaces CIR and PIR in the link are already configured.

In point to point (EPLine service), the minimal number N of VC3 necessary for transmitting a CIR of
E Mbit/sec at the customer Ethernet interface is :

N = UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(E*1.125/Dvc3) and N21

This calculation takes into account GFP header with FCS OFF. When FCS is ON, replace 1.125 with 1.1875.

It should be noted that in this case, the customer Ethernet interface remote rate must equals E and we advise to
configure PIR=CIR.

Example :

If we suppose E=PIR=60Mbit/sec
We obtain N=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(60*1.125/48.384)=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(1.395)=2 (21)

In all cases, we advise after the configuration of customers interfaces Ethernet CIR/PIR and the corresponding
VCG to configure Ethernet over SDH interfaces CIR/PIR as CIR=PIR=VCG bandwidth.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 7-47
GFP2500-2GE CARD

7.7 - GFP2500-2GE CARD INTER-WORKING

7.7.1 - GFP2500-2GE card inter-working with xGE-DM card or 4E/FE card


of ADR155C

The xGE-DM or 4E/FE cards can only provide EPLine service that means the GFP2500-2GE card can inter-
work with the xGE-DM or 4E/FE cards only by configuration EPLine (Tag Process is None).

7.7.2 - GFP2500-2GE card inter-working with GFP150 card

The GFP150 card can provide EPLine, EVPLine, EPLAN, EVPLAN services. The GFP2500-2GE card inter-
working with the GFP150 card should follow four cases:

- EPLine service (point-to-point mode using dedicated VCG)


The GFP2500-2GE and GFP150 cards should both configure in EPLine.
At GFP2500-2GE side, Tag Process is None, VCG port is untagged and no SLA needed.
At GFP150 side, VCG port is untagged and no SLA needed.

- EVPLine service (point-to-point mode using shared VCG)


At GFP2500-2GE side, Tag Process is Add, VCG port should be E-NNI SVlan based and SLA
configuration is needed.
At GFP150 side, VCG port is tagged and SLA configuration is needed.

- EPLAN service (multipoint-to-multipoint mode using dedicated VCG)


At GFP2500-2GE side, Tag Process is Add, VCG port should be E-NNI Port based and SLA
configuration is needed.
At GFP150 side, VCG port is untagged and SLA configuration is needed.

- EVPLAN service (multipoint-to-multipoint mode using shared VCG)


At GFP2500-2GE side, Tag Process is Add, VCG port should be E-NNI SVlan based and SLA
configuration is needed.
At GFP150 side, VCG port is tagged and SLA configuration is needed.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page 7-48 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

A CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING


PLAN

This appendix provides a brief description of the rules implemented in building a TMN based on
an IP protocol stack.

A.1 - PRELIMINARY REMARKS

The IP protocol stack is used in a data transmission network to transport data in the form of
packets between two points in the network.
Depending on the ISO model, IP is the network layer protocol. It is therefore in charge, within
each node, of routing the packets so that they can be routed in the network.
The protocols located below the IP correspond to the link and physical layers: these protocols
set up the links between two consecutive nodes in the network.
The protocols "above" the IP (TCP and UDP) are transport layer protocols. These protocols fulfil
end-to-end data transmission between two distant points in the network. The protocols based
on the TCP/UDP are application-oriented: they provide services such as file transfer (TFTP on
UDP, FTP on TCP), equipment management (SNMP), mail transfer (SMTP), etc.
The figure below describes how the main protocols acting in a network node are stacked.

To downloading To operation
GUI server Automaton functions

GUI TFTP SNMP RIP OSPF

TCP UDP

ICMP IP

ARP MAC PPP

Ethernet EOC

Figure A-1 : IP protocol stack

Note: The MAC protocol is attached to the Ethernet physical port (point to multi-point media)
and the PPP protocol is attached to the physical ports ensuring the point-to-point links
(optical media, microwave, V11,...)

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A-1
CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

A.2 - IP ADDRESSING

To route packets within a node, the IP uses an addressing mechanism: depending on the
destination address contained in the packet, the IP determines (by scanning its routing table)
the nearby router to which it must send the packet and deduces the physical interface on which
the packet must be sent. The term "router" and "equipment" will be used indifferently in the
discussions which follow.

There are two non-exclusive ways to manage the IP routing tables:

by static routes entered by the operator,


by of a routing daemon (such as RIP, RIP2, OSPF) which dynamically manages the routing
tables through the network.
The IP addresses are coded in the form of 4 bytes and are usually represented in decimal form
(example: 135.11.33.115). An IP address is divided into 3 fields at most:

NET field located to the left,


subnet field located at center,
host field located to the right.

The length of the first field depends on the class to which the address belongs. The length of
the "subnet" and "host" fields is defined by a mask associated to the address. There are three
address classes:

class A: the NET field is coded on the first byte; the three other bytes are reserved for the
SUBNET and HOST fields. The class A addresses vary from 1.0.0.0 to 126.255.255.254 ,
class B: the NET field is coded on the first two bytes; the other two bytes are reserved for
the SUBNET and HOST fields. The class B addresses vary from 128.0.0.0 to
191.255.255.254 ,
class C: the NET field is coded on the first three bytes; the last byte is reserved for the
SUBNET and HOST fields. The class C addresses vary from 192.0.0.0 to
223.255.255.254. ; up to 254 equipment can belong to a single class C IP network (having the
same NET).

Note: Addresses beginning by 127 and addresses containing "1" or "0" in the SUBNET and
HOST fields are prohibited.

Note: The IP standard allows that the SUBNET and HOST fields be coded on a number
of bits which does not correspond to a byte border. In general, this is not implemented
for address readability reasons and since most of the routing daemon (RIP)
implementations do not support this function.

The SUBNET field is defined by a mask which is written in the form: 255.255.255.0,
255.255.0.0, 255.0.0.0, etc: the number of bits at zero in the right hand part of the mask defines
the length of the HOST field. Ex: for address 40.2.2.2 associated to mask 255.255.255.0, the
NET field takes the value 40, the SUBNET field takes the value 2.2 and the HOST field
takes the value 2.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page A-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

A.3 - ADDRESSING PLAN

A global IP network must be subdivided into N networks each having a "NET" number.
Within each network, each physical link (point-to-point or multipoint) has its own SUBNET
number.
Each equipment connected to this link (2 for a point-to-point link, N for an Ethernet segment)
has its own "HOST" number.
Depending on the number of equipment and links, class A, B and C addresses and
SUBNETs encoded on one or two types will be used.
To conclude, a pair formed by an IP address and its SUBNET mask shall be associated to
each interface of a network node.

A.4 - USE OF STATIC TABLES

Where static tables are used, each network node must have its routing table completed to allow
it to correctly route the packets received.
All IP routes of a routing table for a given equipment comprise the following fields:

destination @IP: refers to the IP address of the equipment or sub-network (or even
network) to be reached from the given equipment,
subnet mask: sub-network mask associated to the IP address defined in destination
@IP ; all equipment whose IP address part defined by the 1 bits of this field correspond
to the same value as the destination @IP part defined by this same mask will be
reachable via this route,
next hop @IP: IP address of next equipment (connected directly with given equipment) to
which the packet will be sent,
metric (this can also be understood as "cost" or distance): value from 1 to 15 indicating the
number of hops to reach the equipment corresponding to the destination @IP address. 16
corresponds to infinite for the RIP routing daemon. This field is only used by a possible
routing daemon to choose a preferential route when several routes are available for the
same destination. This field can always be filled in with 1 to simplify if use of the field is not
necessary,
interf.: interface number for interface by which next equipment will be reached (whose IP
address is next hop @IP).

Note : When interface IP addresses are declared, implicit static routes are set up to the
associated SUBNETs. It is therefore not necessary to define static routes to join two
equipment belonging to a single SUBNET.
Note: The IP addresses of an equipment are the addresses of its interfaces (or ports)
configured. The manager only knows one IP address per equipment. Therefore, the so-
called Equipment IP address is often the address filled in the manager database. This
is the address of the port by which the equipment normally dialogues with the manager.
Note: To use an equipment via a PC and an Ethernet interface, the IP address of the
operation PC must be modified so that it belongs to the same SUBNET as the Ethernet
interface used to connect to the network.
We recommend that you leave the HOST 1 number free on each subnet, meaning that
you begin to number the equipment starting with the HOST 2 number. The PC will then
always take an IP address of the type: NET.SUBNET.1
Note : A default router can be defined (this option is sometimes available) to which all packets
which cannot be routed by the routing table are transmitted.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A-3
CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

The figure below gives an example of an IP network and routing tables associated to two typical
equipment. Note that each port on the on-board routing function corresponds to a different
SUBNET.

140.1.1.3

F3
140.1.0.2 140.1.0.3 140.1.1.2
Manager Fiber 140.1.1.4
F1 F2
Ethernet
128.1.0.1 128.1.0.2 F4

Ethernet 140.1.1.5
NET 128.1 128.1.0.3
NET 140 - 1 F5
F6
PPP1 150.1.0.2

Fiber Fiber

150.1.0.3
F7
150.1.1.2
Ethernet Ethernet

150.1.1.3 150.1.1.4 150.1.1.5

F8 F9 F10

NET 160.1 NET 150.1

Figure A-2 : Example TMN architecture

Configuration of ADR F6

Interfaces
Eth 128.1.0.3
Sub-network mask 255.255.0.0

PPP1 150.1.0.2
Sub-network mask 255.255.255.0

Other PPP None

Static routes
Dest @IP Subnet mask Next hop Interface Metric Remarks

140.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 128.1.0.2 eth 1 Entire NET 140.1


150.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 150.1.0.3 ppp1 1 Entire SUBNET 150.1.1

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page A-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

Configuration of ADR F8
Interfaces
Eth 150.1.1.3
Sub-network mask 255.255.255.0

Other PPP None

Static routes
Dest @IP Subnet mask Next hop Interface Metric Remarks

128.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 150.1.1.2 eth 2 Entire NET 128.1


140.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 150.1.1.2 eth 3 Entire NET 140.1
150.1.0.0 255.255.255.0 150.1.1.2 eth 1 Entire SUBNET 150.1.0

A.5 - USE OF RIP ROUTING DAEMON

The RIP routing daemon for TCP/IP networks is based on the area and Autonomous System
(AS) principles, each having a different NET number.
An area contains a set of routers in a single geographical space.
An autonomous system (AS) contains a set of areas organized hierarchically with a
backbone area.

The RIP routing daemon periodically distributes all of its routing table. This makes this protocol
slower than the OSPF protocol. On the other hand, the RIP selects its active routes only on
the basis of the number of hops, i.e. the number routers crossed in a AS to reach a network.
On the other hand, the metric used by the OSPF protocol integrates other parameters.

Each AS is a RIP routing domain limited to a distance of 15 hops (max.) between two
equipment exchanging packets within the AS . The maximum distance is taken into account
to include the worst case network protection scenario.
These ASs are separate with respect to each other (within RIP) and connected by isolation
networks. Each isolation network, formed by a single Ethernet or point-to-point link, has its own
NET number.

The interfaces used with equipment belonging to an isolation network must be filtered (RIP
filtering option activated on interfaces) to inhibit export of RIP routing table automatic updates.
This equipment uses "border" typed interfaces.

Within an "AS", all the equipment must have their RIP routing daemon activated. Within each
"AS", each link connecting two equipment is described by a specific SUBNET value.
Routing from one AS to another AS via an isolation network is described by static routes.
In the example given above, NET 128.1 corresponds to an isolation network and NET
160.1. and 150.1 correspond to ASs in which RIP protocols are active.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A-5
CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

A.6 - USE OF OSPF ROUTING DAEMON

The OSPF routing daemon for IP networks is based on the same principle as the RIP
daemon except that the OSPF computes the routes using several parameters defined by the
administrator: link rate, cost of communication, number of hops, etc. This protocol also provides
for routing on areas of unlimited size.

Within an autonomous system AS, the border routers do not distribute all the routes, but only
route intervals, thus eliminating the need for a portion of the static routing tables.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page A-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
OPTICAL BOOSTER

B OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.1 - INSTALLATION

B.1.1 - Access security level

Connectors Function Safety level

Power Access to station power supply SELV


Loops Access to dry loops SELV
Optical access points Optical access "IN" and "OUT" Class 1M Laser
Harmless in normal
operating conditions

Table B-1 : Access security level

Warning : The class 1M corresponds to a laser radiation which should not be observed
directly using optical instruments The safety level Laser class 1M (compliant to the standard
EN 60 825) is reinforced :
- On the one hand, by output power shutdown when the input power is under a defined
level (for example fiber breaking) or when the hood for the protection of plugs is opened.
- On the other hand, by a key switch which is authorized user's ownership.

B.1.2 - General information

The amplificateur booster is associated to the U16.2 card of an ADR2500 eXtra in order to supply a
regeneration section until 150 km.

This equipment is the subject of a separated Operation Manual "Optical Booster EDFA
(Er-Doped Fiber Amplifier)" N 288 107 383.

It appears as an independent module of 1U height, whose width is adaptable to 19" or ETSI size.
Booster depth is compatible with a 300-mm ETSI rack.

This equipment offers :

- one key switch


- one input optical access "IN" connected to the U16.2 card and one output optical access
"OUT" connected to the line ; these access points are protected by a hood
- one 48 V power supply connector " DC POWER "
- one connector with two alarm loops "ALARM PORT"
- one LCD display allowing the user to know the operation parameters of the booster ; this
display is associated to three keys of command
- one LED indicating the commissioning of the pump laser "POWER"
- one operation status LED "NORMAL"
- two alarms indicator LEDs "MAJOR" and "MINOR"
- an unused connector for RS232 access

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page B-1
OPTICAL BOOSTER

Protection Key Status LCD Keys of RS232 Power


hood. switch of and Display command Interface supply
Fibers the pump alarms
Pump laser Alarms
access laser LEDs status LED loops

Figure B-1 : Optical booster Installation in rack

Remark : At the time of an order with Sagem Communications, the customer can receive the optical
booster model below which provides the same functions and the same characteristics as that
presented in this user guide (User Guide 253 204 855-A).

B.1.3 - Installation

The optical booster can be installed in a 19" or ETSI rack. A mounting kit to adapt the equipment to
either one is supplied. This kit contains :

- a 19" left bracket


- an ETSI left bracket
- a 19" right bracket
- an ETSI right bracket
- a screws and flat washers kit

The mounting kit for installation of the equipment on the uprights of the 19" or ETSI rack, formed by 4
cage nuts and 4 screws, is not supplied with the equipment

Check that the unit's position in the rack does not prevent heat dissipation from other equipment ; to
do that, let 1 U between ADR2500 eXtra and booster.

Connect imperatively to the rack the pin ground located at the rear of the equipment.

No setting or configuration is needed on the equipment. All the parameters have been set in factory.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page B-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.1.4 - Connection of access points

B.1.4.1 - Optical ports

Figure B-2 : Optical booster Optical access points

The booster offers one input optical access "IN" and one output optical access "OUT", on
optical fiber compliant to the ITU-T G652 recommendation.

Open the hood and connect the output optical cable of the ADR2500 eXtra on the SC/PC
connection "IN" of the booster and the output optical cable of the booster "OUT" to the line.

Remark : opening the hood leads to an optical output shutdown, however, it is preferable to
make these connections without powered booster.

B.1.4.2 - Power port

The optical booster can be powered either by a PAPA or by all other power supply sources.

9-way HE5 male connector

5 1
9 6

Pin N Signal name


1 -48V1
6 OB1
2 -48V1
7 OB1
3 Reserved
8 OB2
4 -48V2
9 OB2
5 -48V2

NOTA : The shielding of the connector is connected to the equipment ground

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page B-3
OPTICAL BOOSTER

Power supply interface :

Input voltage : Two - 48 V power supply sources, TBTS type (Safety extra low
voltage)
Operating voltage range : - 36 V to - 60 V
Maximum voltage range : - 36 V to - 72 V
Power : 20 W max.

B.1.4.3 - Alarm loops

Two dry loops outputs (Common, Set, Reset) used as station alarm
These loops can be collected by the ADR2500 eXtra via the CCU card ("LOOPS" access points)

HE5 - 15 pins Female Connector


8 1
15 9

Pin N Signal name


1 Reserved
9 Reserved
2 Reserved
10 Reserved
3 Reserved
11 Reserved
4 Reserved
12 Minor R
5 Reserved
13 Minor C
6 Minor S
14 Major R
7 Reserved
15 Major C
8 Major S

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page B-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.2 - OPERATION

B.2.1 - General information

The equipment commissioning is realized by the switch key located on the front panel ; this key can
be removed either on the "ON" or "OFF" position.

The equipment monitoring is performed by :

- one LCD display controlled by three push buttons


- one LED indicating the commissioning of the pump laser " POWER " (green)
- one indicator LED indicating the equipment status "NORMAL" (green)
- two alarms indicator LEDs "MAJOR" (red) and "MINOR" (red)
- two alarm loops

B.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation

It is possible to realize a maintenance operation by looping booster on ADR2500 eXtra reception via
an optical attenuator.

This operation allows local test of ADR2500 eXtra on booster.

The optical attenuator value must be set such as ADR2500 eXtra received power is compliant with the
U16.2 card specification.

B.2.3 - Display and directions for use

By pressure on the right keys, the LCD display allows to acceed to two dropdown menus :

1 - "ALARM MENU" (default displayed menu) :


- failures indications
- operating parameters of booster :
- current and temperature of pump laser
- equipment temperature
- status of DC power supply
- input and output powers

2 - "MAIN MENU" : set up menu which does not be used.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page B-5
OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.2.4 - Alarm processing

The following table indicates the display, the activation of LEDs, alarm loops and APR (Automatic
Power Reduction) associated to each failure.

"MAJOR" "MAJOR" Consequ


Failure indication LCD Display "POWER" "NORMAL" "MINOR" "MINOR" ent
LED LED LEDs Loops action
No failure "NO ALARM" Green Green Off Opened

No power supply Off Off Off Off MAJOR


and MINOR
Power supply failure "DC 48VX FAIL" Green Off MAJOR MAJOR

Opened fiber hood "NO ALARM" Red Green Off Opened APR
Input power under
"INPUT POWER LOW" Red Off MAJOR MAJOR APR
threshold
Input power over
"INPUT POWER HI" Green Off MAJOR MAJOR
threshold
Output power out of "OUTPUT POWER LOW" Green Off MAJOR MAJOR
limits "OUTPUT POWER HI"

Internal temperature "ENV TEMP OVER LIMITS" Green Off MINOR MINOR
out of limits

Laser temperature "LD1 TEMP OVER " Green Off MINOR MINOR
out of limits

Laser current out of "LD1 BIAS OVER" Green Off MINOR MINOR
limits

Table B-2 : Failure indication definition

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page B-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.3 - SPARE PART AND CABLES

Mnemonic Designation Code n

Optical booster OPTICAL BOOSTER +14 DBM 251 125 832

Table B-3 : List of items

Designation Length Code n


LOOPS Alarm loops 2,5 m 6 013 628
(1/2 cable) 12 m 6 013 161
POWER (1/2 cable) 3m 251 065 817
- (PAPA) 3m 55 670 797
IN or OUT Optical jumper 1,5 m 251 035 872
SC-PC/SC-PC 2,5 m 251 035 880
3,4 m 251 035 893
4,6 m 251 036 209
5,8 m 251 036 212
7m 251 036 220
8,2 m 251 036 233
9,4 m 251 036 241
12 m 251 036 251
15 m 251 036 262
20 m 251 036 275

Table B-4 : List of available cables

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page B-7
OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT

Optical characteristics
Wavelength range 1530 nm to 1565 nm
Operating input range -5 to +5 dBm
Saturated output power +14 to +17 dBm
Noise figure 6 dB max
Mechanical characteristics
Height 1U
Width 19" or ETSI
Depth Compatible with a 300 mm ETSI rack
Weight > 5 kg
Protection Index (PI) Corresponds to PI of used rack
Consumption
Equipment < 20 W
Environment characteristics
Mechanical (transport) ETS 300 019-2-2
Mechanical (operation) ETS 300 019-2-3
Climatic conditions ETS 300 019
Operating temperature - 5 C to + 45C
Transport and storage temperature - 20C to + 75C
Relative humidity (storage) 5% to 95%
Electrical ETS 300 386-2 of September 1999
Interference voltage (radioelectric NF EN 55022
frequency emissions)
Safety NF EN 60950, EN 60825
Power ETS 300 132-2 (equipment is TBTS)
Predicted reliability
Equipment 5 10-6 at 40C
Table B-5 : Technical characteristics

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page B-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
MUX 10000 A/T

C MUX 10000 A/T

C.1 - INSTALLATION

C.1.1 - General information


Two MUX 10000 are proposed : a MUX 10000A and a MUX 10000T ; the MUX A is a double
equipment of the MUX T and so realizes the MUX T function twice.

The MUX 10000T is associated to an terminal node (terminal ADR2500 eXtra).


The MUX 10000A is associated to an add/drop node (add/drop ADR2500 eXtra).

The MUX 10000T realizes the optical multiplexing demultiplexing of four wavelengths included in the
C band and spaced of 1,6 nm (200 GHz). This MUX 10000T is associated with ADR2500 eXtra
equipment which supply the four optical STM-16 signals from L16.2+ cards.

The four wavelengths values are :


- 1547,72 nm 0,1
- 1549,32 nm 0,1
- 1550,92 nm 0,1
- 1552,52 nm 0,1

This function is described by the following synoptic :


Optical line

OUT MUX IN MUX

IN 1547,72nm OUT 1547,72nm

IN 1549,32 nm OUT 1549,32 nm

IN1550.92 nm OUT1550.92 nm

IN 1552.52 nm MUX 10000T OUT 1552.52 nm

Figure C-1 : MUX10000T Block diagram (1/2 MUX 10000A)

This equipment is made up of passive components, therefore no external power supply is


needed.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page C-1
MUX 10000 A/T

This equipment appears as an independent module of 1U height, whose width is adaptable to


19" or ETSI size.

All the MUX 10000T access points are SC/PC optical and are located on front panel.

Figure C-1 block diagram and figure C-2 front panel show the MUX 10000T access points :

- 4 multiplexer optical inputs IN 1547,72, IN 1549,32, IN 1550,92 and IN 1552,52 which are
connected to optical emissions of four L16.2+ cards, each one with the right wavelength.
- 4 demultiplexer optical outputs OUT 1547,72, OUT 1549,32, OUT 1550,92 and OUT
1552,52 which are connected to optical receptions of four L16.2+ cards.
- 1 output OUT MUX which corresponds to the multiplexer output and offers up to 4
wavelengths, each one supporting a STM-16 signal
- 1 input IN MUX which corresponds to the demultiplexer input and offers up to 4
wavelengths, each one supporting a STM-16 signal

S MUX 10000T
OUT MUX IN

OUT 1547.72 IN OUT 1549.32 IN OUT 1550.92 IN OUT 1552.52 IN

Figure C-2 : MUX 10000 T Front panel

The MUX 10000T description applies also to the MUX 10000A ; this one contains, in the same
mechanism, two MUX 10000T functions. So, the MUX 10000A front panel presents the same
connectors access points twice.

S MUX 10000A
OUT MUX1 IN OUT MUX2 IN

OUT 1547.72 IN OUT 1549.32 IN OUT 1550.92 IN OUT 1552.52 IN OUT 1547.72 IN OUT 1549.32 IN OUT 1550.92 IN OUT 1552.52 IN

Figure C-3 : MUX 10000 A Front panel

C.1.2 - Installation

Figure C-4 : MUX 10000 A Installation in 19" rack

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page C-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
MUX 10000 A/T

According to the MUX 10000 location (19" or ETSI rack), there are specific fixation organs :

- two 19" brackets


- two ETSI brackets
- a screws and flat washers kit, already joined with the unit

The mounting kit for installation of the unit on the uprights of the 19" or ETSI rack, formed by 4
cage nuts and 4 screws, is not supplied with the equipment

Check that the unit's position in the rack does not prevent heat dissipation from other
equipment ; to do that, let 1 U between ADR2500 eXtra and MUX 10000.

No setting or configuration is needed on the equipment.

C.1.3 - Connection of access points

Figure C-5 : MUX 10000 A or T Optical access points

All access points are located on equipment front panel

Connections :

- Connect the optical output cables of the ADR2500 eXtra to the SC/PC connections IN
1547,72, IN 1549,32, IN 1550,92 and IN 1552,52 of the MUX 10000 (lower front plate
location)
- Connect the optical input cables of the ADR2500 eXtra to the SC/PC connections OUT
1547,72, OUT 1549,32, OUT 1550,92 and OUT 1552,52 of the MUX 10000 (lower front
plate location)
- Connect the optical output OUT MUX and input IN MUX cables of the MUX 10000 (uper
front plate location) towards the optical line.

C.2 - OPERATION

C.2.1 - General information


The equipment commissioning is realized by connection of optical cables on the associated
equipment and line.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page C-3
MUX 10000 A/T

C.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation


It is possible to realize a maintenance operation by looping output OUT MUX of the MUX
10000 on its input IN MUX, via an optical attenuator.

This operation allows local test of ADR2500 eXtra on MUX 10000.

The optical attenuator value must be set so that the ADR2500 eXtra received power is
compliant to the L16.2+ card receiver specification.

C.2.3 - Multiplexing demultiplexing function specification


The following table gives technical specification of the multiplexing demultiplexing function.

Parameters Units Values Remarks


Operating Center 1547,72 / 1549,32 / 1550,92 /
nm
Wavelength 1552,52
Tolerance in relation to the
nm (Max) 0,1
Center Wavelength
Channel Spacing nm 1,6 200 GHz
Passband Width nm(Min.) 0,8 ( 0,4) at 0,5dB
MUX 2.0
Insertion loss dB(Max.)
DEMUX 2.0
Passband Ripple dB(Max.) 0,5
Channel Uniformity dB (Max.) 1
Adjacent
Isolation dB (Min.) 30
Channels
Non-Adjacent
Isolation dB (Min.) 40
Channels
Directivity dB (Min.) 45
Return Loss dB (Min.) 45
PDL dB (Max.) 0,2
PMD ps (max.) 0,2
Thermal stability dB/C (max.) 0,005
Thermal Wavelength Drift nm/C (max.) 0,002
Operating Temperature C 0 to + 70
Storage Temperature C - 20 to + 70
Package Dimension mm 88 X 58 X 6,6 LxWxD

Table C-1 : MUX/DEMUX Specification

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page C-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
MUX 10000 A/T

C.2.4 - Optical power budget

Charactristics Values
Wavelengths (nm) 1547,72/1549,32/
1550,92/1552,52
Agregate rate (Mbit/s) 9953,28 20 ppm
(4x2488,32)
Code Uncoded (NRZ)
Budget without external 13 to 21 dB
attenuator (*)
Mean launched power at S point
on each optical multiplexer input +1 to +5 dBm
(**)
Receiver sensitivity at R point - 28 dBm
Receiver overload at R point - 8 dBm
Connector SC/PC
Table C-2 : Optical power budget

(*) In case of short optical line, an external optical attenuator is required to obtain an attenuation
between 13 dB and 21 dB. This attenuator is put at emission side on the output OUT MUX.

(**) Foresee optical 6 dB for the Add-Drop function

C.3 - SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

Designation Code n

MUX 10000 T 251 156 410


MUX 10000 A 251 163 949

Table C-3 : List of items

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page C-5
MUX 10000 A/T

Designation Length Code n


IN or OUT Optical jumper 1,5 m 251 035 872
SC-PC/SC-PC 2,5 m 251 035 880
3,4 m 251 035 893
4,6 m 251 036 209
5,8 m 251 036 212
7m 251 036 220
8,2 m 251 036 233
9,4 m 251 036 241
12 m 251 036 251
15 m 251 036 262
20 m 251 036 275

Table C-4 : List of available cables

C.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT

Mechanical characteristics
Height 1U
Width 19" or ETSI
Depth < 300 mm
Weight < 3 kg
Protection index (PI) Corresponds to Pi of used rack
Environment characteristics
Mechanical (transport) IEC 68-2-36 and IEC 68-2-29
Mechanical (operation) IEC 68-2-27
Climatic conditions ETS 300 019
Operating temperature - 10 C to + 45C
Transport and storage temperature - 20C to + 70C
Relative humidity (storage) < 95%
Predicted reliability *

Equipment MUX T : 3,4 10-6 MUX A : 6,8 10-6


Table C-5 : Technical Characteristics

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page C-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

D CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES
D.1 - CONFIGURING A PPP PORT
A PPP (Point to Point Protocol) port of an equipment must be configured when extending a network, just as for modification of the Equipment
address and the Ethernet port, using the GUI browser.
In the example below, the instructions are given for configuring the PPP2 port. Configuration of the PPP1 and PPP3 to PPP34 ports is identical to
the PPP2 port.
Click on the CTRL-2G cards ETH port then on the Interfaces Configuration link
Configure PPP2 port of the equipment'
Click on the Apply button then validate the reboot prompt via the Restart menu.
After restarting the equipment, the PPP2 port is configured.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page D-1
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

D.2 - VIEWING THE ROUTING CONFIGURATION


Click on the Routing Table link to view the equipment's routing configuration.
Example :

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page D-2 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

D.3 - BUILDING A POINT-TO-POINT LINK


Example of IP configuration of the interfaces for a point to point link.
For each equipment, you can configure the Ethernet port, the Equipment address and the 34 PPP (Point to Point Protocol) software ports from
PPP1 to PPP34 (DCCr or DCCm). PPP1 software port is assigned to the physical port LINE1, PPP2 software port is assigned to the physical port LINE2
and the PPP3 to PPP34 software ports are assigned to one of the 32 physical ports corresponding to the slots TRIB1 to TRIB8. You can also assign two
VC12 channels, P#1 and P#2, to each PPP3 to PPP34 software ports.

Refer to the 2.1.3 to configure the Ethernet


port and the Equipment address of each
equipment.
Refer to the D.1 to configure the PPP ports
of each equipment.

The gateway adress matches the Ethernet


port address of the equipment opposite the
PC.

The two ADR2500 eXtra units can be managed by a GUI browser.


Refer to the 2.1.4 for managing the equipment by the GUI browser.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page D-3
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

D.4 - BUILDING A BUS LINK

Example of IP configuration of the interfaces for a bus link.

The three ADR2500 eXtra units can be operated using a GUI browser.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page D-4 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

D.5 - BUILDING A RING

Example of IP configuration of the interfaces for a ring network.

The three ADR2500 eXtra units can be managed by a GUI browser.


The management links are secured by the OSPF protocol.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page D-5
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

D.6 - MANAGING EQUIPMENT THROUGH THE NETWORK OF A DIFFERENT SUPPLIER

Example of IP configuration of the interfaces for a network whose management links pass through a different manufacturers equipment.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page D-6 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

Details on configuring the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N3 and the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N4

Choice of the management VC12


1. The choice of the VC12 i is restricted to 20 first ones VC12 of a
TUG-3 and the VC12 i+1 is unusable.
2. Only the VC12 numbers whose next one is free are proposed in
the ports list.

Configuring the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N3


1. Configure the PPP3 port with GUI browser
Refer to the D.1 for the procedure
2. Create a connection with the GUI browser between the P#1
port and the T2:4#1_62 port of Trib2 Port4.
Consult the ADR2500 eXtra help menu to create a connection
by clicking on the HELP link of the main window.

Configuring the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N4


1. Configure the PPP3 port with GUI browser
Refer to the D.1 for the procedure
2. Create a connection with the GUI browser between the P#1 port
and the T1:1#1_62 port of Trib1 Port1.
Consult the ADR2500 eXtra help menu to create a connection by
clicking on the HELP link of the main window.

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page D-7
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

ADR2500 eXtra P3.0 Installation and Operation User Guide - 253 203 019-A
Page D-8 Sagem Communications document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
If you encounter problems during installation or use, do not hesitate to:

CONTACT OUR "SDH PRODUCTS" HOTLINE

The telephone co-ordinates, Fax and E-mail, are registered on


your maintenance contract

To obtain a maintenance contract, please contact your


commercial interface
Registered office: Le Ponant de Paris - 27, rue Leblanc - 75 015 PARIS - France
Tel.: +33 (0)1 58 11 77 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 58 11 77 77
http://www.sagem-communications.com

SAS with the capital of 158 291 895 - 440 294 510 RCS Paris

You might also like